\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the accelerator table is valid.
+Returns true if the accelerator table is valid.
\membersection{wxAcceleratorTable::operator $=$}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE if the accelerator tables were effectively equal, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the accelerator tables were effectively equal, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxAcceleratorTable::operator $!=$}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE if the accelerator tables were unequal, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the accelerator tables were unequal, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxActivateEvent::wxActivateEvent}
-\func{}{wxActivateEvent}{\param{WXTYPE }{eventType = 0}, \param{bool}{ active = TRUE}, \param{int }{id = 0}}
+\func{}{wxActivateEvent}{\param{WXTYPE }{eventType = 0}, \param{bool}{ active = true}, \param{int }{id = 0}}
Constructor.
\member{bool}{m\_active}
-TRUE if the window or application was activated.
+true if the window or application was activated.
\membersection{wxActivateEvent::GetActive}\label{wxactivateeventgetactive}
\constfunc{bool}{GetActive}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the application or window is being activated, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the application or window is being activated, false otherwise.
This function is called before processing any event and allows the application
to preempt the processing of some events. If this method returns $-1$ the event
-is processed normally, otherwise either {\tt TRUE} or {\tt FALSE} should be
+is processed normally, otherwise either {\tt true} or {\tt false} should be
returned and the event processing stops immediately considering that the event
had been already processed (for the former return value) or that it is not
going to be processed at all (for the latter one).
\constfunc{bool}{GetAuto3D}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if 3D control mode is on, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if 3D control mode is on, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\constfunc{bool}{GetExitFrameOnDelete}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the application will exit when the top-level window is deleted, FALSE
+Returns true if the application will exit when the top-level window is deleted, false
otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\constfunc{bool}{GetUseBestVisual}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the application will use the best visual on systems that support
-different visuals, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the application will use the best visual on systems that support
+different visuals, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\func{bool}{Initialized}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the application has been initialized (i.e. if\rtfsp
+Returns true if the application has been initialized (i.e. if\rtfsp
\helpref{wxApp::OnInit}{wxapponinit} has returned successfully). This can be useful for error
message routines to determine which method of output is best for the
current state of the program (some windowing systems may not like
\func{void}{OnAssert}{\param{const wxChar }{*file}, \param{int }{line}, \param{const wxChar }{*cond}, \param{const wxChar }{*msg}}
This function is called when an assert failure occurs, i.e. the condition
-specified in \helpref{wxASSERT}{wxassert} macro evaluated to {\tt FALSE}.
+specified in \helpref{wxASSERT}{wxassert} macro evaluated to {\tt false}.
It is only called in debug mode (when {\tt \_\_WXDEBUG\_\_} is defined) as
asserts are not left in the release code at all.
was specified by the user). The default behaviour is to show the program usage
text and abort the program.
-Return {\tt TRUE} to continue normal execution or {\tt FALSE} to return
-{\tt FALSE} from \helpref{OnInit}{wxapponinit} thus terminating the program.
+Return {\tt true} to continue normal execution or {\tt false} to return
+{\tt false} from \helpref{OnInit}{wxapponinit} thus terminating the program.
\wxheading{See also}
Called when the help option ({\tt --help}) was specified on the command line.
The default behaviour is to show the program usage text and abort the program.
-Return {\tt TRUE} to continue normal execution or {\tt FALSE} to return
-{\tt FALSE} from \helpref{OnInit}{wxapponinit} thus terminating the program.
+Return {\tt true} to continue normal execution or {\tt false} to return
+{\tt false} from \helpref{OnInit}{wxapponinit} thus terminating the program.
\wxheading{See also}
Don't forget to call the base class version unless you want to suppress
processing of the standard command line options.
-Return {\tt TRUE} to continue normal execution or {\tt FALSE} to return
-{\tt FALSE} from \helpref{OnInit}{wxapponinit} thus terminating the program.
+Return {\tt true} to continue normal execution or {\tt false} to return
+{\tt false} from \helpref{OnInit}{wxapponinit} thus terminating the program.
\wxheading{See also}
%%
%%Use the EVT\_END\_SESSION event table macro to handle query end session events.
%%
-%%The default handler calls \helpref{wxWindow::Close}{wxwindowclose} with a TRUE argument
+%%The default handler calls \helpref{wxWindow::Close}{wxwindowclose} with a true argument
%%(forcing the application to close itself silently).
%%
%%\wxheading{Remarks}
wxWindows you have to call the base class version in the derived class
OnInit().
-Return TRUE to continue processing, FALSE to exit the application.
+Return true to continue processing, false to exit the application.
\membersection{wxApp::OnInitCmdLine}\label{wxapponinitcmdline}
about to close down. Typically, an application will try to save unsaved documents
at this point.
-If \helpref{wxCloseEvent::CanVeto}{wxcloseeventcanveto} returns TRUE, the application
+If \helpref{wxCloseEvent::CanVeto}{wxcloseeventcanveto} returns true, the application
is allowed to veto the shutdown by calling \helpref{wxCloseEvent::Veto}{wxcloseeventveto}.
The application might veto the shutdown after prompting for documents to be saved, and the
user has cancelled the save.
Use the EVT\_QUERY\_END\_SESSION event table macro to handle query end session events.
You should check whether the application is forcing the deletion of the window
-using \helpref{wxCloseEvent::GetForce}{wxcloseeventgetforce}. If this is TRUE,
+using \helpref{wxCloseEvent::GetForce}{wxcloseeventgetforce}. If this is true,
destroy the window using \helpref{wxWindow::Destroy}{wxwindowdestroy}.
If not, it is up to you whether you respond by destroying the window.
The default handler calls \helpref{wxWindow::Close}{wxwindowclose} on the top-level window,
-and vetoes the shutdown if Close returns FALSE. This will be sufficient for many applications.
+and vetoes the shutdown if Close returns false. This will be sufficient for many applications.
\wxheading{Remarks}
Windows-only function for processing a message. This function
is called from the main message loop, checking for windows that
-may wish to process it. The function returns TRUE if the message
-was processed, FALSE otherwise. If you use wxWindows with another class
+may wish to process it. The function returns true if the message
+was processed, false otherwise. If you use wxWindows with another class
library with its own message loop, you should make sure that this
function is called to allow wxWindows to receive messages. For example,
to allow co-existence with the Microsoft Foundation Classes, override
BOOL CTheApp::PreTranslateMessage(MSG *msg)
{
if (wxTheApp && wxTheApp->ProcessMessage((WXMSW *)msg))
- return TRUE;
+ return true;
else
return CWinApp::PreTranslateMessage(msg);
}
\func{bool}{Pending}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if unprocessed events are in the window system event queue.
+Returns true if unprocessed events are in the window system event queue.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Remarks}
These functions poll the top-level windows, and their children, for idle event processing.
-If TRUE is returned, more OnIdle processing is requested by one or more window.
+If true is returned, more OnIdle processing is requested by one or more window.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{auto3D}{If TRUE, all controls will be created with 3D appearances unless
-overridden for a control or dialog. The default is TRUE}
+\docparam{auto3D}{If true, all controls will be created with 3D appearances unless
+overridden for a control or dialog. The default is true}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{flag}{If TRUE (the default), the application will exit when the top-level frame is
-deleted. If FALSE, the application will continue to run.}
+\docparam{flag}{If true (the default), the application will exit when the top-level frame is
+deleted. If false, the application will continue to run.}
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{flag}{If TRUE, the app will use the best visual.}
+\docparam{flag}{If true, the app will use the best visual.}
\membersection{wxApp::Yield}\label{wxappyield}
-\func{bool}{Yield}{\param{bool}{ onlyIfNeeded = FALSE}}
+\func{bool}{Yield}{\param{bool}{ onlyIfNeeded = false}}
Yields control to pending messages in the windowing system. This can be useful, for example, when a
time-consuming process writes to a text window. Without an occasional
Calling Yield() recursively is normally an error and an assert failure is
raised in debug build if such situation is detected. However if the the
-{\it onlyIfNeeded} parameter is {\tt TRUE}, the method will just silently
-return {\tt FALSE} instead.
+{\it onlyIfNeeded} parameter is {\tt true}, the method will just silently
+return {\tt false} instead.
\membersection{wxArray::Index}\label{wxarrayindex}
-\func{int}{Index}{\param{T\& }{item}, \param{bool }{searchFromEnd = FALSE}}
+\func{int}{Index}{\param{T\& }{item}, \param{bool }{searchFromEnd = false}}
\func{int}{Index}{\param{T\& }{item}}
\constfunc{bool}{IsEmpty}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the array is empty, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the array is empty, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxArray::Item}\label{wxarrayitem}
\constfunc{bool}{operator $==$}{\param{const wxArrayString\&}{ array}}
-Compares 2 arrays respecting the case. Returns TRUE only if the arrays have
+Compares 2 arrays respecting the case. Returns true only if the arrays have
the same number of elements and the same strings in the same order.
\membersection{wxArrayString::operator!=}\label{wxarraystringoperatornotequal}
\constfunc{bool}{operator $!=$}{\param{const wxArrayString\&}{ array}}
-Compares 2 arrays respecting the case. Returns TRUE if the arrays have
+Compares 2 arrays respecting the case. Returns true if the arrays have
different number of elements or if the elements don't match pairwise.
\membersection{wxArrayString::operator[]}\label{wxarraystringoperatorindex}
\membersection{wxArrayString::Index}\label{wxarraystringindex}
-\func{int}{Index}{\param{const char *}{ sz}, \param{bool}{ bCase = TRUE}, \param{bool}{ bFromEnd = FALSE}}
+\func{int}{Index}{\param{const char *}{ sz}, \param{bool}{ bCase = true}, \param{bool}{ bFromEnd = false}}
Search the element in the array, starting from the beginning if
-{\it bFromEnd} is FALSE or from end otherwise. If {\it bCase}, comparison is
+{\it bFromEnd} is false or from end otherwise. If {\it bCase}, comparison is
case sensitive (default), otherwise the case is ignored.
This function uses linear search for wxArrayString and binary search for
\func{}{IsEmpty}{}
-Returns TRUE if the array is empty, FALSE otherwise. This function returns the
+Returns true if the array is empty, false otherwise. This function returns the
same result as {\it GetCount() == 0} but is probably easier to read.
\membersection{wxArrayString::Item}\label{wxarraystringitem}
\membersection{wxArrayString::Sort}\label{wxarraystringsort}
-\func{void}{Sort}{\param{bool}{ reverseOrder = FALSE}}
+\func{void}{Sort}{\param{bool}{ reverseOrder = false}}
Sorts the array in alphabetical order or in reverse alphabetical order if
-{\it reverseOrder} is TRUE.
+{\it reverseOrder} is true.
{\bf Warning:} this function should not be used with sorted array because it
could break the order of items and, for example, subsequent calls to
\begin{verbatim}
wxAutomationObject excelObject;
if (excelObject.GetInstance("Excel.Application"))
- excelObject.PutProperty("ActiveCell.Font.Bold", TRUE);
+ excelObject.PutProperty("ActiveCell.Font.Bold", true);
\end{verbatim}
}
\constfunc{bool}{CreateInstance}{\param{const wxString\&}{ classId}}
-Creates a new object based on the class id, returning TRUE if the object was successfully created,
-or FALSE if not.
+Creates a new object based on the class id, returning true if the object was successfully created,
+or false if not.
\membersection{wxAutomationObject::GetDispatchPtr}\label{wxautomationobjectgetdispatchptr}
\constfunc{bool}{GetInstance}{\param{const wxString\&}{ classId}}
Retrieves the current object associated with a class id, and attaches the IDispatch pointer
-to this object. Returns TRUE if a pointer was successfully retrieved, FALSE otherwise.
+to this object. Returns true if a pointer was successfully retrieved, false otherwise.
Note that this cannot cope with two instances of a given OLE object being active simultaneously,
such as two copies of Excel running. Which object is referenced cannot currently be specified.
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the operation was successful, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the operation was successful, false otherwise.
\wxheading{Remarks}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the call succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the call succeeded, false otherwise.
\wxheading{Remarks}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the operation succeeded, false otherwise.
\wxheading{Remarks}
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if bitmap data is present.
+Returns true if bitmap data is present.
\membersection{wxBitmap::RemoveHandler}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the handler was found and removed, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the handler was found and removed, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the operation succeeded, false otherwise.
\wxheading{Remarks}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE if the bitmaps were effectively equal, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the bitmaps were effectively equal, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxBitmap::operator $!=$}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE if the bitmaps were unequal, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the bitmaps were unequal, false otherwise.
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the call succeeded, FALSE otherwise (the default).
+true if the call succeeded, false otherwise (the default).
\membersection{wxBitmapHandler::GetName}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the operation succeeded, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the operation succeeded, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\func{}{wxBrush}{\void}
Default constructor. The brush will be uninitialised, and \helpref{wxBrush::Ok}{wxbrushok} will
-return FALSE.
+return false.
\func{}{wxBrush}{\param{const wxColour\&}{ colour}, \param{int}{ style}}
\constfunc{wxBitmap *}{GetStipple}{\void}
Gets a pointer to the stipple bitmap. If the brush does not have a wxSTIPPLE style,
-this bitmap may be non-NULL but uninitialised (\helpref{wxBitmap::Ok}{wxbitmapok} returns FALSE).
+this bitmap may be non-NULL but uninitialised (\helpref{wxBitmap::Ok}{wxbitmapok} returns false).
\wxheading{See also}
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the brush is initialised. It will return FALSE if the default
+Returns true if the brush is initialised. It will return false if the default
constructor has been used (for example, the brush is a member of a class, or
NULL has been assigned to it).
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::EnableYearChange}\label{wxcalendarctrlenableyearchange}
-\func{void}{EnableYearChange}{\param{bool }{enable = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{EnableYearChange}{\param{bool }{enable = true}}
This function should be used instead of changing {\tt wxCAL\_NO\_YEAR\_CHANGE}
style bit directly. It allows or disallows the user to change the year
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::EnableMonthChange}\label{wxcalendarctrlenablemonthchange}
-\func{void}{EnableMonthChange}{\param{bool }{enable = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{EnableMonthChange}{\param{bool }{enable = true}}
This function should be used instead of changing
{\tt wxCAL\_NO\_MONTH\_CHANGE} style bit. It allows or disallows the user to
\membersection{wxCalendarCtrl::EnableHolidayDisplay}\label{wxcalendarctrlenableholidaydisplay}
-\func{void}{EnableHolidayDisplay}{\param{bool }{display = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{EnableHolidayDisplay}{\param{bool }{display = true}}
This function should be used instead of changing {\tt wxCAL\_SHOW\_HOLIDAYS}
style bit directly. It enables or disables the special highlighting of the
\constfunc{bool}{HasTextColour}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if this item has a non default text foreground colour.
+Returns {\tt true} if this item has a non default text foreground colour.
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::HasBackgroundColour}\label{wxcalendardateattrhasbackgroundcolour}
\constfunc{bool}{HasBackgroundColour}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if this attribute specifies a non default text background colour.
+Returns {\tt true} if this attribute specifies a non default text background colour.
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::HasBorderColour}\label{wxcalendardateattrhasbordercolour}
\constfunc{bool}{HasBorderColour}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if this attribute specifies a non default border colour.
+Returns {\tt true} if this attribute specifies a non default border colour.
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::HasFont}\label{wxcalendardateattrhasfont}
\constfunc{bool}{HasFont}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if this attribute specifies a non default font.
+Returns {\tt true} if this attribute specifies a non default font.
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::HasBorder}\label{wxcalendardateattrhasborder}
\constfunc{bool}{HasBorder}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if this attribute specifies a non default (i.e. any) border.
+Returns {\tt true} if this attribute specifies a non default (i.e. any) border.
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::IsHoliday}\label{wxcalendardateattrisholiday}
\constfunc{bool}{IsHoliday}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if this attribute specifies that this item should be
+Returns {\tt true} if this attribute specifies that this item should be
displayed as a holiday.
\membersection{wxCalendarDateAttr::GetTextColour}\label{wxcalendardateattrgettextcolour}
\func{void}{Hide}{\void}
-Same as \helpref{wxCaret::Show(FALSE)}{wxcaretshow}.
+Same as \helpref{wxCaret::Show(false)}{wxcaretshow}.
\membersection{wxCaret::IsOk}\label{wxcaretisok}
\constfunc{bool}{IsOk}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the caret was created successfully.
+Returns true if the caret was created successfully.
\membersection{wxCaret::IsVisible}\label{wxcaretisvisible}
\constfunc{bool}{IsVisible}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the caret is visible and FALSE if it is permanently
+Returns true if the caret is visible and false if it is permanently
hidden (if it is is blinking and not shown currently but will be after the
-next blink, this method still returns TRUE).
+next blink, this method still returns true).
\membersection{wxCaret::Move}\label{wxcaretmove}
\membersection{wxCaret::Show}\label{wxcaretshow}
-\func{void}{Show}{\param{bool }{show = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{Show}{\param{bool }{show = true}}
Shows or hides the caret. Notice that if the caret was hidden $N$ times, it
must be shown $N$ times as well to reappear on the screen.
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if it is checked, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+Returns {\tt true} if it is checked, {\tt false} otherwise.
\membersection{wxCheckBox::IsChecked}\label{wxcheckboxischecked}
This is just a maybe more readable synonym for
\helpref{GetValue}{wxcheckboxgetvalue}: just as the latter, it returns
-{\tt TRUE} if the checkbox is checked and {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+{\tt true} if the checkbox is checked and {\tt false} otherwise.
\membersection{wxCheckBox::SetValue}\label{wxcheckboxsetvalue}
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{state}{If {\tt TRUE}, the check is on, otherwise it is off.}
+\docparam{state}{If {\tt true}, the check is on, otherwise it is off.}
\membersection{wxCheckListBox::Check}\label{wxchecklistboxcheck}
-\func{void}{Check}{\param{int }{item}, \param{bool}{ check = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{Check}{\param{int }{item}, \param{bool}{ check = true}}
Checks the given item. Note that calling this method doesn't result in
wxEVT\_COMMAND\_CHECKLISTBOX\_TOGGLE being emitted.
\docparam{item}{Index of item to check.}
-\docparam{check}{TRUE if the item is to be checked, FALSE otherwise.}
+\docparam{check}{true if the item is to be checked, false otherwise.}
\membersection{wxCheckListBox::IsChecked}\label{wxchecklistboxischecked}
\constfunc{bool}{IsChecked}{\param{int}{ item}}
-Returns TRUE if the given item is checked, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the given item is checked, false otherwise.
\wxheading{Parameters}
\func{bool}{IsKindOf}{\param{wxClassInfo* }{info}}
-Returns TRUE if this class is a kind of (inherits from) the given class.
+Returns true if this class is a kind of (inherits from) the given class.
See also the \helpref{wxDataObject overview}{wxdataobjectoverview} for further information.
-Call \helpref{wxClipboard::Open}{wxclipboardopen} to get ownership of the clipboard. If this operation returns TRUE, you
+Call \helpref{wxClipboard::Open}{wxclipboardopen} to get ownership of the clipboard. If this operation returns true, you
now own the clipboard. Call \helpref{wxClipboard::SetData}{wxclipboardsetdata} to put data
on the clipboard, or \helpref{wxClipboard::GetData}{wxclipboardgetdata} to
retrieve data from the clipboard. Call \helpref{wxClipboard::Close}{wxclipboardclose} to close
Flushes the clipboard: this means that the data which is currently on
clipboard will stay available even after the application exits (possibly
eating memory), otherwise the clipboard will be emptied on exit.
-Returns FALSE if the operation is unsuccesful for any reason.
+Returns false if the operation is unsuccesful for any reason.
\membersection{wxClipboard::GetData}\label{wxclipboardgetdata}
\func{bool}{GetData}{\param{wxDataObject\&}{ data}}
Call this function to fill {\it data} with data on the clipboard, if available in the required
-format. Returns TRUE on success.
+format. Returns true on success.
\membersection{wxClipboard::IsOpened}\label{wxclipboardisopened}
\constfunc{bool}{IsOpened}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the clipboard has been opened.
+Returns true if the clipboard has been opened.
\membersection{wxClipboard::IsSupported}\label{wxclipboardissupported}
\func{bool}{IsSupported}{\param{const wxDataFormat\&}{ format}}
-Returns TRUE if the format of the given data object is available on the clipboard.
+Returns true if the format of the given data object is available on the clipboard.
\membersection{wxClipboard::Open}\label{wxclipboardopen}
Call \helpref{wxClipboard::Close}{wxclipboardclose} when you have finished with the clipboard. You
should keep the clipboard open for only a very short time.
-Returns TRUE on success. This should be tested (as in the sample shown above).
+Returns true on success. This should be tested (as in the sample shown above).
\membersection{wxClipboard::SetData}\label{wxclipboardsetdata}
\membersection{wxClipboard::UsePrimarySelection}\label{wxclipboarduseprimary}
-\func{void}{UsePrimarySelection}{\param{bool}{ primary = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{UsePrimarySelection}{\param{bool}{ primary = true}}
On platforms supporting it (currently only GTK), selects the so called
PRIMARY SELECTION as the clipboard as opposed to the normal clipboard,
-if {\it primary} is TRUE.
+if {\it primary} is true.
calling the \helpref{wxWindow::Close}{wxwindowclose} function.
You should check whether the application is forcing the deletion of the window
-using \helpref{wxCloseEvent::CanVeto}{wxcloseeventcanveto}. If this is {\tt FALSE},
+using \helpref{wxCloseEvent::CanVeto}{wxcloseeventcanveto}. If this is {\tt false},
you {\it must} destroy the window using \helpref{wxWindow::Destroy}{wxwindowdestroy}.
-If the return value is TRUE, it is up to you whether you respond by destroying the window.
+If the return value is true, it is up to you whether you respond by destroying the window.
If you don't destroy the window, you should call \helpref{wxCloseEvent::Veto}{wxcloseeventveto} to
let the calling code know that you did not destroy the window. This allows the \helpref{wxWindow::Close}{wxwindowclose} function
-to return {\tt TRUE} or {\tt FALSE} depending on whether the close instruction was honoured or not.
+to return {\tt true} or {\tt false} depending on whether the close instruction was honoured or not.
\wxheading{Derived from}
\func{bool}{CanVeto}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if you can veto a system shutdown or a window close event.
+Returns true if you can veto a system shutdown or a window close event.
Vetoing a window close event is not possible if the calling code wishes to
force the application to exit, and so this function must be called to check this.
\constfunc{bool}{GetLoggingOff}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the user is logging off.
+Returns true if the user is logging off.
\membersection{wxCloseEvent::GetSessionEnding}\label{wxcloseeventgetsessionending}
\constfunc{bool}{GetSessionEnding}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the session is ending.
+Returns true if the session is ending.
\membersection{wxCloseEvent::GetForce}\label{wxcloseeventgetforce}
\constfunc{bool}{GetForce}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the application wishes to force the window to close.
+Returns true if the application wishes to force the window to close.
This will shortly be obsolete, replaced by CanVeto.
\membersection{wxCloseEvent::SetCanVeto}\label{wxcloseeventsetcanveto}
\membersection{wxCloseEvent::Veto}\label{wxcloseeventveto}
-\func{void}{Veto}{\param{bool}{ veto = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{Veto}{\param{bool}{ veto = true}}
Call this from your event handler to veto a system shutdown or to signal
to the calling application that a window close did not happen.
You can only veto a shutdown if \helpref{wxCloseEvent::CanVeto}{wxcloseeventcanveto} returns
-TRUE.
+true.
\member{long}{m\_extraLong}
Extra information. If the event comes from a listbox selection, it is
-a boolean determining whether the event was a selection (TRUE) or a
-deselection (FALSE). A listbox deselection only occurs for
+a boolean determining whether the event was a selection (true) or a
+deselection (false). A listbox deselection only occurs for
multiple-selection boxes, and in this case the index and string values
are indeterminate and the listbox must be examined by the application.
\constfunc{bool}{IsChecked}{\void}
This method can be used with checkbox and menu events: for the checkboxes, the
-method returns {\tt TRUE} for a selection event and {\tt FALSE} for a
+method returns {\tt true} for a selection event and {\tt false} for a
deselection one. For the menu events, this method indicates if the menu item
just has become checked or unchecked (and thus only makes sense for checkable
menu items).
\func{bool}{IsSelection}{\void}
-For a listbox or choice event, returns TRUE if it is a selection, FALSE if it
+For a listbox or choice event, returns true if it is a selection, false if it
is a deselection.
\membersection{wxCommandEvent::SetClientData}
\helpref{Found}{wxcmdlineparserfoundswitch} to determine if the switch was given
or not, for an option or a parameter, you will call a version of {\tt Found()}
which also returns the associated value in the provided variable. All
-{\tt Found()} functions return TRUE if the switch or option were found in the
-command line or FALSE if they were not specified.
+{\tt Found()} functions return true if the switch or option were found in the
+command line or false if they were not specified.
%%%%%%%%%%%%% Methods in alphabetic order %%%%%%%%%%%%%
\helponly{\insertatlevel{2}{
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::EnableLongOptions}\label{wxcmdlineparserenablelongoptions}
-\func{void}{EnableLongOptions}{\param{bool }{enable = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{EnableLongOptions}{\param{bool }{enable = true}}
Enable or disable support for the long options.
\func{void}{DisableLongOptions}{\void}
-Identical to \helpref{EnableLongOptions(FALSE)}{wxcmdlineparserenablelongoptions}.
+Identical to \helpref{EnableLongOptions(false)}{wxcmdlineparserenablelongoptions}.
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::AreLongOptionsEnabled}\label{wxcmdlineparserarelongoptionsenabled}
\func{bool}{AreLongOptionsEnabled}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if long options are enabled, otherwise FALSE.
+Returns true if long options are enabled, otherwise false.
\wxheading{See also}
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::Parse}\label{wxcmdlineparserparse}
-\func{int}{Parse}{\param{bool }{giveUsage = {\tt TRUE}}}
+\func{int}{Parse}{\param{bool }{giveUsage = {\tt true}}}
Parse the command line, return $0$ if ok, $-1$ if {\tt "-h"} or {\tt "--help"}
option was encountered and the help message was given or a positive value if a
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{giveUsage}{If {\tt TRUE} (default), the usage message is given if a
+\docparam{giveUsage}{If {\tt true} (default), the usage message is given if a
syntax error was encountered while parsing the command line or if help was
-requested. If {\tt FALSE}, only error messages about possible syntax errors
+requested. If {\tt false}, only error messages about possible syntax errors
are given, use \helpref{Usage}{wxcmdlineparserusage} to show the usage message
from the caller if needed.}
\constfunc{bool}{Found}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}}
-Returns TRUE if the given switch was found, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the given switch was found, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::Found}\label{wxcmdlineparserfoundstringoption}
\constfunc{bool}{Found}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{wxString* }{value}}
-Returns TRUE if an option taking a string value was found and stores the
+Returns true if an option taking a string value was found and stores the
value in the provided pointer (which should not be NULL).
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::Found}\label{wxcmdlineparserfoundintoption}
\constfunc{bool}{Found}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{long* }{value}}
-Returns TRUE if an option taking an integer value was found and stores
+Returns true if an option taking an integer value was found and stores
the value in the provided pointer (which should not be NULL).
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::Found}\label{wxcmdlineparserfounddateoption}
\constfunc{bool}{Found}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{wxDateTime* }{value}}
-Returns TRUE if an option taking a date value was found and stores the
+Returns true if an option taking a date value was found and stores the
value in the provided pointer (which should not be NULL).
\membersection{wxCmdLineParser::GetParamCount}\label{wxcmdlineparsergetparamcount}
\func{virtual bool}{CanUndo}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the currently-active command can be undone, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the currently-active command can be undone, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxCommandProcessor::ClearCommands}
\membersection{wxCommandProcessor::Submit}
-\func{virtual bool}{Submit}{\param{wxCommand *}{command}, \param{bool}{ storeIt = TRUE}}
+\func{virtual bool}{Submit}{\param{wxCommand *}{command}, \param{bool}{ storeIt = true}}
Submits a new command to the command processor. The command processor
calls wxCommand::Do to execute the command; if it succeeds, the command
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the colour object is valid (the colour has been initialised with RGB values).
+Returns true if the colour object is valid (the colour has been initialised with RGB values).
\membersection{wxColour::Red}\label{wxcolourred}
\func{}{wxColourData}{\void}
Constructor. Initializes the custom colours to white, the {\it data colour} setting
-to black, and the {\it choose full} setting to TRUE.
+to black, and the {\it choose full} setting to true.
\membersection{wxColourData::\destruct{wxColourData}}
Under Windows, determines whether the Windows colour dialog will display the full dialog
with custom colour selection controls. Has no meaning under other platforms.
-The default value is TRUE.
+The default value is true.
\membersection{wxColourData::GetColour}\label{wxcolourdatagetcolour}
Under Windows, tells the Windows colour dialog to display the full dialog
with custom colour selection controls. Under other platforms, has no effect.
-The default value is TRUE.
+The default value is true.
\membersection{wxColourData::SetColour}\label{wxcolourdatasetcolour}
\membersection{wxCommand::wxCommand}
-\func{}{wxCommand}{\param{bool}{ canUndo = FALSE}, \param{const wxString\& }{name = NULL}}
+\func{}{wxCommand}{\param{bool}{ canUndo = false}, \param{const wxString\& }{name = NULL}}
Constructor. wxCommand is an abstract class, so you will need to derive
a new class and call this constructor from your own constructor.
\func{bool}{CanUndo}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the command can be undone, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the command can be undone, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxCommand::Do}
\func{bool}{Do}{\void}
Override this member function to execute the appropriate action when called.
-Return TRUE to indicate that the action has taken place, FALSE otherwise.
-Returning FALSE will indicate to the command processor that the action is
+Return true to indicate that the action has taken place, false otherwise.
+Returning false will indicate to the command processor that the action is
not undoable and should not be added to the command history.
\membersection{wxCommand::GetName}
\func{bool}{Undo}{\void}
Override this member function to un-execute a previous Do.
-Return TRUE to indicate that the action has taken place, FALSE otherwise.
-Returning FALSE will indicate to the command processor that the action is
+Return true to indicate that the action has taken place, false otherwise.
+Returning false will indicate to the command processor that the action is
not redoable and no change should be made to the command history.
How you implement this command is totally application dependent, but typical
\wxheading{Return value}
-The second form returns {\tt TRUE} if the condition has been signalled, or
-{\tt FALSE} if it returned because the timeout has elapsed.
+The second form returns {\tt true} if the condition has been signalled, or
+{\tt false} if it returned because the timeout has elapsed.
\membersection{Enumeration}
The functions in this section allow to enumerate all entries and groups in the
-config file. All functions here return FALSE when there are no more items.
+config file. All functions here return false when there are no more items.
You must pass the same index to GetNext and GetFirst (don't modify it).
Please note that it is {\bf not} the index of the current item (you will have
\membersection{Rename entries/groups}
The functions in this section allow to rename entries or subgroups of the
-current group. They will return FALSE on error. typically because either the
+current group. They will return false on error. typically because either the
entry/group with the original name doesn't exist, because the entry/group with
the new name already exists or because the function is not supported in this
wxConfig implementation.
Although this feature is very useful, it may be annoying if you read a value
which containts '\$' or '\%' symbols (\% is used for environment variables
expansion under Windows) which are not used for environment variable
-expansion. In this situation you may call SetExpandEnvVars(FALSE) just before
-reading this value and SetExpandEnvVars(TRUE) just after. Another solution
+expansion. In this situation you may call SetExpandEnvVars(false) just before
+reading this value and SetExpandEnvVars(true) just after. Another solution
would be to prefix the offending symbols with a backslash.
The following functions control this option:
\membersection{wxConfigBase::DeleteEntry}\label{wxconfigbasedeleteentry}
-\func{bool}{DeleteEntry}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{bool}{ bDeleteGroupIfEmpty = TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{DeleteEntry}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{bool}{ bDeleteGroupIfEmpty = true}}
Deletes the specified entry and the group it belongs to if it was the last key
in it and the second parameter is true.
\constfunc{bool}{Exists}{\param{wxString\& }{strName}}
-returns TRUE if either a group or an entry with a given name exists
+returns true if either a group or an entry with a given name exists
\membersection{wxConfigBase::Flush}\label{wxconfigbaseflush}
-\func{bool}{Flush}{\param{bool }{bCurrentOnly = FALSE}}
+\func{bool}{Flush}{\param{bool }{bCurrentOnly = false}}
permanently writes all changes (otherwise, they're only written from object's
destructor)
\membersection{wxConfigBase::Get}\label{wxconfigbaseget}
-\func{static wxConfigBase *}{Get}{\param{bool }{CreateOnDemand = TRUE}}
+\func{static wxConfigBase *}{Get}{\param{bool }{CreateOnDemand = true}}
Get the current config object. If there is no current object and
-{\it CreateOnDemand} is TRUE, creates one
+{\it CreateOnDemand} is true, creates one
(using {\it Create}) unless DontCreateOnDemand was called previously.
\membersection{wxConfigBase::GetAppName}\label{wxconfigbasegetappname}
\membersection{wxConfigBase::GetNumberOfEntries}\label{wxconfigbasegetnumberofentries}
-\constfunc{uint }{GetNumberOfEntries}{\param{bool }{bRecursive = FALSE}}
+\constfunc{uint }{GetNumberOfEntries}{\param{bool }{bRecursive = false}}
\membersection{wxConfigBase::GetNumberOfGroups}\label{wxconfigbasegetnumberofgroups}
-\constfunc{uint}{GetNumberOfGroups}{\param{bool }{bRecursive = FALSE}}
+\constfunc{uint}{GetNumberOfGroups}{\param{bool }{bRecursive = false}}
Get number of entries/subgroups in the current group, with or without its
subgroups.
\constfunc{bool}{HasEntry}{\param{wxString\& }{strName}}
-returns TRUE if the entry by this name exists
+returns true if the entry by this name exists
\membersection{wxConfigBase::HasGroup}\label{wxconfigbasehasgroup}
\constfunc{bool}{HasGroup}{\param{const wxString\& }{strName}}
-returns TRUE if the group by this name exists
+returns true if the group by this name exists
\membersection{wxConfigBase::IsExpandingEnvVars}\label{wxconfigbaseisexpandingenvvars}
\constfunc{bool}{IsExpandingEnvVars}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if we are expanding environment variables in key values.
+Returns true if we are expanding environment variables in key values.
\membersection{wxConfigBase::IsRecordingDefaults}\label{wxconfigbaseisrecordingdefaults}
\constfunc{bool}{IsRecordingDefaults}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if we are writing defaults back to the config file.
+Returns true if we are writing defaults back to the config file.
\membersection{wxConfigBase::Read}\label{wxconfigbaseread}
\constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{key}, \param{wxString*}{ str}}
-Read a string from the key, returning TRUE if the value was read. If the key
+Read a string from the key, returning true if the value was read. If the key
was not found, {\it str} is not changed.
\constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{key}, \param{wxString*}{ str}, \param{const wxString\& }{defaultVal}}
Read a string from the key. The default value is returned if the key was not
found.
-Returns TRUE if value was really read, FALSE if the default was used.
+Returns true if value was really read, false if the default was used.
\constfunc{wxString}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{key}, \param{const
wxString\& }{defaultVal}}
\constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{long*}{ l}}
-Reads a long value, returning TRUE if the value was found. If the value was
+Reads a long value, returning true if the value was found. If the value was
not found, {\it l} is not changed.
\constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{long*}{ l},
\param{long}{ defaultVal}}
-Reads a long value, returning TRUE if the value was found. If the value was
+Reads a long value, returning true if the value was found. If the value was
not found, {\it defaultVal} is used instead.
\constfunc{long }{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{key}, \param{long}{ defaultVal}}
\constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{double*}{ d}}
-Reads a double value, returning TRUE if the value was found. If the value was
+Reads a double value, returning true if the value was found. If the value was
not found, {\it d} is not changed.
\constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{double*}{ d},
\param{double}{ defaultVal}}
-Reads a double value, returning TRUE if the value was found. If the value was
+Reads a double value, returning true if the value was found. If the value was
not found, {\it defaultVal} is used instead.
\constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{bool*}{ b}}
-Reads a bool value, returning TRUE if the value was found. If the value was
+Reads a bool value, returning true if the value was found. If the value was
not found, {\it b} is not changed.
\constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{bool*}{ d},
\param{bool}{ defaultVal}}
-Reads a bool value, returning TRUE if the value was found. If the value was
+Reads a bool value, returning true if the value was found. If the value was
not found, {\it defaultVal} is used instead.
\pythonnote{In place of a single overloaded method name, wxPython
the new one) shouldn't contain backslashes, i.e. only simple names and not
arbitrary paths are accepted by this function.
-Returns FALSE if the {\it oldName} doesn't exist or if {\it newName} already
+Returns false if the {\it oldName} doesn't exist or if {\it newName} already
exists.
\membersection{wxConfigBase::RenameGroup}\label{wxconfigbaserenamegroup}
the new one) shouldn't contain backslashes, i.e. only simple names and not
arbitrary paths are accepted by this function.
-Returns FALSE if the {\it oldName} doesn't exist or if {\it newName} already
+Returns false if the {\it oldName} doesn't exist or if {\it newName} already
exists.
\membersection{wxConfigBase::Set}\label{wxconfigbaseset}
\membersection{wxConfigBase::SetExpandEnvVars}\label{wxconfigbasesetexpandenvvars}
-\func{void}{SetExpandEnvVars }{\param{bool }{bDoIt = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetExpandEnvVars }{\param{bool }{bDoIt = true}}
Determine whether we wish to expand environment variables in key values.
\membersection{wxConfigBase::SetRecordDefaults}\label{wxconfigbasesetrecorddefaults}
-\func{void}{SetRecordDefaults}{\param{bool }{bDoIt = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetRecordDefaults}{\param{bool }{bDoIt = true}}
Sets whether defaults are recorded to the config file whenever an attempt to
read read the value which is not present in it is done.
\func{bool}{Write}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{bool}{ value}}
-These functions write the specified value to the config file and return TRUE
+These functions write the specified value to the config file and return true
on success.
\pythonnote{In place of a single overloaded method name, wxPython
\membersection{wxContextHelp::wxContextHelp}
-\func{}{wxContextHelp}{\param{wxWindow*}{ window = NULL}, \param{bool}{ doNow = TRUE}}
+\func{}{wxContextHelp}{\param{wxWindow*}{ window = NULL}, \param{bool}{ doNow = true}}
Constructs a context help object, calling \helpref{BeginContextHelp}{wxcontexthelpbegincontexthelp} if\rtfsp
-{\it doNow} is TRUE (the default).
+{\it doNow} is true (the default).
If {\it window} is NULL, the top window is used.
Puts the application into context-sensitive help mode. {\it window} is the window
which will be used to catch events; if NULL, the top window will be used.
-Returns TRUE if the application was successfully put into context-sensitive help mode.
+Returns true if the application was successfully put into context-sensitive help mode.
This function only returns when the event loop has finished.
\membersection{wxContextHelp::EndContextHelp}\label{wxcontexthelpendcontexthelp}
\constfunc{bool}{IsEmpty}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the control is empty or {\tt FALSE} if it has some items.
+Returns {\tt true} if the control is empty or {\tt false} if it has some items.
\wxheading{See also}
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if cursor data is present.
+Returns true if cursor data is present.
\membersection{wxCursor::operator $=$}\label{wxcursorassignment}
\func{bool}{ErrorOccured}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the last action caused an error.
+Returns true if the last action caused an error.
\membersection{wxDatabase::ErrorSnapshot}
\func{bool}{GetInfo}{\param{long}{ infoType}, \param{const wxString\& }{buf}, \param{int}{ bufSize=-1}}
-Returns requested information. The return value is TRUE if successful, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns requested information. The return value is true if successful, false otherwise.
{\it infoType} is an ODBC identifier specifying the type of information to be returned.
\membersection{wxDatabase::GetODBCVersionFloat}
-\func{float}{GetODBCVersionFloat}{\param{bool}{ implementation=TRUE}}
+\func{float}{GetODBCVersionFloat}{\param{bool}{ implementation=true}}
Returns the version of ODBC in floating point format, e.g. 2.50.
-{\it implementation} should be TRUE to get the DLL version, or FALSE to get the
+{\it implementation} should be true to get the DLL version, or false to get the
version defined in the {\tt sql.h} header file.
This function can return the value 0.0 if the header version number is not defined (for early
\membersection{wxDatabase::GetODBCVersionString}
-\func{wxString}{GetODBCVersionString}{\param{bool}{ implementation=TRUE}}
+\func{wxString}{GetODBCVersionString}{\param{bool}{ implementation=true}}
Returns the version of ODBC in string format, e.g. ``02.50".
-{\it implementation} should be TRUE to get the DLL version, or FALSE to get the
+{\it implementation} should be true to get the DLL version, or false to get the
version defined in the {\tt sql.h} header file.
This function can return the value ``00.00" if the header version number is not defined (for early
\func{bool}{IsOpen}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if a connection is open.
+Returns true if a connection is open.
\membersection{wxDatabase::Open}\label{wxdatabaseopen}
-\func{bool}{Open}{\param{const wxString\& }{datasource}, \param{bool}{ exclusive = FALSE}, \param{bool }{readOnly = TRUE},
+\func{bool}{Open}{\param{const wxString\& }{datasource}, \param{bool}{ exclusive = false}, \param{bool }{readOnly = true},
\param{const wxString\& }{username = ``ODBC"}, \param{const wxString\& }{password = ``"}}
Connect to a data source. {\it datasource} contains the name of the ODBC data
\constfunc{bool}{operator $==$}{\param{const wxDataFormat\&}{ format}}
-Returns TRUE if the formats are equal.
+Returns true if the formats are equal.
\membersection{wxDataFormat::operator $!=$}\label{wxdataformatoperatorneq}
\constfunc{bool}{operator $!=$}{\param{const wxDataFormat\&}{ format}}
-Returns TRUE if the formats are different.
+Returns true if the formats are different.
\membersection{wxDataFormat::GetId}\label{wxdataformatgetid}
\constfunc{virtual bool}{GetDataHere}{\param{const wxDataFormat\&}{ format}, \param{void }{*buf} }
The method will write the data of the format {\it format} in the buffer {\it
-buf} and return TRUE on success, FALSE on failure.
+buf} and return true on success, false on failure.
\membersection{wxDataObject::GetDataSize}\label{wxdataobjectgetdatasize}
Set the data in the format {\it format} of the length {\it len} provided in the
buffer {\it buf}.
-Returns TRUE on success, FALSE on failure.
+Returns true on success, false on failure.
\constfunc{bool}{IsLeapYear}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the year of this date is a leap year.
+Returns true if the year of this date is a leap year.
\membersection{wxDate::Set}\label{wxdateset}
\membersection{wxDate::SetOption}\label{wxdatesetoption}
-\func{int}{SetOption}{\param{int}{ option}, \param{const bool}{ enable=TRUE}}
+\func{int}{SetOption}{\param{int}{ option}, \param{const bool}{ enable=true}}
Enables or disables an option for formatting.
\func{friend bool}{operator $<$}{\param{const wxDate\&}{ date1}, \param{const wxDate\&}{ date2}}
-Function to compare two dates, returning TRUE if {\it date1} is earlier than {\it date2}.
+Function to compare two dates, returning true if {\it date1} is earlier than {\it date2}.
\membersection{wxDate::operator $<=$}\label{wxdatelessthaneq}
\func{friend bool}{operator $<=$}{\param{const wxDate\&}{ date1}, \param{const wxDate\&}{ date2}}
-Function to compare two dates, returning TRUE if {\it date1} is earlier than or equal to {\it date2}.
+Function to compare two dates, returning true if {\it date1} is earlier than or equal to {\it date2}.
\membersection{wxDate::operator $>$}\label{wxdategreaterthan}
\func{friend bool}{operator $>$}{\param{const wxDate\&}{ date1}, \param{const wxDate\&}{ date2}}
-Function to compare two dates, returning TRUE if {\it date1} is later than {\it date2}.
+Function to compare two dates, returning true if {\it date1} is later than {\it date2}.
\membersection{wxDate::operator $>=$}\label{wxdategreaterthaneq}
\func{friend bool}{operator $>=$}{\param{const wxDate\&}{ date1}, \param{const wxDate\&}{ date2}}
-Function to compare two dates, returning TRUE if {\it date1} is later than or equal to {\it date2}.
+Function to compare two dates, returning true if {\it date1} is later than or equal to {\it date2}.
\membersection{wxDate::operator $==$}\label{wxdateequals}
\func{friend bool}{operator $==$}{\param{const wxDate\&}{ date1}, \param{const wxDate\&}{ date2}}
-Function to compare two dates, returning TRUE if {\it date1} is equal to {\it date2}.
+Function to compare two dates, returning true if {\it date1} is equal to {\it date2}.
\membersection{wxDate::operator $!=$}\label{wxdatenotequals}
\func{friend bool}{operator $!=$}{\param{const wxDate\&}{ date1}, \param{const wxDate\&}{ date2}}
-Function to compare two dates, returning TRUE if {\it date1} is not equal to {\it date2}.
+Function to compare two dates, returning true if {\it date1} is not equal to {\it date2}.
\membersection{wxDate::operator \cinsert}\label{wxdateinsert}
\constfunc{bool}{operator$==$}{\param{wxDateSpan\&}{ other}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if this date span is equal to the other one. Two date spans
+Returns {\tt true} if this date span is equal to the other one. Two date spans
are considered equal if and only if they have the same number of years and
months and the same total number of days (counting both days and weeks).
\constfunc{bool}{operator$!=$}{\param{wxDateSpan\&}{ other}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if this date span is different from the other one.
+Returns {\tt true} if this date span is different from the other one.
\wxheading{See also}
\func{static bool}{IsLeapYear}{\param{int }{year = Inv\_Year}, \param{Calendar }{cal = Gregorian}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the {\it year} is a leap one in the specified calendar.
+Returns {\tt true} if the {\it year} is a leap one in the specified calendar.
This functions supports Gregorian and Julian calendars.
\func{static bool}{IsWestEuropeanCountry}{\param{Country }{country = Country\_Default}}
-This function returns {\tt TRUE} if the specified (or default) country is one
+This function returns {\tt true} if the specified (or default) country is one
of Western European ones. It is used internally by wxDateTime to determine the
DST convention and date and time formatting rules.
\func{static bool}{IsDSTApplicable}{\param{int }{year = Inv\_Year}, \param{Country }{country = Country\_Default}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if DST was used n the given year (the current one by
+Returns {\tt true} if DST was used n the given year (the current one by
default) in the given country.
\membersection{wxDateTime::Now}\label{wxdatetimenow}
\constfunc{bool}{IsValid}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the object represents a valid time moment.
+Returns {\tt true} if the object represents a valid time moment.
\membersection{wxDateTime::GetTm}\label{wxdatetimegettm}
\constfunc{bool}{IsWorkDay}{\param{Country }{country = Country\_Default}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} is this day is not a holiday in the given country.
+Returns {\tt true} is this day is not a holiday in the given country.
\membersection{wxDateTime::IsGregorianDate}\label{wxdatetimeisgregoriandate}
\constfunc{bool}{IsGregorianDate}{\param{GregorianAdoption }{country = Gr\_Standard}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the given date os later than the date of adoption of the
+Returns {\tt true} if the given date os later than the date of adoption of the
Gregorian calendar in the given country (and hence the Gregorian calendar
calculations make sense for it).
\constfunc{bool}{IsEqualTo}{\param{const wxDateTime\& }{datetime}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the two dates are strictly identical.
+Returns {\tt true} if the two dates are strictly identical.
\membersection{wxDateTime::IsEarlierThan}\label{wxdatetimeisearlierthan}
\constfunc{bool}{IsEarlierThan}{\param{const wxDateTime\& }{datetime}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if this date precedes the given one.
+Returns {\tt true} if this date precedes the given one.
\membersection{wxDateTime::IsLaterThan}\label{wxdatetimeislaterthan}
\constfunc{bool}{IsLaterThan}{\param{const wxDateTime\& }{datetime}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if this date is later than the given one.
+Returns {\tt true} if this date is later than the given one.
\membersection{wxDateTime::IsStrictlyBetween}\label{wxdatetimeisstrictlybetween}
\constfunc{bool}{IsStrictlyBetween}{\param{const wxDateTime\& }{t1}, \param{const wxDateTime\& }{t2}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if this date lies strictly between the two others,
+Returns {\tt true} if this date lies strictly between the two others,
\wxheading{See also}
\constfunc{bool}{IsBetween}{\param{const wxDateTime\& }{t1}, \param{const wxDateTime\& }{t2}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if \helpref{IsStrictlyBetween}{wxdatetimeisstrictlybetween}
-is {\tt TRUE} or if the date is equal to one of the limit values.
+Returns {\tt true} if \helpref{IsStrictlyBetween}{wxdatetimeisstrictlybetween}
+is {\tt true} or if the date is equal to one of the limit values.
\wxheading{See also}
\constfunc{bool}{IsSameDate}{\param{const wxDateTime\& }{dt}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the date is the same without comparing the time parts.
+Returns {\tt true} if the date is the same without comparing the time parts.
\membersection{wxDateTime::IsSameTime}\label{wxdatetimeissametime}
\constfunc{bool}{IsSameTime}{\param{const wxDateTime\& }{dt}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the time is the same (although dates may differ).
+Returns {\tt true} if the time is the same (although dates may differ).
\membersection{wxDateTime::IsEqualUpTo}\label{wxdatetimeisequalupto}
\constfunc{bool}{IsEqualUpTo}{\param{const wxDateTime\& }{dt}, \param{const wxTimeSpan\& }{ts}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the date is equal to another one up to the given time
+Returns {\tt true} if the date is equal to another one up to the given time
interval, i.e. if the absolute difference between the two dates is less than
this interval.
second Wednesday in the current month and
{\tt SetToWeekDay(-1, wxDateTime::Sun)} -- to the last Sunday in it.
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the date was modified successfully, {\tt FALSE}
+Returns {\tt true} if the date was modified successfully, {\tt false}
otherwise meaning that the specified date doesn't exist.
\membersection{wxDateTime::GetWeekDay}\label{wxdatetimegetweekday2}
{\tt SetToWeekDay(-1, weekday, month, year)}. The date will be set to the last
{\it weekday} in the given month and year (the current ones by default).
-Always returns {\tt TRUE}.
+Always returns {\tt true}.
\membersection{wxDateTime::GetLastWeekDay}\label{wxdatetimegetlastweekday}
\func{bool}{SetToTheWeek}{\param{wxDateTime\_t }{numWeek}, \param{WeekDay }{weekday = Mon}, \param{WeekFlags}{flags = {\tt Monday\_First}}}
Set the date to the given {\it weekday} in the week with given number
-{\it numWeek}. The number should be in range $1\ldots53$ and {\tt FALSE} will
-be returned if the specified date doesn't exist. {\tt TRUE} is returned if the
+{\it numWeek}. The number should be in range $1\ldots53$ and {\tt false} will
+be returned if the specified date doesn't exist. {\tt true} is returned if the
date was changed successfully.
\membersection{wxDateTime::GetWeek}\label{wxdatetimegetweek}
\membersection{wxDateTime::ToTimezone}\label{wxdatetimetotimezone}
-\constfunc{wxDateTime}{ToTimezone}{\param{const TimeZone\& }{tz}, \param{bool }{noDST = FALSE}}
+\constfunc{wxDateTime}{ToTimezone}{\param{const TimeZone\& }{tz}, \param{bool }{noDST = false}}
-Transform the date to the given time zone. If {\it noDST} is {\tt TRUE}, no
+Transform the date to the given time zone. If {\it noDST} is {\tt true}, no
DST adjustments will be made.
Returns the date in the new time zone.
\membersection{wxDateTime::MakeTimezone}\label{wxdatetimemaketimezone}
-\func{wxDateTime\&}{MakeTimezone}{\param{const TimeZone\& }{tz}, \param{bool }{noDST = FALSE}}
+\func{wxDateTime\&}{MakeTimezone}{\param{const TimeZone\& }{tz}, \param{bool }{noDST = false}}
Modifies the object in place to represent the date in another time zone. If
-{\it noDST} is {\tt TRUE}, no DST adjustments will be made.
+{\it noDST} is {\tt true}, no DST adjustments will be made.
\membersection{wxDateTime::ToGMT}\label{wxdatetimetogmt}
-\constfunc{wxDateTime}{ToGMT}{\param{bool }{noDST = FALSE}}
+\constfunc{wxDateTime}{ToGMT}{\param{bool }{noDST = false}}
This is the same as calling \helpref{ToTimezone}{wxdatetimetotimezone} with
the argument {\tt GMT0}.
\membersection{wxDateTime::MakeGMT}\label{wxdatetimemakegmt}
-\func{wxDateTime\&}{MakeGMT}{\param{bool }{noDST = FALSE}}
+\func{wxDateTime\&}{MakeGMT}{\param{bool }{noDST = false}}
This is the same as calling \helpref{MakeTimezone}{wxdatetimemaketimezone} with
the argument {\tt GMT0}.
\constfunc{int}{IsDST}{\param{Country }{country = Country\_Default}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the DST is applied for this date in the given country.
+Returns {\tt true} if the DST is applied for this date in the given country.
\wxheading{See also}
\func{void}{BigEndianOrdered}{\param{bool}{ be\_order}}
-If {\it be\_order} is TRUE, all data will be read in big-endian
+If {\it be\_order} is true, all data will be read in big-endian
order, such as written by programs on a big endian architecture
(e.g. Sparc) or written by Java-Streams (which always use
big-endian order).
\func{void}{BigEndianOrdered}{\param{bool}{ be\_order}}
-If {\it be\_order} is TRUE, all data will be written in big-endian
+If {\it be\_order} is true, all data will be written in big-endian
order, e.g. for reading on a Sparc or from Java-Streams (which
always use big-endian order), otherwise data will be written in
little-endian order.
Default cursor scrolling is defined by wxODBC\_FWD\_ONLY\_CURSORS in setup.h
when the wxWindows library is built. This behavior can be overridden when
an instance of a wxDb is created (see \helpref{wxDb constructor}{wxdbconstr}).
-Default setting of this value TRUE, as not all databases/drivers support
+Default setting of this value true, as not all databases/drivers support
both types of cursors.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE if the catalog request was successful, or FALSE if there was some
+Returns true if the catalog request was successful, or false if there was some
reason that the catalog could not be generated.
\wxheading{Example}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE if the commit was successful, or FALSE if the commit failed.
+Returns true if the commit was successful, or false if the commit failed.
\wxheading{Remarks}
\wxheading{Return value}
-The function always returns FALSE, so a call to this function can be made
+The function always returns false, so a call to this function can be made
in the return statement of a code block in the event of a failure to
perform an action (see the example below).
pDb->DispAllErrors(henv, hdbc, hstmt); // Display all other errors, if any
pDb->RollbackTrans(); // Rollback the transaction
CloseCursor(); // Close the cursor
- return(FALSE); // Return Failure
+ return(false); // Return Failure
}
}
\end{verbatim}
\wxheading{Remarks}
-If the view does not exist, this function will return TRUE. Note that views are not supported with all datasources.
+If the view does not exist, this function will return true. Note that views are not supported with all datasources.
\membersection{wxDb::ExecSql}\label{wxdbexecsql}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Currently always returns TRUE.
+Currently always returns true.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE if this datasource connection is defined as using only forward
-scrolling cursors, or FALSE if the connection is defined as being allowed to
+Returns true if this datasource connection is defined as using only forward
+scrolling cursors, or false if the connection is defined as being allowed to
use backward scrolling cursors and their associated functions (see note above).
\wxheading{Remarks}
the call to \helpref{wxDb::Open}{wxdbopen} may have failed to fully
initialize the connection correctly. The connection to the database
{\it is} open and can be used via the direct SQL commands, if this
-function returns TRUE. Other functions which depend on the
+function returns true. Other functions which depend on the
\helpref{wxDb::Open}{wxdbopen} to have completed correctly may not function
as expected. The return result from \helpref{wxDb::Open}{wxdbopen} is the
only way to know if complete initialization of this wxDb connection was
time to support distributed database connections by having separate instances
of wxDb objects that use either the same or different Dsn/Uid/AuthStr settings.
-If this function returns a value of FALSE, it does not necessarily mean that
+If this function returns a value of false, it does not necessarily mean that
the connection to the datasource was not opened. It may mean that some
portion of the initialization of the connection failed (such as a datatype not
being able to be determined how the datasource represents it). To determine
if the connection to the database failed, use the \helpref{wxDb::IsOpen}{wxdbisopen}
-function after receiving a FALSE result back from this function to determine if
-the connection was opened or not. If this function returns FALSE, but \helpref{wxDb::IsOpen}{wxdbisopen}
-returns TRUE, then direct SQL commands may be passed to the database
+function after receiving a false result back from this function to determine if
+the connection was opened or not. If this function returns false, but \helpref{wxDb::IsOpen}{wxdbisopen}
+returns true, then direct SQL commands may be passed to the database
connection and can be successfully executed, but use of the datatypes (such as
by a wxDbTable instance) that are normally determined during open will not be
possible.
\func{void}{SetDebugErrorMessages}{\param{bool }{state}}
-\docparam{state}{Either TRUE (debug messages are logged) or FALSE (debug
+\docparam{state}{Either true (debug messages are logged) or false (debug
messages are not logged).}
\wxheading{Remarks}
Turns on/off debug error messages from the ODBC class library. When
-this function is passed TRUE, errors are reported to the user/logged automatically
-in a text or pop-up dialog when an ODBC error occurs. When passed FALSE,
+this function is passed true, errors are reported to the user/logged automatically
+in a text or pop-up dialog when an ODBC error occurs. When passed false,
errors are silently handled.
When compiled in release mode (FINAL=1), this setting has no affect.
\membersection{wxDb::SetSqlLogging}\label{wxdbsetsqllogging}
-\func{bool}{SetSqlLogging}{\param{wxDbSqlLogState}{ state}, \param{const wxString \&}{filename = SQL\_LOG\_FILENAME}, \param{bool }{ append = FALSE}}
+\func{bool}{SetSqlLogging}{\param{wxDbSqlLogState}{ state}, \param{const wxString \&}{filename = SQL\_LOG\_FILENAME}, \param{bool }{ append = false}}
\wxheading{Parameters}
\docparam{state}{Either sqlLogOFF or sqlLogON (see \helpref{enum wxDbSqlLogState}{wxdbcolfor}). Turns logging of SQL commands sent to the datasource OFF or ON.}
\docparam{filename}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Name of the file to which the log text is to be written. Default is SQL\_LOG\_FILENAME.}
-\docparam{append}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Whether the file is appended to or overwritten. Default is FALSE.}
+\docparam{append}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Whether the file is appended to or overwritten. Default is false.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
If SQL logging is off when a call to WriteSqlLog() is made, or there is a
failure to write the log message to the log file, the function returns
-FALSE without performing the requested log, otherwise TRUE is returned.
+false without performing the requested log, otherwise true is returned.
\wxheading{See also}
If the SQL environment handle was created using the long form of the
\helpref{wxDbConnectInf}{wxdbconnectinf} constructor, then the flag indicating
that the HENV should be destroyed when the classes destructor is called
-is reset to be FALSE, so that any future handles created using the
+is reset to be false, so that any future handles created using the
\helpref{wxDbConnectInf::AllocHenv}{wxdbconnectinfallochenv} function
must be manually released with a call to this function.
\func{void}{BuildSelectStmt}{\param{wxString \&}{pWhereClause},
\param{int }{typeOfWhere}, \param{const wxString \&}{qualTableName=""},
-\param{bool }{useLikeComparison=FALSE}}
+\param{bool }{useLikeComparison=false}}
Constructs the portion of a SQL statement which would follow the word 'WHERE'
in a SQL statement to be passed to the datasource. The returned string
\helpref{wxDbTable::SetFromClause}{wxdbtablesetfromclause},
to clarify which table a column name reference belongs to. Default is "".}
\docparam{useLikeComparison}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Should the constructed WHERE
-clause utilize the LIKE comparison operator. If FALSE, then the '='
-operator is used. Default is FALSE.}
+clause utilize the LIKE comparison operator. If false, then the '='
+operator is used. Default is false.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
this behavior or not before trying to select using "FOR UPDATE".
If the wxDbTable instance was created with the parameter wxDB\_QUERY\_ONLY, then
-this function will return FALSE. For all known databases which do not support
-the FOR UPDATE clause, this function will return FALSE also.
+this function will return false. For all known databases which do not support
+the FOR UPDATE clause, this function will return false also.
\membersection{wxDbTable::CanUpdateByROWID}\label{wxdbtablecanupdatebyrowid}
\membersection{wxDbTable::ClearMemberVar}\label{wxdbtableclearmembervar}
-\func{void}{ClearMemberVar}{\param{UWORD }{colNo}, \param{bool }{setToNull=FALSE}}
+\func{void}{ClearMemberVar}{\param{UWORD }{colNo}, \param{bool }{setToNull=false}}
Same as \helpref{wxDbTable::ClearMemberVars}{wxdbtableclearmembervars} except
that this function clears only the specified column of its values, and
and (noCols-1)) is the index of the column definition created using the
\helpref{wxDbTable::SetColDefs}{wxdbtablesetcoldefs} function.}
\docparam{setToNull}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Indicates whether the column should be
-flagged as being a NULL value stored in the bound memory variable. If TRUE,
+flagged as being a NULL value stored in the bound memory variable. If true,
then any value stored in the bound member variable is cleared. Default is
-FALSE.}
+false.}
\membersection{wxDbTable::ClearMemberVars}\label{wxdbtableclearmembervars}
-\func{void}{ClearMemberVars}{\param{bool }{setToNull=FALSE}}
+\func{void}{ClearMemberVars}{\param{bool }{setToNull=false}}
Initializes all bound columns of the wxDbTable instance to zero. In the case
of a string, zero is copied to the first byte of the string.
\docparam{setToNull}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Indicates whether all columns should be
-flagged as having a NULL value stored in the bound memory variable. If TRUE,
+flagged as having a NULL value stored in the bound memory variable. If true,
then any value stored in the bound member variable is cleared. Default is
-FALSE.}
+false.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\func{bool}{CreateIndex}{\param{const wxString \&}{idxName}, \param{bool }{unique},
\param{UWORD }{noIdxCols}, \param{wxDbIdxDef *}{pIdxDefs},
-\param{bool }{attemptDrop=TRUE}}
+\param{bool }{attemptDrop=true}}
This member function allows you to create secondary (non primary) indexes on
your tables. You first create your table, normally specifying a primary
\docparam{pIdxDefs}{A pointer to an array wxDbIdxDef structures. }
\docparam{attemptDrop}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Indicates if the function should try
to execute a \helpref{wxDbTable::DropIndex}{wxdbtabledropindex} on the index
-name provided before trying to create the index name. Default is TRUE.}
+name provided before trying to create the index name. Default is true.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
wxDbIdxDef idxDef[2]; // 2 columns make up the index
wxStrcpy(idxDef[0].ColName, "PART_DESC"); // Column 1
- idxDef[0].Ascending = TRUE;
+ idxDef[0].Ascending = true;
wxStrcpy(idxDef[1].ColName, "SERIAL_NO"); // Column 2
- idxDef[1].Ascending = FALSE;
+ idxDef[1].Ascending = false;
// Create a name for the index based on the table's name
wxString indexName;
indexName.Printf("%s_IDX1",parts->GetTableName());
- parts->CreateIndex(indexName, TRUE, 2, idxDef);
+ parts->CreateIndex(indexName, true, 2, idxDef);
\end{verbatim}
\membersection{wxDbTable::CreateTable}\label{wxdbtablecreatetable}
-\func{bool}{CreateTable}{\param{bool }{attemptDrop=TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{CreateTable}{\param{bool }{attemptDrop=true}}
Creates a table based on the definitions previously defined for this
wxDbTable instance.
\docparam{attemptDrop}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Indicates whether the driver should
attempt to drop the table before trying to create it. Some datasources will
not allow creation of a table if the table already exists in the table space
-being used. Default is TRUE.}
+being used. Default is true.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\wxheading{Remarks}
If the index specified in the 'idxName' parameter does not exist, an error
-will be logged, and the function will return a result of FALSE.
+will be logged, and the function will return a result of false.
It is not necessary to call \helpref{wxDb::CommitTrans}{wxdbcommittrans}
after executing this function.
\wxheading{Remarks}
-This function returns TRUE if the table does not exist, but only for
+This function returns true if the table does not exist, but only for
supported databases (see \helpref{wxDb::Dbms}{wxdbdbms}). If a datasource
is not specifically supported, and this function is called, the function
-will return FALSE.
+will return false.
Most datasources/ODBC drivers will delete any indexes associated with the
table automatically, and others may not. Check the documentation for your
\wxheading{Remarks}
This function can only be used if the datasource connection used by the
-wxDbTable instance was created with FwdOnlyCursors set to FALSE. If the
+wxDbTable instance was created with FwdOnlyCursors set to false. If the
connection does not allow backward scrolling cursors, this function will
-return FALSE, and the data contained in the bound columns will be undefined.
+return false, and the data contained in the bound columns will be undefined.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Remarks}
This function can only be used if the datasource connection used by the
-wxDbTable instance was created with FwdOnlyCursors set to FALSE. If the
+wxDbTable instance was created with FwdOnlyCursors set to false. If the
connection does not allow backward scrolling cursors, this function will
-return FALSE, and the data contained in the bound columns will be undefined.
+return false, and the data contained in the bound columns will be undefined.
\wxheading{See also}
\membersection{wxDbTable::GetNewCursor}\label{wxdbtablegetnewcursor}
-\func{HSTMT *}{GetNewCursor}{\param{bool }{setCursor=FALSE},
-\param{bool }{bindColumns=TRUE}}
+\func{HSTMT *}{GetNewCursor}{\param{bool }{setCursor=false},
+\param{bool }{bindColumns=true}}
This function will create a new cursor that can be used to access the table
being referenced by this wxDbTable instance, or to execute direct SQL commands
\wxheading{Parameters}
\docparam{setCursor}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Should this new cursor be set to be the
-current cursor after successfully creating the new cursor. Default is FALSE.}
+current cursor after successfully creating the new cursor. Default is false.}
\docparam{bindColumns}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Should this new cursor be bound to all
-the memory variables that the default cursor is bound to. Default is TRUE.}
+the memory variables that the default cursor is bound to. Default is true.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\wxheading{Return value}
-This function returns FALSE when the current cursor has reached the end of
-the result set. When FALSE is returned, data in the bound columns is
+This function returns false when the current cursor has reached the end of
+the result set. When false is returned, data in the bound columns is
undefined.
\wxheading{Remarks}
\wxheading{Return value}
-This function returns FALSE when the current cursor has reached the beginning
+This function returns false when the current cursor has reached the beginning
of the result set and there are now other rows prior to the cursors current
-position. When FALSE is returned, data in the bound columns is undefined.
+position. When false is returned, data in the bound columns is undefined.
\wxheading{Remarks}
This function can only be used if the datasource connection used by the
-wxDbTable instance was created with FwdOnlyCursors set to FALSE. If the
+wxDbTable instance was created with FwdOnlyCursors set to false. If the
connection does not allow backward scrolling cursors, this function will
-return FALSE, and the data contained in the bound columns will be undefined.
+return false, and the data contained in the bound columns will be undefined.
\wxheading{See also}
{
case DB_SUCCESS:
parts->GetDb()->CommitTrans();
- return(TRUE);
+ return(true);
case DB_ERR_INTEGRITY_CONSTRAINT_VIOL:
// Current data would result in a duplicate key
// on one or more indexes that do not allow duplicates
parts->GetDb()->RollbackTrans();
- return(FALSE);
+ return(false);
default:
// Insert failed for some unexpected reason
parts->GetDb()->RollbackTrans();
- return(FALSE);
+ return(false);
}
\end{verbatim}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE if the cursor associated with this wxDbTable object is closed
-after a commit or rollback operation. Returns FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the cursor associated with this wxDbTable object is closed
+after a commit or rollback operation. Returns false otherwise.
\wxheading{Remarks}
If more than one wxDbTable instance used the same database connection, all cursors
which use the database connection are closed on the commit if this function
-indicates TRUE.
+indicates true.
\membersection{wxDbTable::IsQueryOnly}\label{wxdbtableisqueryonly}
Accessor function that returns a value indicating if this wxDbTable instance
was created to allow only queries to be performed on the bound columns. If
-this function returns TRUE, then no actions may be performed using this
+this function returns true, then no actions may be performed using this
wxDbTable instance that would modify (insert/delete/update) the table's data.
\membersection{wxDbTable::Open}\label{wxdbtableopen}
-\func{bool }{Open}{\param{bool }{checkPrivileges=FALSE}, \param{bool }{checkTableExists=TRUE}}
+\func{bool }{Open}{\param{bool }{checkPrivileges=false}, \param{bool }{checkTableExists=true}}
Every wxDbTable instance must be opened before it can be used. This function
checks for the existence of the requested table, binds columns, creates required
\docparam{checkPrivileges}{Indicates whether the Open() function should check
whether the current connected user has at least SELECT privileges to access the
-table to which they are trying to open. Default is FALSE.}
+table to which they are trying to open. Default is false.}
\docparam{checkTableExists}{Indicates whether the Open() function should check
-whether the table exists in the database or not before opening it. Default is TRUE.}
+whether the table exists in the database or not before opening it. Default is true.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
-If the function returns a FALSE value due to the table not existing, a log
+If the function returns a false value due to the table not existing, a log
entry is recorded for the datasource connection indicating the problem
that was detected when checking for table existence. Note that it is usually
best for the calling routine to check for the existence of the table and for
\membersection{wxDbTable::Query}\label{wxdbtablequery}
-\func{virtual bool }{Query}{\param{bool }{forUpdate=FALSE}, \param{bool }{distinct=FALSE}}
+\func{virtual bool }{Query}{\param{bool }{forUpdate=false}, \param{bool }{distinct=false}}
\wxheading{Parameters}
as they are retrieved. If the RDBMS is not capable of the FOR UPDATE clause,
this argument is ignored. See
\helpref{wxDbTable::CanSelectForUpdate}{wxdbtablecanselectforupdate} for
-additional information regarding this argument. Default is FALSE.}
+additional information regarding this argument. Default is false.}
\docparam{distinct}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Allows selection of only distinct values
from the query (SELECT DISTINCT ... FROM ...). The notion of DISTINCT
applies to all columns returned in the result set, not individual columns.
-Default is FALSE.}
+Default is false.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\membersection{wxDbTable::QueryMatching}\label{wxdbtablequerymatching}
-\func{virtual bool }{QueryMatching}{\param{bool }{forUpdate=FALSE},
-\param{bool }{distinct=FALSE}}
+\func{virtual bool }{QueryMatching}{\param{bool }{forUpdate=false},
+\param{bool }{distinct=false}}
QueryMatching allows querying of records from the table associated with
the wxDbTable object by matching "columns" to values.
as they are queried (SELECT ... FOR UPDATE). If the RDBMS is not capable of
the FOR UPDATE clause, this argument is ignored. See
\helpref{wxDbTable::CanSelectForUpdate}{wxdbtablecanselectforupdate} for
-additional information regarding this argument. Default is FALSE.}
+additional information regarding this argument. Default is false.}
\docparam{distinct}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Allows selection of only distinct values
from the query (SELECT DISTINCT ... FROM ...). The notion of DISTINCT
applies to all columns returned in the result set, not individual columns.
-Default is FALSE.}
+Default is false.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
// Incomplete code sample
parts->ClearMemberVars(); // Set all columns to zero
wxStrcpy(parts->PartNumber,"32"); // Set columns to query on
- parts->OnHold = TRUE;
+ parts->OnHold = true;
parts->QueryMatching(); // Query
// Display all records queried
while(parts->GetNext())
\membersection{wxDbTable::QueryOnKeyFields}\label{wxdbtablequeryonkeyfields}
-\func{bool }{QueryOnKeyFields}{\param{bool }{forUpdate=FALSE},
-\param{bool }{distinct=FALSE}}
+\func{bool }{QueryOnKeyFields}{\param{bool }{forUpdate=false},
+\param{bool }{distinct=false}}
QueryOnKeyFields provides an easy mechanism to query records in the table
associated with the wxDbTable object by the primary index column(s). Simply
as they are queried (SELECT ... FOR UPDATE). If the RDBMS is not capable of
the FOR UPDATE clause, this argument is ignored. See
\helpref{wxDbTable::CanSelectForUpdate}{wxdbtablecanselectforupdate} for
-additional information regarding this argument. Default is FALSE.}
+additional information regarding this argument. Default is false.}
\docparam{distinct}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Allows selection of only distinct values
from the query (SELECT DISTINCT ... FROM ...). The notion of DISTINCT
applies to all columns returned in the result set, not individual columns.
-Default is FALSE.}
+Default is false.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\func{void}{SetColDefs}{\param{UWORD }{index}, \param{const wxString \&}{fieldName},
\param{int }{dataType}, \param{void *}{pData}, \param{SWORD }{cType},
-\param{int }{size}, \param{bool }{keyField = FALSE}, \param{bool }{upd = TRUE},
-\param{bool }{insAllow = TRUE}, \param{bool }{derivedCol = FALSE}}
+\param{int }{size}, \param{bool }{keyField = false}, \param{bool }{upd = true},
+\param{bool }{insAllow = true}, \param{bool }{derivedCol = false}}
\func{wxDbColDataPtr *}{SetColDefs}{\param{wxDbColInf *}{colInfs}, \param{UWORD }{numCols}}
\docparam{size}{Maximum size in bytes of the {\it pData} object.}
\docparam{keyField}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Indicates if this column is part of the
-primary index. Default is FALSE.}
+primary index. Default is false.}
\docparam{upd}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Are updates allowed on this column?
-Default is TRUE.}
+Default is true.}
\docparam{insAllow}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Inserts allowed on this column?
-Default is TRUE.}
+Default is true.}
\docparam{derivedCol}{{\it OPTIONAL}. Is this a derived column (non-base
-table column for query only)? Default is FALSE.}
+table column for query only)? Default is false.}
\docparam{colInfs}{Pointer to an array of wxDbColInf instances which contains
all the information necessary to create {\it numCols} column definitions.}
colDefs[0].PtrDataObj = PartNumber;
colDefs[0].SqlCtype = SQL_C_CHAR;
colDefs[0].SzDataObj = PART_NUMBER_LEN;
- colDefs[0].KeyField = TRUE;
- colDefs[0].Updateable = FALSE;
- colDefs[0].InsertAllowed= TRUE;
- colDefs[0].DerivedCol = FALSE;
+ colDefs[0].KeyField = true;
+ colDefs[0].Updateable = false;
+ colDefs[0].InsertAllowed= true;
+ colDefs[0].DerivedCol = false;
// Shortcut using this function
SetColDefs(0, "PART_NUMBER", DB_DATA_TYPE_VARCHAR, PartNumber,
- SQL_C_CHAR, PART_NUMBER_LEN, TRUE, FALSE,TRUE,FALSE);
+ SQL_C_CHAR, PART_NUMBER_LEN, true, false,true,false);
\end{verbatim}
\membersection{wxDbTable::SetCursor}\label{wxdbtablesetcursor}
\membersection{wxDbTable::SetColNull}\label{wxdbtablesetcolnull}
-\func{bool}{SetColNull}{\param{UWORD }{colNo}, \param{bool }{set=TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{SetColNull}{\param{UWORD }{colNo}, \param{bool }{set=true}}
\func{bool}{SetColNull}{\param{const wxString \&}{colName},
-\param{bool }{set=TRUE}}
+\param{bool }{set=true}}
Both forms of this function allow a member variable representing a column
in the table associated with this wxDbTable object to be set to NULL.
\docparam{colNo}{Index into the column definitions used when first defining
this wxDbTable object.}
\docparam{colName}{Actual data table column name that is to be set to NULL.}
-\docparam{set}{Whether the column is set to NULL or not. Passing TRUE sets
-the column to NULL, passing FALSE sets the column to be non-NULL. Default is
-TRUE.}
+\docparam{set}{Whether the column is set to NULL or not. Passing true sets
+the column to NULL, passing false sets the column to be non-NULL. Default is
+true.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
rows which match the criteria specified in the {\it pWhereClause}.
All columns that are bound to member variables for this wxDbTable instance
-that were defined with the "updateable" parameter set to TRUE will be updated
+that were defined with the "updateable" parameter set to true will be updated
with the information currently held in the memory variable.
\wxheading{Parameters}
int int_var;
wxChar string_name[255];
table->SetColDef (0, "column 0", DB_DATA_TYPE_INTEGER, &int_var,
- SQL_C_LONG, sizeof(int_var), TRUE);
+ SQL_C_LONG, sizeof(int_var), true);
table->SetColDef (1, "column 1", DB_DATA_TYPE_VARCHAR, &string_name,
- SQL_C_LONG, sizeof(string_name), FALSE);
+ SQL_C_LONG, sizeof(string_name), false);
// now let's define columns in the grid
// in the grid we will see only the rows of the result query
m_dbTable->Query();
- wxDbGridTableBase *dbgrid = new wxDbGridTableBase(table, columns, wxUSE_QUERY, TRUE);
+ wxDbGridTableBase *dbgrid = new wxDbGridTableBase(table, columns, wxUSE_QUERY, true);
delete columns; // not needed anymore
wxGrid *grid = new wxGrid ( ... );
- grid->SetTable(dbgrid, TRUE);
+ grid->SetTable(dbgrid, true);
grid->Fit();
\end{verbatim}
\membersection{wxDbGridTableBase::wxDbGridTableBase}\label{wxdbgridtablebaseconstr}
\func{}{wxDbGridTableBase}{\param{wxDbTable *}{tab}, \param{wxDbGridColInfo *}{ColInfo},
- \param{int }{count = wxUSE\_QUERY}, \param{bool }{takeOwnership = TRUE}}
+ \param{int }{count = wxUSE\_QUERY}, \param{bool }{takeOwnership = true}}
Constructor.
\docparam{count}{You can use a query result set (wxUSE\_QUERY, to use wxDbTable::Count(wxDbTable::Count()
or you can fix the total number of rows (count >= 0) to display, or specify it if you already know the size in avoid calling }
-\docparam{takeOwnership}{ If TRUE, this class deletes wxDbTable when it stops
-referring to it, if FALSE application must
+\docparam{takeOwnership}{ If true, this class deletes wxDbTable when it stops
+referring to it, if false application must
take care of deleting it. }
\membersection{wxDbGridTableBase::ValidateRow}\label{wxdbgridtablebasevalidate}
\membersection{wxDbGridTableBase::AssignDbTable}\label{wxdbgridtablebaseassigndbtable}
\func{bool}{AssignDbTable}{\param{wxDbTable *}{tab},\param{int }{count = wxUSE\_QUERY},
-\param{bool }{takeOwnership = TRUE}}
+\param{bool }{takeOwnership = true}}
Resets the grid for using with a new database table, but using the same columns definition.
This can be useful when re-querying the database and want to see the changes.
\docparam{tab}{ Database table you want to assign to the grid. }
\docparam{count}{ Number of rows you want to show or wxUSE\_QUERY for using a query. }
-\docparam{takeOwnership}{ If FALSE, user must take care of deleting tab after deleting
-the wxDbGridTableBase. If TRUE, deletion is made by destructor class. }
+\docparam{takeOwnership}{ If false, user must take care of deleting tab after deleting
+the wxDbGridTableBase. If true, deletion is made by destructor class. }
\func{bool}{Blit}{\param{wxCoord}{ xdest}, \param{wxCoord}{ ydest}, \param{wxCoord}{ width}, \param{wxCoord}{ height},
\param{wxDC* }{source}, \param{wxCoord}{ xsrc}, \param{wxCoord}{ ysrc}, \param{int}{ logicalFunc = wxCOPY},
- \param{bool }{useMask = FALSE}, \param{wxCoord}{ xsrcMask = -1}, \param{wxCoord}{ ysrcMask = -1}}
+ \param{bool }{useMask = false}, \param{wxCoord}{ xsrcMask = -1}, \param{wxCoord}{ ysrcMask = -1}}
Copy from a source DC to this DC, specifying the destination
coordinates, size of area to copy, source DC, source coordinates,
\docparam{logicalFunc}{Logical function to use: see \helpref{wxDC::SetLogicalFunction}{wxdcsetlogicalfunction}.}
-\docparam{useMask}{If TRUE, Blit does a transparent blit using the mask that is associated with the bitmap
+\docparam{useMask}{If true, Blit does a transparent blit using the mask that is associated with the bitmap
selected into the source device context. The Windows implementation does the following if MaskBlt cannot be used:
\begin{enumerate}
\func{static bool}{CacheEnabled}{\void}
-On supported platforms (currently only Windows), returns TRUE
+On supported platforms (currently only Windows), returns true
if the DC cache is enabled. The DC cache
can speed up the \helpref{Blit}{wxdcblit} operation when
drawing a large number of masked bitmaps.
\func{void}{DrawBitmap}{\param{const wxBitmap\&}{ bitmap}, \param{wxCoord}{ x}, \param{wxCoord}{ y}, \param{bool}{ transparent}}
-Draw a bitmap on the device context at the specified point. If {\it transparent} is TRUE and the bitmap has
+Draw a bitmap on the device context at the specified point. If {\it transparent} is true and the bitmap has
a transparency mask, the bitmap will be drawn transparently.
When drawing a mono-bitmap, the current text foreground colour will be used to draw the foreground
\item wxFLOOD\_BORDER: the area to be flooded is bounded by the given colour.
\end{itemize}
-Returns FALSE if the operation failed.
+Returns false if the operation failed.
{\it Note:} The present implementation for non-Windows platforms may fail to find
colour borders if the pixels do not match the colour exactly. However the
-function will still return TRUE.
+function will still return true.
\membersection{wxDC::GetBackground}\label{wxdcgetbackground}
\func{bool}{GetOptimization}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if device context optimization is on.
+Returns true if device context optimization is on.
See \helpref{wxDC::SetOptimization}{wxsetoptimization} for details.
\membersection{wxDC::GetPen}\label{wxdcgetpen}
\func{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the DC is ok to use.
+Returns true if the DC is ok to use.
\membersection{wxDC::ResetBoundingBox}\label{wxdcresetboundingbox}
\func{void}{SetOptimization}{\param{bool }{optimize}}
-If {\it optimize} is TRUE (the default), this function sets optimization mode on.
+If {\it optimize} is true (the default), this function sets optimization mode on.
This currently means that under X, the device context will not try to set a pen or brush
property if it is known to be set already. This approach can fall down
if non-wxWindows code is using the same device context or window, for example
\func{bool}{ValidHost}{\param{const wxString\& }{host}}
-Returns TRUE if this is a valid host name, FALSE otherwise. This always
-returns TRUE under MS Windows.
+Returns true if this is a valid host name, false otherwise. This always
+returns true under MS Windows.
Called by the server application to advise the client of a change in
the data associated with the given item. Causes the client
connection's \helpref{wxDDEConnection::OnAdvise}{wxddeconnectiononadvise}
-member to be called. Returns TRUE if successful.
+member to be called. Returns true if successful.
\membersection{wxDDEConnection::Execute}
also be used to transfer arbitrary data to the server (similar
to \helpref{wxDDEConnection::Poke}{wxddeconnectionpoke} in that respect). Causes the
server connection's \helpref{wxDDEConnection::OnExecute}{wxddeconnectiononexecute} member to be
-called. Returns TRUE if successful.
+called. Returns true if successful.
\membersection{wxDDEConnection::Disconnect}
to be sent to the corresponding connection object in the other
program. The default behaviour of {\bf OnDisconnect} is to delete the
connection, but the calling application must explicitly delete its
-side of the connection having called {\bf Disconnect}. Returns TRUE if
+side of the connection having called {\bf Disconnect}. Returns true if
successful.
\membersection{wxDDEConnection::OnAdvise}\label{wxddeconnectiononadvise}
Message sent to the server application by the client, when the client
wishes to start an `advise loop' for the given topic and item. The
-server can refuse to participate by returning FALSE.
+server can refuse to participate by returning false.
\membersection{wxDDEConnection::OnStopAdvise}\label{wxddeconnectiononstopadvise}
Message sent to the server application by the client, when the client
wishes to stop an `advise loop' for the given topic and item. The
-server can refuse to stop the advise loop by returning FALSE, although
+server can refuse to stop the advise loop by returning false, although
this doesn't have much meaning in practice.
\membersection{wxDDEConnection::Poke}\label{wxddeconnectionpoke}
Called by the client application to poke data into the server. Can be
used to transfer arbitrary data to the server. Causes the server
connection's \helpref{wxDDEConnection::OnPoke}{wxddeconnectiononpoke} member
-to be called. Returns TRUE if successful.
+to be called. Returns true if successful.
\membersection{wxDDEConnection::Request}\label{wxddeconnectionrequest}
Called by the client application to ask if an advise loop can be started
with the server. Causes the server connection's \helpref{wxDDEConnection::OnStartAdvise}{wxddeconnectiononstartadvise}\rtfsp
-member to be called. Returns TRUE if the server okays it, FALSE
+member to be called. Returns true if the server okays it, false
otherwise.
\membersection{wxDDEConnection::StopAdvise}\label{wxddeconnectionstopadvise}
Called by the client application to ask if an advise loop can be
stopped. Causes the server connection's \helpref{wxDDEConnection::OnStopAdvise}{wxddeconnectiononstopadvise} member
-to be called. Returns TRUE if the server okays it, FALSE otherwise.
+to be called. Returns true if the server okays it, false otherwise.
Registers the server using the given service name. Under UNIX, the
string must contain an integer id which is used as an Internet port
-number. FALSE is returned if the call failed (for example, the port
+number. false is returned if the call failed (for example, the port
number is already in use).
\membersection{wxDDEServer::OnAcceptConnection}\label{wxddeserveronacceptconnection}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the function succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the function succeeded, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxDebugContext::GetCheckPrevious}\label{wxdebugcontextgetcheckprevious}
\func{bool}{GetCheckPrevious}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the memory allocator checks all previous memory blocks for errors.
-By default, this is FALSE since it slows down execution considerably.
+Returns true if the memory allocator checks all previous memory blocks for errors.
+By default, this is false since it slows down execution considerably.
\wxheading{See also}
\func{bool}{GetDebugMode}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if debug mode is on. If debug mode is on, the wxObject new and delete
+Returns true if debug mode is on. If debug mode is on, the wxObject new and delete
operators store or use information about memory allocation. Otherwise,
a straight malloc and free will be performed by these operators.
\func{bool}{HasStream}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if there is a stream currently associated
+Returns true if there is a stream currently associated
with the debug context.
This is obsolete, replaced by \helpref{wxLog}{wxlog} functionality.
\membersection{wxDebugContext::PrintStatistics}\label{wxdebugcontextprintstatistics}
-\func{bool}{PrintStatistics}{\param{bool}{ detailed = TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{PrintStatistics}{\param{bool}{ detailed = true}}
Performs a statistics analysis from the currently set checkpoint, writing
to the current debug stream. The number of object and non-object
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{detailed}{If TRUE, the function will also print how many
+\docparam{detailed}{If true, the function will also print how many
objects of each class have been allocated, and the space taken by
these class instances.}
\membersection{wxDebugContext::SetCheckpoint}\label{wxdebugcontextsetcheckpoint}
-\func{void}{SetCheckpoint}{\param{bool}{ all = FALSE}}
+\func{void}{SetCheckpoint}{\param{bool}{ all = false}}
Sets the current checkpoint: Dump and PrintStatistics operations will
be performed from this point on. This allows you to ignore allocations
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{all}{If TRUE, the checkpoint is reset to include all
+\docparam{all}{If true, the checkpoint is reset to include all
memory allocations since the program started.}
\membersection{wxDebugContext::SetCheckPrevious}\label{wxdebugcontextsetcheckprevious}
\func{void}{SetCheckPrevious}{\param{bool}{ check}}
Tells the memory allocator to check all previous memory blocks for errors.
-By default, this is FALSE since it slows down execution considerably.
+By default, this is false since it slows down execution considerably.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{iconize}{If TRUE, iconizes the dialog box; if FALSE, shows and restores it.}
+\docparam{iconize}{If true, iconizes the dialog box; if false, shows and restores it.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
Note that in Windows, iconization has no effect since dialog boxes cannot be
iconized. However, applications may need to explicitly restore dialog
boxes under Motif which have user-iconizable frames, and under Windows
-calling {\tt Iconize(FALSE)} will bring the window to the front, as does
-\rtfsp{\tt Show(TRUE)}.
+calling {\tt Iconize(false)} will bring the window to the front, as does
+\rtfsp{\tt Show(true)}.
\membersection{wxDialog::IsIconized}\label{wxdialogisiconized}
\constfunc{bool}{IsIconized}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the dialog box is iconized. Windows only.
+Returns true if the dialog box is iconized. Windows only.
\wxheading{Remarks}
-Always returns FALSE under Windows since dialogs cannot be iconized.
+Always returns false under Windows since dialogs cannot be iconized.
\membersection{wxDialog::IsModal}\label{wxdialogismodal}
\constfunc{bool}{IsModal}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the dialog box is modal, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the dialog box is modal, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxDialog::OnCharHook}\label{wxdialogoncharhook}
\wxheading{Remarks}
The function either calls {\bf EndModal(wxID\_CANCEL)} if the dialog is modal, or
-sets the return value to wxID\_CANCEL and calls {\bf Show(FALSE)} if the dialog is modeless.
+sets the return value to wxID\_CANCEL and calls {\bf Show(false)} if the dialog is modeless.
\wxheading{See also}
The function calls
\rtfsp\helpref{wxWindow::Validate}{wxwindowvalidate}, then \helpref{wxWindow::TransferDataFromWindow}{wxwindowtransferdatafromwindow}.
-If this returns TRUE, the function either calls {\bf EndModal(wxID\_OK)} if the dialog is modal, or
-sets the return value to wxID\_OK and calls {\bf Show(FALSE)} if the dialog is modeless.
+If this returns true, the function either calls {\bf EndModal(wxID\_OK)} if the dialog is modal, or
+sets the return value to wxID\_OK and calls {\bf Show(false)} if the dialog is modeless.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{flag}{If TRUE, the dialog will be modal, otherwise it will be modeless.}
+\docparam{flag}{If true, the dialog will be modal, otherwise it will be modeless.}
\membersection{wxDialog::SetReturnCode}\label{wxdialogsetreturncode}
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{show}{If TRUE, the dialog box is shown and brought to the front;
-otherwise the box is hidden. If FALSE and the dialog is
+\docparam{show}{If true, the dialog box is shown and brought to the front;
+otherwise the box is hidden. If false and the dialog is
modal, control is returned to the calling program.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\constfunc{bool}{IsOk}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the dialup manager was initialized correctly. If this
-function returns {\tt FALSE}, no other functions will work neither, so it is a
+Returns {\tt true} if the dialup manager was initialized correctly. If this
+function returns {\tt false}, no other functions will work neither, so it is a
good idea to call this function and check its result before calling any other
wxDialUpManager methods
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::Dial}\label{wxdialupmanagerdial}
-\func{bool}{Dial}{\param{const wxString\& }{nameOfISP = wxEmptyString}, \param{const wxString\& }{username = wxEmptyString}, \param{const wxString\& }{password = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{async = TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{Dial}{\param{const wxString\& }{nameOfISP = wxEmptyString}, \param{const wxString\& }{username = wxEmptyString}, \param{const wxString\& }{password = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{async = true}}
Dial the given ISP, use {\it username} and {\it password} to authenticate.
and if no username and/or password are given, the function will try to do
without them, but will ask the user if really needed.
-If {\it async} parameter is {\tt FALSE}, the function waits until the end of dialing
-and returns {\tt TRUE} upon successful completion.
+If {\it async} parameter is {\tt false}, the function waits until the end of dialing
+and returns {\tt true} upon successful completion.
-If {\it async} is {\tt TRUE}, the function only initiates the connection and
+If {\it async} is {\tt true}, the function only initiates the connection and
returns immediately - the result is reported via events (an event is sent
anyhow, but if dialing failed it will be a DISCONNECTED one).
\constfunc{bool}{IsDialing}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if (async) dialing is in progress.
+Returns true if (async) dialing is in progress.
\wxheading{See also}
\func{bool}{CancelDialing}{\void}
Cancel dialing the number initiated with \helpref{Dial}{wxdialupmanagerdial}
-with async parameter equal to {\tt TRUE}.
+with async parameter equal to {\tt true}.
Note that this won't result in DISCONNECTED event being sent.
\constfunc{bool}{IsAlwaysOnline}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the computer has a permanent network connection (i.e. is
+Returns {\tt true} if the computer has a permanent network connection (i.e. is
on a LAN) and so there is no need to use Dial() function to go online.
{\bf NB:} this functions tries to guess the result and it is not always
\constfunc{bool}{IsOnline}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the computer is connected to the network: under Windows,
+Returns {\tt true} if the computer is connected to the network: under Windows,
this just means that a RAS connection exists, under Unix we check that
the "well-known host" (as specified by
\helpref{SetWellKnownHost}{wxdialupmanagersetwellknownhost}) is reachable.
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::SetOnlineStatus}\label{wxdialupmanagersetonlinestatus}
-\func{void}{SetOnlineStatus}{\param{bool }{isOnline = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetOnlineStatus}{\param{bool }{isOnline = true}}
Sometimes the built-in logic for determining the online status may fail,
so, in general, the user should be allowed to override it. This function
notification about the change of connection status is sent by the system and so
we don't do any polling and this parameter is ignored.
-Returns {\tt FALSE} if couldn't set up automatic check for online status.
+Returns {\tt false} if couldn't set up automatic check for online status.
\membersection{wxDialUpManager::DisableAutoCheckOnlineStatus}\label{wxdialupmanagerdisableautocheckonlinestatus}
\func{bool}{Open}{\param{const wxString\& }{dir}}
-Open the directory for enumerating, returns TRUE on success or FALSE if an
+Open the directory for enumerating, returns true on success or false if an
error occurred.
\membersection{wxDir::IsOpened}\label{wxdirisopened}
\constfunc{bool}{IsOpened}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the directory was successfully opened by a previous call to
+Returns true if the directory was successfully opened by a previous call to
\helpref{Open}{wxdiropen}.
\membersection{wxDir::GetFirst}\label{wxdirgetfirst}
\constfunc{bool}{GetFirst}{\param{wxString* }{filename}, \param{const wxString\& }{filespec = wxEmptyString}, \param{int }{flags = wxDIR\_DEFAULT}}
Start enumerating all files matching {\it filespec} (or all files if it is
-empty) and flags, return TRUE on success.
+empty) and flags, return true on success.
\membersection{wxDir::GetNext}\label{wxdirgetnext}
\func{bool}{HasFiles}{\param{const wxString\& }{filespec = wxEmptyString}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the directory contains any files matching the given
+Returns {\tt true} if the directory contains any files matching the given
{\it filespec}. If {\it filespec} is empty, look for any files at all. In any
case, even hidden files are taken into account.
\func{bool}{HasSubDirs}{\param{const wxString\& }{dirspec = wxEmptyString}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the directory contains any subdirectories (if a non
+Returns {\tt true} if the directory contains any subdirectories (if a non
empty {\it filespec} is given, only check for directories matching it).
The hidden subdirectories are taken into account as well.
\docparam{libname}{Name of the shared object to load.}
-\docparam{success}{May point to a bool variable which will be set to TRUE or
-FALSE; may also be {\tt NULL}.}
+\docparam{success}{May point to a bool variable which will be set to true or
+false; may also be {\tt NULL}.}
\membersection{wxDllLoader::UnloadLibrary}\label{wxdllloaderunloadlibrary}
\func{void}{Add}{
\param{wxDataObjectSimple }{*dataObject},
- \param{bool }{preferred = FALSE}}
+ \param{bool }{preferred = false}}
Adds the {\it dataObject} to the list of supported objects and it becomes the
-preferred object if {\it preferred} is TRUE.
+preferred object if {\it preferred} is true.
\constfunc{virtual bool}{GetDataHere}{\param{void }{*buf}}
-Copy the data to the buffer, return TRUE on success. Must be implemented in the
+Copy the data to the buffer, return true on success. Must be implemented in the
derived class if the object supports rendering its data.
\pythonnote{When implementing this method in wxPython, no additional
\func{virtual bool}{SetData}{\param{size\_t }{len}, \param{const void }{*buf}}
-Copy the data from the buffer, return TRUE on success. Must be implemented in
+Copy the data from the buffer, return true on success. Must be implemented in
the derived class if the object supports setting its data.
\pythonnote{When implementing this method in wxPython, the data comes
\membersection{wxDocManager::wxDocManager}
-\func{void}{wxDocManager}{\param{long}{ flags = wxDEFAULT\_DOCMAN\_FLAGS}, \param{bool}{ initialize = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{wxDocManager}{\param{long}{ flags = wxDEFAULT\_DOCMAN\_FLAGS}, \param{bool}{ initialize = true}}
Constructor. Create a document manager instance dynamically near the start of your application
before doing any document or view operations.
{\it flags} is currently unused.
-If {\it initialize} is TRUE, the \helpref{Initialize}{wxdocmanagerinitialize} function will be called
+If {\it initialize} is true, the \helpref{Initialize}{wxdocmanagerinitialize} function will be called
to create a default history list object. If you derive from wxDocManager, you may wish to call the
-base constructor with FALSE, and then call Initialize in your own constructor, to allow
+base constructor with false, and then call Initialize in your own constructor, to allow
your own Initialize or OnCreateFileHistory functions to be called.
\membersection{wxDocManager::\destruct{wxDocManager}}
\membersection{wxDocManager::CloseDocuments}
-\func{bool}{CloseDocuments}{\param{bool }{force = TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{CloseDocuments}{\param{bool }{force = true}}
Closes all currently opened documents.
from the constructor, an overridden virtual OnCreateFileHistory would not be
called due to C++'s `interesting' constructor semantics. In fact Initialize
\rtfsp{\it is} called from the wxDocManager constructor, but this can be
-vetoed by passing FALSE to the second argument, allowing the derived class's
+vetoed by passing false to the second argument, allowing the derived class's
constructor to call Initialize, possibly calling a different OnCreateFileHistory
from the default.
\membersection{wxDocManager::SelectDocumentType}
\func{wxDocTemplate *}{SelectDocumentType}{\param{wxDocTemplate **}{templates},
- \param{int}{ noTemplates}, \param{bool}{ sort=FALSE}}
+ \param{int}{ noTemplates}, \param{bool}{ sort=false}}
Returns a document template by asking the user (if there is more than one template).
This function is used in wxDocManager::CreateDocument.
\docparam{sort}{If more than one template is passed in in {\it templates},
then this parameter indicates whether the list of templates that the user
will have to choose from is sorted or not when shown the choice box dialog.
-Default is FALSE.}
+Default is false.}
\perlnote{In wxPerl {\tt templates} is a reference to a list of templates.}
\membersection{wxDocManager::SelectViewType}
\func{wxDocTemplate *}{SelectViewType}{\param{wxDocTemplate **}{templates},
- \param{int}{ noTemplates}, \param{bool}{ sort=FALSE}}
+ \param{int}{ noTemplates}, \param{bool}{ sort=false}}
Returns a document template by asking the user (if there is more than one template),
displaying a list of valid views. This function is used in wxDocManager::CreateView.
\docparam{sort}{If more than one template is passed in in {\it templates},
then this parameter indicates whether the list of templates that the user
will have to choose from is sorted or not when shown the choice box dialog.
-Default is FALSE.}
+Default is false.}
\perlnote{In wxPerl {\tt templates} is a reference to a list of templates.}
\func{bool}{IsVisible}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the document template can be shown in user dialogs, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the document template can be shown in user dialogs, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxDocTemplate::SetDefaultExtension}
\member{bool}{m\_documentModified}
-TRUE if the document has been modified, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the document has been modified, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxDocument::m\_documentTemplate}
\func{virtual bool}{Close}{\void}
-Closes the document, by calling OnSaveModified and then (if this returned TRUE) OnCloseDocument.
+Closes the document, by calling OnSaveModified and then (if this returned true) OnCloseDocument.
This does not normally delete the document object: use DeleteAllViews to do this implicitly.
\membersection{wxDocument::DeleteAllViews}
\constfunc{virtual bool}{IsModified}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the document has been modified since the last save, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the document has been modified since the last save, false otherwise.
You may need to override this if your document view maintains its own
record of being modified (for example if using wxTextWindow to view and edit the document).
\func{virtual void}{Modify}{\param{bool}{ modify}}
-Call with TRUE to mark the document as modified since the last save, FALSE otherwise.
+Call with true to mark the document as modified since the last save, false otherwise.
You may need to override this if your document view maintains its own
record of being modified (for example if using wxTextWindow to view and edit the document).
\func{virtual bool}{OnCloseDocument}{\void}
The default implementation calls DeleteContents (an empty implementation)
-sets the modified flag to FALSE. Override this to
+sets the modified flag to false. Override this to
supply additional behaviour when the document is closed with Close.
\membersection{wxDocument::OnCreate}
Called just after the document object is created to give it a chance
to initialize itself. The default implementation uses the
template associated with the document to create an initial view.
-If this function returns FALSE, the document is deleted.
+If this function returns false, the document is deleted.
\membersection{wxDocument::OnCreateCommandProcessor}
\func{virtual bool}{OnOpenDocument}{\param{const wxString\& }{filename}}
Constructs an input file stream for the given filename (which must not be empty),
-and calls LoadObject. If LoadObject returns TRUE, the document is set to
+and calls LoadObject. If LoadObject returns true, the document is set to
unmodified; otherwise, an error message box is displayed. The document's
views are notified that the filename has changed, to give windows an opportunity
to update their titles. All of the document's views are then updated.
\func{virtual bool}{OnSaveDocument}{\param{const wxString\& }{filename}}
Constructs an output file stream for the given filename (which must not be empty),
-and calls SaveObject. If SaveObject returns TRUE, the document is set to
+and calls SaveObject. If SaveObject returns true, the document is set to
unmodified; otherwise, an error message box is displayed.
\membersection{wxDocument::OnSaveModified}
\membersection{wxDocument::SetFilename}
-\func{void}{SetFilename}{\param{const wxString\& }{filename}, \param{bool}{ notifyViews = FALSE}}
+\func{void}{SetFilename}{\param{const wxString\& }{filename}, \param{bool}{ notifyViews = false}}
Sets the filename for this document. Usually called by the framework.
-If {\it notifyViews} is TRUE, wxView::OnChangeFilename is called for all views.
+If {\it notifyViews} is true, wxView::OnChangeFilename is called for all views.
\membersection{wxDocument::SetTitle}
\membersection{wxDragImage::BeginDrag}\label{wxdragimagebegindrag}
-\func{bool}{BeginDrag}{\param{const wxPoint\& }{hotspot}, \param{wxWindow* }{window}, \param{bool}{ fullScreen = FALSE}, \param{wxRect*}{ rect = NULL}}
+\func{bool}{BeginDrag}{\param{const wxPoint\& }{hotspot}, \param{wxWindow* }{window}, \param{bool}{ fullScreen = false}, \param{wxRect*}{ rect = NULL}}
Start dragging the image, in a window or full screen.
of the image.}
\docparam{window}{The window that captures the mouse, and within which the dragging
-is limited unless {\it fullScreen} is TRUE.}
+is limited unless {\it fullScreen} is true.}
\docparam{boundingWindow}{In the second form of the function, specifies the
area within which the drag occurs.}
-\docparam{fullScreen}{If TRUE, specifies that the drag will be visible over the full
+\docparam{fullScreen}{If true, specifies that the drag will be visible over the full
screen, or over as much of the screen as is specified by {\it rect}. Note that the mouse will
still be captured in {\it window}.}
\docparam{effect}{The effect to implement. One of wxDragCopy, wxDragMove and wxDragNone. }
-\docparam{scrolling}{TRUE if the window is scrolling. MSW only. }
+\docparam{scrolling}{true if the window is scrolling. MSW only. }
\wxheading{Return value}
-Return FALSE if you want default feedback, or TRUE if you implement your own
+Return false if you want default feedback, or true if you implement your own
feedback. The return values is ignored under GTK.
\func{virtual wxDragResult}{OnData}{\param{wxCoord}{ x}, \param{wxCoord}{ y}, \param{wxDragResult}{ def}}
-Called after \helpref{OnDrop}{wxdroptargetondrop} returns TRUE. By default this
+Called after \helpref{OnDrop}{wxdroptargetondrop} returns true. By default this
will usually \helpref{GetData}{wxdroptargetgetdata} and will return the suggested
default value {\it def}.
\func{virtual bool}{OnDrop}{\param{wxCoord }{x}, \param{wxCoord }{y}}
-Called when the user drops a data object on the target. Return FALSE to veto the operation.
+Called when the user drops a data object on the target. Return false to veto the operation.
\wxheading{Parameters}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Return TRUE to accept the data, FALSE to veto the operation.
+Return true to accept the data, false to veto the operation.
\membersection{wxDropTarget::OnEnter}\label{wxdroptargetonenter}
\constfunc{bool}{IsLoaded}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the library was successfully loaded, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the library was successfully loaded, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxDynamicLibrary::Load}\label{wxdynamiclibraryload}
Loads DLL into memory.
-Returns TRUE if the library was successfully loaded, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the library was successfully loaded, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxDynamicLibrary::Unload}\label{wxdynamiclibraryunload}
\wxheading{Return value}
-FALSE if given conversion is impossible, TRUE otherwise
+false if given conversion is impossible, true otherwise
(conversion may be impossible either if you try to convert
to Unicode with non-Unicode build of wxWindows or if input
or output encoding is not supported.)
\member{bool}{m\_skipped}
-Set to TRUE by {\bf Skip} if this event should be skipped.
+Set to true by {\bf Skip} if this event should be skipped.
\membersection{wxEvent::m\_timeStamp}
\func{bool}{GetSkipped}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the event handler should be skipped, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the event handler should be skipped, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxEvent::GetTimestamp}
\membersection{wxEvent::Skip}\label{wxeventskip}
-\func{void}{Skip}{\param{bool}{ skip = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{Skip}{\param{bool}{ skip = true}}
Called by an event handler to tell the event system that the
event handler should be skipped, and the next valid handler used
\param{wxObject*}{ userData = NULL}}
Disconnects the given function dynamically from the event handler, using the specified
-parameters as search criteria and returning TRUE if a matching function has been
+parameters as search criteria and returning true if a matching function has been
found and removed. This method can only disconnect functions which have been added
using the \helpref{wxEvtHandler::Connect}{wxevthandlerconnect} method. There is no way
to disconnect functions connected using the (static) event tables.
\func{bool}{GetEvtHandlerEnabled}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the event handler is enabled, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the event handler is enabled, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if a suitable event handler function was found and executed, and the function did not
+true if a suitable event handler function was found and executed, and the function did not
call \helpref{wxEvent::Skip}{wxeventskip}.
\wxheading{Remarks}
\item If the object is disabled (via a call to \helpref{wxEvtHandler::SetEvtHandlerEnabled}{wxevthandlersetevthandlerenabled})
the function skips to step (6).
\item If the object is a wxWindow, {\bf ProcessEvent} is recursively called on the window's\rtfsp
-\helpref{wxValidator}{wxvalidator}. If this returns TRUE, the function exits.
+\helpref{wxValidator}{wxvalidator}. If this returns true, the function exits.
\item {\bf SearchEventTable} is called for this event handler. If this fails, the base
class table is tried, and so on until no more tables exist or an appropriate function was found,
in which case the function exits.
\item The search is applied down the entire chain of event handlers (usually the chain has a length
of one). If this succeeds, the function exits.
\item If the object is a wxWindow and the event is a wxCommandEvent, {\bf ProcessEvent} is
-recursively applied to the parent window's event handler. If this returns TRUE, the function exits.
+recursively applied to the parent window's event handler. If this returns true, the function exits.
\item Finally, {\bf ProcessEvent} is called on the wxApp object.
\end{enumerate}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if a suitable event handler function was found and executed, and the function did not
+true if a suitable event handler function was found and executed, and the function did not
call \helpref{wxEvent::Skip}{wxeventskip}.
\wxheading{Remarks}
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{enabled}{TRUE if the event handler is to be enabled, FALSE if it is to be disabled.}
+\docparam{enabled}{true if the event handler is to be enabled, false if it is to be disabled.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
error handler must be a function returning a bool and taking an integer and a string
argument. When an error occurs when reading or writing a database, this function is
called. The error is given as the first argument (currently one of WXEXPR\_ERROR\_GENERAL,
-WXEXPR\_ERROR\_SYNTAX) and an error message is given as the second argument. If FALSE
+WXEXPR\_ERROR\_SYNTAX) and an error message is given as the second argument. If false
is returned by the error handler, processing of the wxExpr operation stops.
Another way of handling errors is simply to call \helpref{wxExprDatabase::GetErrorCount}{wxexprdatabasegeterrorcount} after
the operation, to check whether errors have occurred, instead of installing an error handler.
If the error count is more than zero, \helpref{wxExprDatabase::Write}{wxexprdatabasewrite} and
-\rtfsp\helpref{wxExprDatabase::Read}{wxexprdatabaseread} will return FALSE to
+\rtfsp\helpref{wxExprDatabase::Read}{wxexprdatabaseread} will return false to
the application.
For example:
{
wxMessageBox(msg, "Syntax error");
}
- return FALSE;
+ return false;
}
wxExprDatabase database(myErrorHandler);
\func{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\&}{ filename}}
-Reads in the given file, returning TRUE if successful.
+Reads in the given file, returning true if successful.
\membersection{wxExprDatabase::ReadFromString}\label{wxexprdatabasereadfromstring}
\func{bool}{ReadFromString}{\param{const wxString\&}{ buffer}}
-Reads a Prolog database from the given string buffer, returning TRUE if
+Reads a Prolog database from the given string buffer, returning true if
successful.
\membersection{wxExprDatabase::Write}\label{wxexprdatabasewrite}
\func{bool}{Close}{\void}
-Closes the file and returns TRUE on success.
+Closes the file and returns true on success.
\membersection{wxFFile::Detach}\label{wxffiledetach}
\func{void}{Detach}{\void}
Get back a file pointer from wxFFile object - the caller is responsible for closing the file if this
-descriptor is opened. \helpref{IsOpened()}{wxffileisopened} will return FALSE after call to Detach().
+descriptor is opened. \helpref{IsOpened()}{wxffileisopened} will return false after call to Detach().
\membersection{wxFFile::fp}\label{wxffilefp}
\constfunc{bool}{Eof}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the an attempt has been made to read {\it past}
+Returns true if the an attempt has been made to read {\it past}
the end of the file.
Note that the behaviour of the file descriptor based class
\helpref{wxFile}{wxfile} is different as \helpref{wxFile::Eof}{wxfileeof}
-will return TRUE here as soon as the last byte of the file has been
+will return true here as soon as the last byte of the file has been
read.
\membersection{wxFFile::Flush}\label{wxffileflush}
\func{bool}{Flush}{\void}
-Flushes the file and returns TRUE on success.
+Flushes the file and returns true on success.
\membersection{wxFFile::IsOpened}\label{wxffileisopened}
\constfunc{bool}{IsOpened}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the file has been opened.
+Returns true if the file has been opened.
\membersection{wxFFile::Length}\label{wxffilelength}
\func{bool}{Open}{\param{const char*}{ filename}, \param{const char*}{ mode = "r"}}
-Opens the file, returning TRUE if successful.
+Opens the file, returning true if successful.
\wxheading{Parameters}
\func{bool}{Seek}{\param{long }{ofs}, \param{wxSeekMode }{mode = wxFromStart}}
-Seeks to the specified position and returns TRUE on success.
+Seeks to the specified position and returns true on success.
\wxheading{Parameters}
\func{bool}{SeekEnd}{\param{long }{ofs = 0}}
Moves the file pointer to the specified number of bytes before the end of the file
-and returns TRUE on success.
+and returns true on success.
\wxheading{Parameters}
\func{bool}{Write}{\param{const wxString\& }{s}, \param{wxMBConv\&}{ conv = wxConvLibc}}
-Writes the contents of the string to the file, returns TRUE on success.
+Writes the contents of the string to the file, returns true on success.
The second argument is only meaningful in Unicode build of wxWindows when
{\it conv} is used to convert {\it s} to multibyte representation.
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the stream is initialized and ready.
+Returns true if the stream is initialized and ready.
% -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
% wxFFileOutputStream
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the stream is initialized and ready.
+Returns true if the stream is initialized and ready.
% -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
% wxFFileStream
\wxheading{Return value}
-Return TRUE to accept the data, FALSE to veto the operation.
+Return true to accept the data, false to veto the operation.
% VZ: this clarification is probably not needed any longer?
%\perlnote{In wxPerl there is just an array reference in place of {\tt nFiles}
\membersection{wxFile::Create}\label{wxfilecreate}
-\func{bool}{Create}{\param{const char*}{ filename}, \param{bool}{ overwrite = FALSE}, \param{int }{access = wxS\_DEFAULT}}
+\func{bool}{Create}{\param{const char*}{ filename}, \param{bool}{ overwrite = false}, \param{int }{access = wxS\_DEFAULT}}
-Creates a file for writing. If the file already exists, setting {\bf overwrite} to TRUE
+Creates a file for writing. If the file already exists, setting {\bf overwrite} to true
will ensure it is overwritten.
\membersection{wxFile::Detach}\label{wxfiledetach}
\func{void}{Detach}{\void}
Get back a file descriptor from wxFile object - the caller is responsible for closing the file if this
-descriptor is opened. \helpref{IsOpened()}{wxfileisopened} will return FALSE after call to Detach().
+descriptor is opened. \helpref{IsOpened()}{wxfileisopened} will return false after call to Detach().
\membersection{wxFile::fd}\label{wxfilefd}
\constfunc{bool}{Eof}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the end of the file has been reached.
+Returns true if the end of the file has been reached.
Note that the behaviour of the file pointer based class
\helpref{wxFFile}{wxffile} is different as \helpref{wxFFile::Eof}{wxffileeof}
-will return TRUE here only if an attempt has been made to read
-{\it past} the last byte of the file, while wxFile::Eof() will return TRUE
+will return true here only if an attempt has been made to read
+{\it past} the last byte of the file, while wxFile::Eof() will return true
even before such attempt is made if the file pointer is at the last position
in the file.
\func{static bool}{Exists}{\param{const char*}{ filename}}
-Returns TRUE if the given name specifies an existing regular file (not a
+Returns true if the given name specifies an existing regular file (not a
directory or a link)
\membersection{wxFile::Flush}\label{wxfileflush}
\constfunc{bool}{IsOpened}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the file has been opened.
+Returns true if the file has been opened.
\membersection{wxFile::Length}\label{wxfilelength}
\func{bool}{Open}{\param{const char*}{ filename}, \param{wxFile::OpenMode}{ mode = wxFile::read}}
-Opens the file, returning TRUE if successful.
+Opens the file, returning true if successful.
\wxheading{Parameters}
\func{bool}{Write}{\param{const wxString\& }{s}, \param{wxMBConv\&}{ conv = wxConvLibc}}
-Writes the contents of the string to the file, returns TRUE on success.
+Writes the contents of the string to the file, returns true on success.
The second argument is only meaningful in Unicode build of wxWindows when
{\it conv} is used to convert {\it s} to multibyte representation.
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the stream is initialized and ready.
+Returns true if the stream is initialized and ready.
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the stream is initialized and ready.
+Returns true if the stream is initialized and ready.
\membersection{wxFileSystem::ChangePathTo}\label{wxfilesystemchangepathto}
-\func{void}{ChangePathTo}{\param{const wxString\& }{location}, \param{bool }{is\_dir = FALSE}}
+\func{void}{ChangePathTo}{\param{const wxString\& }{location}, \param{bool }{is\_dir = false}}
Sets the current location. {\it location} parameter passed to
\helpref{OpenFile}{wxfilesystemopenfile} is relative to this path.
-{\bf Caution! } Unless {\it is\_dir} is TRUE the {\it location} parameter
+{\bf Caution! } Unless {\it is\_dir} is true the {\it location} parameter
is not the directory name but the name of the file in this directory. All these
commands change the path to "dir/subdir/":
\begin{verbatim}
ChangePathTo("dir/subdir/xh.htm");
- ChangePathTo("dir/subdir", TRUE);
-C hangePathTo("dir/subdir/", TRUE);
+ ChangePathTo("dir/subdir", true);
+C hangePathTo("dir/subdir/", true);
\end{verbatim}
\wxheading{Parameters}
\docparam{location}{the new location. Its meaning depends on the value of {\it is\_dir}}
-\docparam{is\_dir}{if TRUE {\it location} is new directory. If FALSE (default)
+\docparam{is\_dir}{if true {\it location} is new directory. If false (default)
{\it location} is {\bf file in} the new directory.}
\wxheading{Example}
\begin{verbatim}
f = fs -> OpenFile("hello.htm"); // opens file 'hello.htm'
- fs -> ChangePathTo("subdir/folder", TRUE);
+ fs -> ChangePathTo("subdir/folder", true);
f = fs -> OpenFile("hello.htm"); // opens file 'subdir/folder/hello.htm' !!
\end{verbatim}
\func{virtual bool}{CanOpen}{\param{const wxString\& }{location}}
-Returns TRUE if the handler is able to open this file. This function doesn't
+Returns true if the handler is able to open this file. This function doesn't
check whether the file exists or not, it only checks if it knows the protocol.
Example:
filename (within filesystem's current path) that matches {\it wildcard}. {\it flags} may be one of
wxFILE (only files), wxDIR (only directories) or 0 (both).
-This method is only called if \helpref{CanOpen}{wxfilesystemhandlercanopen} returns TRUE.
+This method is only called if \helpref{CanOpen}{wxfilesystemhandlercanopen} returns true.
\membersection{wxFileSystemHandler::FindNext}\label{wxfilesystemhandlerfindnext}
Returns next filename that matches parameters passed to \helpref{FindFirst}{wxfilesystemfindfirst}.
-This method is only called if \helpref{CanOpen}{wxfilesystemhandlercanopen} returns TRUE and FindFirst
+This method is only called if \helpref{CanOpen}{wxfilesystemhandlercanopen} returns true and FindFirst
returned a non-empty string.
\membersection{wxFileSystemHandler::OpenFile}\label{wxfilesystemhandleropenfile}
extension and wish to find out the corresponding MIME type or, conversely, it
might want to find the right extension for the file to which it writes the
contents of given MIME type. Depending on how it was created some fields may be
-unknown so the return value of all the accessors {\bf must} be checked: {\tt FALSE}
+unknown so the return value of all the accessors {\bf must} be checked: {\tt false}
will be returned if the corresponding information couldn't be found.
The objects of this class are never created by the application code but are
\func{bool}{GetMimeType}{\param{wxString*}{ mimeType}}
-If the function returns {\tt TRUE}, the string pointed to by {\it mimeType} is filled
+If the function returns {\tt true}, the string pointed to by {\it mimeType} is filled
with full MIME type specification for this file type: for example, "text/plain".
\membersection{wxFileType::GetMimeTypes}\label{wxfiletypegetmimetypes}
\func{bool}{GetExtensions}{\param{wxArrayString\&}{ extensions}}
-If the function returns {\tt TRUE}, the array {\it extensions} is filled
+If the function returns {\tt true}, the array {\it extensions} is filled
with all extensions associated with this file type: for example, it may
contain the following two elements for the MIME type "text/html" (notice the
absence of the leading dot): "html" and "htm".
{\bf Windows:} This function is currently not implemented: there is no
(efficient) way to retrieve associated extensions from the given MIME type on
-this platform, so it will only return {\tt TRUE} if the wxFileType object was created
+this platform, so it will only return {\tt true} if the wxFileType object was created
by \helpref{GetFileTypeFromExtension}{wxmimetypesmanagergetfiletypefromextension}
function in the first place.
\func{bool}{GetIcon}{\param{wxIcon*}{ icon}}
-If the function returns {\tt TRUE}, the icon associated with this file type will be
+If the function returns {\tt true}, the icon associated with this file type will be
created and assigned to the {\it icon} parameter.
{\bf Unix:} MIME manager gathers information about icons from GNOME
\func{bool}{GetDescription}{\param{wxString*}{ desc}}
-If the function returns {\tt TRUE}, the string pointed to by {\it desc} is filled
+If the function returns {\tt true}, the string pointed to by {\it desc} is filled
with a brief description for this file type: for example, "text document" for
the "text/plain" MIME type.
\func{wxString}{GetOpenCommand}{\param{const wxString\&}{ filename}}
-With the first version of this method, if the {\tt TRUE} is returned, the
+With the first version of this method, if the {\tt true} is returned, the
string pointed to by {\it command} is filled with the command which must be
executed (see \helpref{wxExecute}{wxexecute}) in order to open the file of the
given type. In this case, the name of the file as well as any other parameters
\func{bool}{GetPrintCommand}{\param{wxString*}{ command},\param{MessageParameters\&}{ params}}
-If the function returns {\tt TRUE}, the string pointed to by {\it command} is filled
+If the function returns {\tt true}, the string pointed to by {\it command} is filled
with the command which must be executed (see \helpref{wxExecute}{wxexecute}) in
order to print the file of the given type. The name of the file is
retrieved from \helpref{MessageParameters}{wxfiletypemessageparameters} class.
Default constructor.
\func{}{wxFont}{\param{int}{ pointSize}, \param{int}{ family}, \param{int}{ style}, \param{int}{ weight},
- \param{const bool}{ underline = FALSE}, \param{const wxString\& }{faceName = ""},
+ \param{const bool}{ underline = false}, \param{const wxString\& }{faceName = ""},
\param{wxFontEncoding }{encoding = wxFONTENCODING\_DEFAULT}}
Creates a font object (see \helpref{font encoding
\docparam{weight}{One of {\bf wxNORMAL}, {\bf wxLIGHT} and {\bf wxBOLD}.}
-\docparam{underline}{The value can be TRUE or FALSE. At present this has an effect on Windows only.}
+\docparam{underline}{The value can be true or false. At present this has an effect on Windows only.}
\docparam{faceName}{An optional string specifying the actual typeface to be used. If the empty string,
a default typeface will chosen based on the family.}
\constfunc{bool}{IsFixedWidth}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the font is a fixed width (or monospaced) font,
-{\tt FALSE} if it is a proportional one or font is invalid.
+Returns {\tt true} if the font is a fixed width (or monospaced) font,
+{\tt false} if it is a proportional one or font is invalid.
\membersection{wxFont::GetDefaultEncoding}\label{wxfontgetdefaultencoding}
\constfunc{bool}{GetUnderlined}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the font is underlined, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the font is underlined, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if this object is a valid font, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+Returns {\tt true} if this object is a valid font, {\tt false} otherwise.
\membersection{wxFont::SetDefaultEncoding}\label{wxfontsetdefaultencoding}
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{underlining}{TRUE to underline, FALSE otherwise.}
+\docparam{underlining}{true to underline, false otherwise.}
\wxheading{See also}
\func{}{wxFontData}{\void}
Constructor. Initializes {\it fontColour} to black, {\it showHelp} to black,
-\rtfsp{\it allowSymbols} to TRUE, {\it enableEffects} to TRUE,
+\rtfsp{\it allowSymbols} to true, {\it enableEffects} to true,
\rtfsp{\it minSize} to 0 and {\it maxSize} to 0.
\membersection{wxFontData::\destruct{wxFontData}}
Enables or disables `effects' under MS Windows only. This refers to the
controls for manipulating colour, strikeout and underline properties.
-The default value is TRUE.
+The default value is true.
\membersection{wxFontData::GetAllowSymbols}
Under MS Windows, returns a flag determining whether symbol fonts can be selected. Has no
effect on other platforms.
-The default value is TRUE.
+The default value is true.
\membersection{wxFontData::GetColour}
\func{wxFont}{GetChosenFont}{\void}
-Gets the font chosen by the user. If the user pressed OK (wxFontDialog::Show returned TRUE), this returns
+Gets the font chosen by the user. If the user pressed OK (wxFontDialog::Show returned true), this returns
a new font which is now `owned' by the application, and should be deleted
-if not required. If the user pressed Cancel (wxFontDialog::Show returned FALSE) or
+if not required. If the user pressed Cancel (wxFontDialog::Show returned false) or
the colour dialog has not been invoked yet, this will return NULL.
\membersection{wxFontData::GetEnableEffects}
Determines whether `effects' are enabled under Windows. This refers to the
controls for manipulating colour, strikeout and underline properties.
-The default value is TRUE.
+The default value is true.
\membersection{wxFontData::GetInitialFont}
\func{bool}{GetShowHelp}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the Help button will be shown (Windows only).
+Returns true if the Help button will be shown (Windows only).
-The default value is FALSE.
+The default value is false.
\membersection{wxFontData::SetAllowSymbols}
Under MS Windows, determines whether symbol fonts can be selected. Has no
effect on other platforms.
-The default value is TRUE.
+The default value is true.
\membersection{wxFontData::SetChosenFont}
Determines whether the Help button will be displayed in the font dialog (Windows only).
-The default value is FALSE.
+The default value is false.
\membersection{wxFontData::operator $=$}
\func{bool}{Create}{\param{wxWindow* }{parent}, \param{const wxFontData\& }{data}}
Creates the dialog if it the wxFontDialog object had been initialized using the
-default constructor. Returns {\tt TRUE} on success and {\tt FALSE} if an error
+default constructor. Returns {\tt true} on success and {\tt false} if an error
occured.
\membersection{wxFontDialog::\destruct{wxFontDialog}}
corresponding callback (\helpref{OnFacename}{wxfontenumeratoronfacename} or
\helpref{OnFontEncoding}{wxfontenumeratoronfontencoding}) will be called
repeatedly until either all fonts satisfying the specified criteria are
-exhausted or the callback returns FALSE.
+exhausted or the callback returns false.
\wxheading{Virtual functions to override}
\func{virtual bool}{EnumerateFacenames}{
\param{wxFontEncoding }{encoding = wxFONTENCODING\_SYSTEM},
- \param{bool }{fixedWidthOnly = FALSE}}
+ \param{bool }{fixedWidthOnly = false}}
Call \helpref{OnFacename}{wxfontenumeratoronfacename} for each font which
supports given encoding (only if it is not wxFONTENCODING\_SYSTEM) and is of
-fixed width (if {\it fixedWidthOnly} is TRUE).
+fixed width (if {\it fixedWidthOnly} is true).
Calling this function with default arguments will result in enumerating all
fonts available on the system.
\func{virtual bool}{OnFacename}{\param{const wxString\& }{font}}
Called by \helpref{EnumerateFacenames}{wxfontenumeratorenumeratefacenames} for
-each match. Return TRUE to continue enumeration or FALSE to stop it.
+each match. Return true to continue enumeration or false to stop it.
\membersection{wxFontEnumerator::OnFontEncoding}\label{wxfontenumeratoronfontencoding}
}
Called by \helpref{EnumerateEncodings}{wxfontenumeratorenumerateencodings} for
-each match. Return TRUE to continue enumeration or FALSE to stop it.
+each match. Return true to continue enumeration or false to stop it.
\membersection{wxFontList::FindOrCreateFont}\label{findorcreatefont}
-\func{wxFont *}{FindOrCreateFont}{\param{int}{ point\_size}, \param{int}{ family}, \param{int}{ style}, \param{int}{ weight}, \param{bool}{ underline = FALSE},
+\func{wxFont *}{FindOrCreateFont}{\param{int}{ point\_size}, \param{int}{ family}, \param{int}{ style}, \param{int}{ weight}, \param{bool}{ underline = false},
\param{const wxString\& }{facename = NULL}, \param{wxFontEncoding }{encoding = wxFONTENCODING\_DEFAULT}{}}
Finds a font of the given specification, or creates one and adds it to the list. See the \helpref{wxFont constructor}{wxfontconstr} for
The default implementations of all functions will ask the user if they are
not capable of finding the answer themselves and store the answer in a
config file (configurable via SetConfigXXX functions). This behaviour may
-be disabled by giving the value of FALSE to "interactive" parameter.
+be disabled by giving the value of false to "interactive" parameter.
However, the functions will always consult the config file to allow the
user-defined values override the default logic and there is no way to
disable this - which shouldn't be ever needed because if "interactive" was
-never TRUE, the config file is never created anyhow.
+never true, the config file is never created anyhow.
In case everything else fails (i.e. there is no record in config file
-and "interactive" is FALSE or user denied to choose any replacement),
+and "interactive" is false or user denied to choose any replacement),
the class queries \helpref{wxEncodingConverter}{wxencodingconverter}
for "equivalent" encodings (e.g. iso8859-2 and cp1250) and tries them.
{
wxFontEncoding alternative;
if (wxFontMapper::Get()->GetAltForEncoding(enc, &alternative,
- facename, FALSE))
+ facename, false))
{
wxEncodingConverter encconv;
if (!encconv.Init(enc, alternative))
\membersection{wxFontMapper::GetAltForEncoding}\label{wxfontmappergetaltforencoding}
-\func{bool}{GetAltForEncoding}{\param{wxFontEncoding }{encoding}, \param{wxNativeEncodingInfo* }{info}, \param{const wxString\& }{facename = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{interactive = TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{GetAltForEncoding}{\param{wxFontEncoding }{encoding}, \param{wxNativeEncodingInfo* }{info}, \param{const wxString\& }{facename = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{interactive = true}}
-\func{bool}{GetAltForEncoding}{\param{wxFontEncoding }{encoding}, \param{wxFontEncoding* }{alt\_encoding}, \param{const wxString\& }{facename = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{interactive = TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{GetAltForEncoding}{\param{wxFontEncoding }{encoding}, \param{wxFontEncoding* }{alt\_encoding}, \param{const wxString\& }{facename = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{interactive = true}}
Find an alternative for the given encoding (which is supposed to not be
-available on this system). If successful, return TRUE and fill info
+available on this system). If successful, return true and fill info
structure with the parameters required to create the font, otherwise
-return FALSE.
+return false.
The first form is for wxWindows' internal use while the second one
is better suitable for general use -- it returns wxFontEncoding which
\membersection{wxFontMapper::CharsetToEncoding}\label{wxfontmappercharsettoencoding}
-\func{wxFontEncoding}{CharsetToEncoding}{\param{const wxString\& }{charset}, \param{bool }{interactive = TRUE}}
+\func{wxFontEncoding}{CharsetToEncoding}{\param{const wxString\& }{charset}, \param{bool }{interactive = true}}
Returns the encoding for the given charset (in the form of RFC 2046) or
wxFONTENCODING\_SYSTEM if couldn't decode it.
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{iconize}{If TRUE, iconizes the frame; if FALSE, shows and restores it.}
+\docparam{iconize}{If true, iconizes the frame; if false, shows and restores it.}
\wxheading{See also}
\func{bool}{IsFullScreen}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the frame is in fullscreen mode.
+Returns true if the frame is in fullscreen mode.
\wxheading{See also}
\constfunc{bool}{IsIconized}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the frame is iconized.
+Returns true if the frame is iconized.
\membersection{wxFrame::IsMaximized}\label{wxframeismaximized}
\constfunc{bool}{IsMaximized}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the frame is maximized.
+Returns true if the frame is maximized.
\membersection{wxFrame::Maximize}\label{wxframemaximize}
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{maximize}{If TRUE, maximizes the frame, otherwise it restores it.}
+\docparam{maximize}{If true, maximizes the frame, otherwise it restores it.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\func{bool}{ShowFullScreen}{\param{bool}{ show}, \param{long}{ style = wxFULLSCREEN\_ALL}}
-Passing TRUE to {\it shows} shows the frame full-screen, and passing FALSE restores the frame
+Passing true to {\it shows} shows the frame full-screen, and passing false restores the frame
again. {\it style} is a bit list containing some or all of the following values, which
indicate what elements of the frame to hide in full-screen mode:
\func{bool}{Abort}{\void}
-Aborts the download currently in process, returns {\tt TRUE} if ok, {\tt FALSE}
+Aborts the download currently in process, returns {\tt true} if ok, {\tt false}
if an error occured.
\membersection{wxFTP::CheckCommand}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the command has been sent successfully, else FALSE.
+true if the command has been sent successfully, else false.
\membersection{wxFTP::SendCommand}\label{wxftpsendcommand}
\func{bool}{ChDir}{\param{const wxString\&}{ dir}}
Change the current FTP working directory.
-Returns TRUE if successful.
+Returns true if successful.
\membersection{wxFTP::MkDir}
\func{bool}{MkDir}{\param{const wxString\&}{ dir}}
Create the specified directory in the current FTP working directory.
-Returns TRUE if successful.
+Returns true if successful.
\membersection{wxFTP::RmDir}
\func{bool}{RmDir}{\param{const wxString\&}{ dir}}
Remove the specified directory from the current FTP working directory.
-Returns TRUE if successful.
+Returns true if successful.
\membersection{wxFTP::Pwd}
\func{bool}{Rename}{\param{const wxString\&}{ src}, \param{const wxString\&}{ dst}}
-Rename the specified {\it src} element to {\it dst}. Returns TRUE if successful.
+Rename the specified {\it src} element to {\it dst}. Returns true if successful.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
\func{bool}{RmFile}{\param{const wxString\&}{ path}}
-Delete the file specified by {\it path}. Returns TRUE if successful.
+Delete the file specified by {\it path}. Returns true if successful.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
\func{bool}{FileExists}{\param{const wxString\&}{ filename}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the given remote file exists, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+Returns {\tt true} if the given remote file exists, {\tt false} otherwise.
\membersection{wxFTP::GetFileSize}\label{wxftpgetfilesize}
1 file(s) 520 196 bytes
\end{verbatim}
-Return value: TRUE if the file list was successfully retrieved, FALSE
+Return value: true if the file list was successfully retrieved, false
otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
by default). This list always has the same format and contains one full
(including the directory path) file name per line.
-Return value: TRUE if the file list was successfully retrieved, FALSE
+Return value: true if the file list was successfully retrieved, false
otherwise.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
this function.
\func{void}{wxEntry}{\param{HANDLE}{ hInstance}, \param{HANDLE}{ hPrevInstance},
- \param{const wxString\& }{commandLine}, \param{int}{ cmdShow}, \param{bool}{ enterLoop = TRUE}}
+ \param{const wxString\& }{commandLine}, \param{int}{ cmdShow}, \param{bool}{ enterLoop = true}}
-wxWindows initialization under Windows (non-DLL). If {\it enterLoop} is FALSE, the
+wxWindows initialization under Windows (non-DLL). If {\it enterLoop} is false, the
function will return immediately after calling wxApp::OnInit. Otherwise, the wxWindows
message loop will be entered.
\membersection{::wxHandleFatalExceptions}\label{wxhandlefatalexceptions}
-\func{bool}{wxHandleFatalExceptions}{\param{bool}{ doIt = TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{wxHandleFatalExceptions}{\param{bool}{ doIt = true}}
-If {\it doIt} is TRUE, the fatal exceptions (also known as general protection
+If {\it doIt} is true, the fatal exceptions (also known as general protection
faults under Windows or segmentation violations in the Unix world) will be
caught and passed to \helpref{wxApp::OnFatalException}{wxapponfatalexception}.
By default, i.e. before this function is called, they will be handled in the
normal way which usually just means that the application will be terminated.
-Calling wxHandleFatalExceptions() with {\it doIt} equal to FALSE will restore
+Calling wxHandleFatalExceptions() with {\it doIt} equal to false will restore
this default behaviour.
\membersection{::wxInitAllImageHandlers}\label{wxinitallimagehandlers}
\helpref{wxApp}{wxapp} object at all. In this case you must call it from your
{\tt main()} function before calling any other wxWindows functions.
-If the function returns {\tt FALSE} the initialization could not be performed,
+If the function returns {\tt false} the initialization could not be performed,
in this case the library cannot be used and
\helpref{wxUninitialize}{wxuninitialize} shouldn't be called neither.
\membersection{::wxSafeYield}\label{wxsafeyield}
\func{bool}{wxSafeYield}{\param{wxWindow*}{ win = NULL}, \param{bool}{
- onlyIfNeeded = FALSE}}
+ onlyIfNeeded = false}}
This function is similar to wxYield, except that it disables the user input to
all program windows before calling wxYield and re-enables it again
terminated successfully. Also, while waiting for the process to
terminate, wxExecute will call \helpref{wxYield}{wxyield}. The caller
should ensure that this can cause no recursion, in the simplest case by
-calling \helpref{wxEnableTopLevelWindows(FALSE)}{wxenabletoplevelwindows}.
+calling \helpref{wxEnableTopLevelWindows(false)}{wxenabletoplevelwindows}.
For asynchronous execution, however, the return value is the process id and
zero value indicates that the command could not be executed. As an added
\wxheading{Returns}
-{\tt TRUE} on success, {\tt FALSE} if an error occured.
+{\tt true} on success, {\tt false} if an error occured.
\wxheading{Include files}
\func{bool}{wxDirExists}{\param{const wxString\& }{dirname}}
-Returns TRUE if the directory exists.
+Returns true if the directory exists.
\membersection{::wxDos2UnixFilename}\label{wxdos2unixfilename}
\func{bool}{wxFileExists}{\param{const wxString\& }{filename}}
-Returns TRUE if the file exists. It also returns TRUE if the file is
+Returns true if the file exists. It also returns true if the file is
a directory.
\membersection{::wxFileModificationTime}\label{wxfilemodificationtime}
\wxheading{Returns}
-{\tt TRUE} on success, {\tt FALSE} if an error occured (for example, the
+{\tt true} on success, {\tt false} if an error occured (for example, the
directory doesn't exist).
\wxheading{Portability}
\func{bool}{wxIsAbsolutePath}{\param{const wxString\& }{filename}}
-Returns TRUE if the argument is an absolute filename, i.e. with a slash
+Returns true if the argument is an absolute filename, i.e. with a slash
or drive name at the beginning.
\membersection{::wxPathOnly}\label{wxpathonly}
\param{const wxString\& }{file3}}
Concatenates {\it file1} and {\it file2} to {\it file3}, returning
-TRUE if successful.
+true if successful.
\membersection{::wxCopyFile}\label{wxcopyfile}
-\func{bool}{wxCopyFile}{\param{const wxString\& }{file1}, \param{const wxString\& }{file2}, \param{bool }{overwrite = TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{wxCopyFile}{\param{const wxString\& }{file1}, \param{const wxString\& }{file2}, \param{bool }{overwrite = true}}
-Copies {\it file1} to {\it file2}, returning TRUE if successful. If
-{\it overwrite} parameter is TRUE (default), the destination file is overwritten
-if it exists, but if {\it overwrite} is FALSE, the functions fails in this
+Copies {\it file1} to {\it file2}, returning true if successful. If
+{\it overwrite} parameter is true (default), the destination file is overwritten
+if it exists, but if {\it overwrite} is false, the functions fails in this
case.
\membersection{::wxGetCwd}\label{wxgetcwd}
\func{bool}{wxIsWild}{\param{const wxString\& }{pattern}}
-Returns TRUE if the pattern contains wildcards. See \helpref{wxMatchWild}{wxmatchwild}.
+Returns true if the pattern contains wildcards. See \helpref{wxMatchWild}{wxmatchwild}.
\membersection{::wxMatchWild}\label{wxmatchwild}
\func{bool}{wxMatchWild}{\param{const wxString\& }{pattern}, \param{const wxString\& }{text}, \param{bool}{ dot\_special}}
-Returns TRUE if the {\it pattern}\/ matches the {\it text}\/; if {\it
-dot\_special}\/ is TRUE, filenames beginning with a dot are not matched
+Returns true if the {\it pattern}\/ matches the {\it text}\/; if {\it
+dot\_special}\/ is true, filenames beginning with a dot are not matched
with wildcard characters. See \helpref{wxIsWild}{wxiswild}.
\membersection{::wxMkdir}\label{wxmkdir}
\func{bool}{wxMkdir}{\param{const wxString\& }{dir}, \param{int }{perm = 0777}}
-Makes the directory {\it dir}, returning TRUE if successful.
+Makes the directory {\it dir}, returning true if successful.
{\it perm} is the access mask for the directory for the systems on which it is
supported (Unix) and doesn't have effect for the other ones.
\func{bool}{wxRemoveFile}{\param{const wxString\& }{file}}
-Removes {\it file}, returning TRUE if successful.
+Removes {\it file}, returning true if successful.
\membersection{::wxRenameFile}\label{wxrenamefile}
\func{bool}{wxRenameFile}{\param{const wxString\& }{file1}, \param{const wxString\& }{file2}}
-Renames {\it file1} to {\it file2}, returning TRUE if successful.
+Renames {\it file1} to {\it file2}, returning true if successful.
\membersection{::wxRmdir}\label{wxrmdir}
\func{bool}{wxRmdir}{\param{const wxString\& }{dir}, \param{int}{ flags=0}}
-Removes the directory {\it dir}, returning TRUE if successful. Does not work under VMS.
+Removes the directory {\it dir}, returning true if successful. Does not work under VMS.
The {\it flags} parameter is reserved for future use.
\func{bool}{wxSetWorkingDirectory}{\param{const wxString\& }{dir}}
-Sets the current working directory, returning TRUE if the operation succeeded.
+Sets the current working directory, returning true if the operation succeeded.
Under MS Windows, the current drive is also changed if {\it dir} contains a drive specification.
\membersection{::wxSplitPath}\label{wxsplitfunction}
concatenating the values returned by \helpref{wxGetFullHostName}{wxgetfullhostname}\rtfsp
and \helpref{wxGetUserId}{wxgetuserid}.
-Returns TRUE if successful, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if successful, false otherwise.
\wxheading{Include files}
in the {\bf wxWindows} section of the WIN.INI file is tried.
The first variant of this function returns the hostname if successful or an
-empty string otherwise. The second (deprecated) function returns TRUE
-if successful, FALSE otherwise.
+empty string otherwise. The second (deprecated) function returns true
+if successful, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
in the {\bf wxWindows} section of the WIN.INI file is tried.
The first variant of this function returns the login name if successful or an
-empty string otherwise. The second (deprecated) function returns TRUE
-if successful, FALSE otherwise.
+empty string otherwise. The second (deprecated) function returns true
+if successful, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
the PENWIN.INI file is used.
The first variant of this function returns the user name if successful or an
-empty string otherwise. The second (deprecated) function returns {\tt TRUE}
-if successful, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+empty string otherwise. The second (deprecated) function returns {\tt true}
+if successful, {\tt false} otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\func{bool}{wxIsEmpty}{\param{const char *}{ p}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the pointer is either {\tt NULL} or points to an empty
-string, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+Returns {\tt true} if the pointer is either {\tt NULL} or points to an empty
+string, {\tt false} otherwise.
\membersection{::wxStricmp}\label{wxstricmp}
\membersection{::wxStringMatch}\label{wxstringmatch}
\func{bool}{wxStringMatch}{\param{const wxString\& }{s1}, \param{const wxString\& }{s2},\\
- \param{bool}{ subString = TRUE}, \param{bool}{ exact = FALSE}}
+ \param{bool}{ subString = true}, \param{bool}{ exact = false}}
{\bf NB:} This function is obsolete, use \helpref{wxString::Find}{wxstringfind} instead.
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the substring {\it s1} is found within {\it s2},
-ignoring case if {\it exact} is FALSE. If {\it subString} is {\tt FALSE},
+Returns {\tt true} if the substring {\it s1} is found within {\it s2},
+ignoring case if {\it exact} is false. If {\it subString} is {\tt false},
no substring matching is done.
\membersection{::wxStringEq}\label{wxstringeq}
\param{const wxArrayString\& }{aChoices},\\
\param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL},\\
\param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1},\\
- \param{bool}{ centre = TRUE},\\
+ \param{bool}{ centre = true},\\
\param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
\func{size\_t}{wxGetMultipleChoices}{\\
\param{int}{ n}, \param{const wxString\& }{choices[]},\\
\param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL},\\
\param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1},\\
- \param{bool}{ centre = TRUE},\\
+ \param{bool}{ centre = true},\\
\param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
Pops up a dialog box containing a message, OK/Cancel buttons and a
which is an array of {\it n} strings for the listbox or by using a single
{\it aChoices} parameter of type \helpref{wxArrayString}{wxarraystring}.
-If {\it centre} is TRUE, the message text (which may include new line
-characters) is centred; if FALSE, the message is left-justified.
+If {\it centre} is true, the message text (which may include new line
+characters) is centred; if false, the message is left-justified.
\wxheading{Include files}
\func{wxString}{wxGetTextFromUser}{\param{const wxString\& }{message}, \param{const wxString\& }{caption = ``Input text"},\\
\param{const wxString\& }{default\_value = ``"}, \param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL},\\
- \param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1}, \param{bool}{ centre = TRUE}}
+ \param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1}, \param{bool}{ centre = true}}
Pop up a dialog box with title set to {\it caption}, {\it message}, and a
\rtfsp{\it default\_value}. The user may type in text and press OK to return this text,
or press Cancel to return the empty string.
-If {\it centre} is TRUE, the message text (which may include new line characters)
-is centred; if FALSE, the message is left-justified.
+If {\it centre} is true, the message text (which may include new line characters)
+is centred; if false, the message is left-justified.
\wxheading{Include files}
\func{int}{wxGetMultipleChoice}{\param{const wxString\& }{message}, \param{const wxString\& }{caption}, \param{int}{ n}, \param{const wxString\& }{choices[]},\\
\param{int }{nsel}, \param{int *}{selection},
\param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL}, \param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1},\\
- \param{bool}{ centre = TRUE}, \param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
+ \param{bool}{ centre = true}, \param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
Pops up a dialog box containing a message, OK/Cancel buttons and a multiple-selection
listbox. The user may choose one or more item(s) and press OK or Cancel.
{\it choices} is an array of {\it n} strings for the listbox.
-If {\it centre} is TRUE, the message text (which may include new line characters)
-is centred; if FALSE, the message is left-justified.
+If {\it centre} is true, the message text (which may include new line characters)
+is centred; if false, the message is left-justified.
\wxheading{Include files}
\param{const wxArrayString\& }{aChoices},\\
\param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL},\\
\param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1},\\
- \param{bool}{ centre = TRUE},\\
+ \param{bool}{ centre = true},\\
\param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
\func{wxString}{wxGetSingleChoice}{\param{const wxString\& }{message},\\
\param{int}{ n}, \param{const wxString\& }{choices[]},\\
\param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL},\\
\param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1},\\
- \param{bool}{ centre = TRUE},\\
+ \param{bool}{ centre = true},\\
\param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
Pops up a dialog box containing a message, OK/Cancel buttons and a
which is an array of {\it n} strings for the listbox or by using a single
{\it aChoices} parameter of type \helpref{wxArrayString}{wxarraystring}.
-If {\it centre} is TRUE, the message text (which may include new line
-characters) is centred; if FALSE, the message is left-justified.
+If {\it centre} is true, the message text (which may include new line
+characters) is centred; if false, the message is left-justified.
\wxheading{Include files}
\param{const wxString\& }{caption},\\
\param{const wxArrayString\& }{aChoices},\\
\param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL}, \param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1},\\
- \param{bool}{ centre = TRUE}, \param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
+ \param{bool}{ centre = true}, \param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
\func{int}{wxGetSingleChoiceIndex}{\param{const wxString\& }{message},\\
\param{const wxString\& }{caption},\\
\param{int}{ n}, \param{const wxString\& }{choices[]},\\
\param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL}, \param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1},\\
- \param{bool}{ centre = TRUE}, \param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
+ \param{bool}{ centre = true}, \param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
As {\bf wxGetSingleChoice} but returns the index representing the selected
string. If the user pressed cancel, -1 is returned.
\param{const wxString\& }{client\_data[]},\\
\param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL},\\
\param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1},\\
- \param{bool}{ centre = TRUE}, \param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
+ \param{bool}{ centre = true}, \param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
\func{wxString}{wxGetSingleChoiceData}{\param{const wxString\& }{message},\\
\param{const wxString\& }{caption},\\
\param{const wxString\& }{client\_data[]},\\
\param{wxWindow *}{parent = NULL},\\
\param{int}{ x = -1}, \param{int}{ y = -1},\\
- \param{bool}{ centre = TRUE}, \param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
+ \param{bool}{ centre = true}, \param{int }{width=150}, \param{int }{height=200}}
As {\bf wxGetSingleChoice} but takes an array of client data pointers
corresponding to the strings, and returns one of these pointers or NULL if
\func{bool}{wxIsBusy}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if between two \helpref{wxBeginBusyCursor}{wxbeginbusycursor} and\rtfsp
+Returns true if between two \helpref{wxBeginBusyCursor}{wxbeginbusycursor} and\rtfsp
\helpref{wxEndBusyCursor}{wxendbusycursor} calls.
See also \helpref{wxBusyCursor}{wxbusycursor}.
\func{bool}{wxShowTip}{\param{wxWindow *}{parent},
\param{wxTipProvider *}{tipProvider},
- \param{bool }{showAtStartup = TRUE}}
+ \param{bool }{showAtStartup = true}}
This function shows a "startup tip" to the user. The return value is the
state of the ``Show tips at startup'' checkbox.
\docparam{tipProvider}{An object which is used to get the text of the tips.
It may be created with the \helpref{wxCreateFileTipProvider}{wxcreatefiletipprovider} function.}
-\docparam{showAtStartup}{Should be TRUE if startup tips are shown, FALSE
+\docparam{showAtStartup}{Should be true if startup tips are shown, false
otherwise. This is used as the initial value for "Show tips at startup"
checkbox which is shown in the tips dialog.}
\func{bool}{wxColourDisplay}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the display is colour, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the display is colour, false otherwise.
\membersection{::wxDisplayDepth}\label{wxdisplaydepth}
\func{bool}{wxClipboardOpen}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if this application has already opened the clipboard.
+Returns true if this application has already opened the clipboard.
\membersection{::wxCloseClipboard}\label{wxcloseclipboard}
\func{bool}{wxIsClipboardFormatAvailable}{\param{int}{dataFormat}}
-Returns TRUE if the given data format is available on the clipboard.
+Returns true if the given data format is available on the clipboard.
\membersection{::wxOpenClipboard}\label{wxopenclipboard}
\membersection{::wxEnableTopLevelWindows}\label{wxenabletoplevelwindows}
-\func{void}{wxEnableTopLevelWindow}{\param{bool}{ enable = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{wxEnableTopLevelWindow}{\param{bool}{ enable = true}}
This function enables or disables all top level windows. It is used by
\helpref{::wxSafeYield}{wxsafeyield}.
\membersection{::wxGetElapsedTime}\label{wxgetelapsedtime}
-\func{long}{wxGetElapsedTime}{\param{bool}{ resetTimer = TRUE}}
+\func{long}{wxGetElapsedTime}{\param{bool}{ resetTimer = true}}
Gets the time in milliseconds since the last \helpref{::wxStartTimer}{wxstarttimer}.
-If {\it resetTimer} is TRUE (the default), the timer is reset to zero
+If {\it resetTimer} is true (the default), the timer is reset to zero
by this call.
See also \helpref{wxTimer}{wxtimer}.
\func{}{wxASSERT}{\param{}{condition}}
-Assert macro. An error message will be generated if the condition is FALSE in
+Assert macro. An error message will be generated if the condition is false in
debug mode, but nothing will be done in the release build.
Please note that the condition in wxASSERT() should have no side effects
\func{}{wxASSERT\_MSG}{\param{}{condition}, \param{}{msg}}
-Assert macro with message. An error message will be generated if the condition is FALSE.
+Assert macro with message. An error message will be generated if the condition is false.
\wxheading{See also}
{\it value} may be {\tt NULL} if you just want to know if the variable exists
and are not interested in its value.
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the variable exists, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+Returns {\tt true} if the variable exists, {\tt false} otherwise.
\membersection{wxSetEnv}\label{wxsetenv}
Sets the value of the environment variable {\it var} (adding it if necessary)
to {\it value}.
-Returns {\tt TRUE} on success.
+Returns {\tt true} on success.
\membersection{wxUnsetEnv}\label{wxunsetenv}
\helpref{wxGetEnv}{wxgetenv} will return {\tt NULL} after the call to this
function.
-Returns {\tt TRUE} on success.
+Returns {\tt true} on success.
\membersection{wxGrid::AppendCols}\label{wxgridappendcols}
-\func{bool}{AppendCols}{\param{int }{numCols = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{AppendCols}{\param{int }{numCols = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = true}}
-Appends one or more new columns to the right of the grid and returns TRUE if
+Appends one or more new columns to the right of the grid and returns true if
successful. The updateLabels argument is not used at present.
If you are using a derived grid table class you will need to override
\membersection{wxGrid::AppendRows}\label{wxgridappendrows}
-\func{bool}{AppendRows}{\param{int }{numRows = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{AppendRows}{\param{int }{numRows = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = true}}
-Appends one or more new rows to the bottom of the grid and returns TRUE if
+Appends one or more new rows to the bottom of the grid and returns true if
successful. The updateLabels argument is not used at present.
If you are using a derived grid table class you will need to override
\membersection{wxGrid::AutoSizeColumn}\label{wxgridautosizecolumn}
-\func{void}{AutoSizeColumn}{\param{int }{col}, \param{bool }{setAsMin = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{AutoSizeColumn}{\param{int }{col}, \param{bool }{setAsMin = true}}
-Automatically sizes the column to fit its contents. If setAsMin is TRUE the calculated width will
+Automatically sizes the column to fit its contents. If setAsMin is true the calculated width will
also be set as the minimal width for the column.
\wxheading{Note}\\
\membersection{wxGrid::AutoSizeColumns}\label{wxgridautosizecolumns}
-\func{void}{AutoSizeColumns}{\param{bool }{setAsMin = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{AutoSizeColumns}{\param{bool }{setAsMin = true}}
-Automatically sizes all columns to fit their contents. If setAsMin is TRUE the calculated widths will
+Automatically sizes all columns to fit their contents. If setAsMin is true the calculated widths will
also be set as the minimal widths for the columns.
\wxheading{Note}\\
\membersection{wxGrid::AutoSizeRow}\label{wxgridautosizerow}
-\func{void}{AutoSizeRow}{\param{int }{row}, \param{bool }{setAsMin = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{AutoSizeRow}{\param{int }{row}, \param{bool }{setAsMin = true}}
-Automatically sizes the row to fit its contents. If setAsMin is TRUE the calculated height will
+Automatically sizes the row to fit its contents. If setAsMin is true the calculated height will
also be set as the minimal height for the row.
\wxheading{Note}\\
\membersection{wxGrid::AutoSizeRows}\label{wxgridautosizerows}
-\func{void}{AutoSizeRows}{\param{bool }{setAsMin = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{AutoSizeRows}{\param{bool }{setAsMin = true}}
-Automatically sizes all rows to fit their contents. If setAsMin is TRUE the calculated heights will
+Automatically sizes all rows to fit their contents. If setAsMin is true the calculated heights will
also be set as the minimal heights for the rows.
\wxheading{Note}\\
\func{bool}{CanDragColSize}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if columns can be resized by dragging with the mouse. Columns can be resized
+Returns true if columns can be resized by dragging with the mouse. Columns can be resized
by dragging the edges of their labels. If grid line dragging is enabled they can also be
resized by dragging the right edge of the column in the grid cell area
(see \helpref{wxGrid::EnableDragGridSize}{wxgridenabledraggridsize}).
\func{bool}{CanDragRowSize}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if rows can be resized by dragging with the mouse. Rows can be resized
+Returns true if rows can be resized by dragging with the mouse. Rows can be resized
by dragging the edges of their labels. If grid line dragging is enabled they can also be
resized by dragging the lower edge of the row in the grid cell area
(see \helpref{wxGrid::EnableDragGridSize}{wxgridenabledraggridsize}).
\func{bool}{CanDragGridSize}{\void}
-Return TRUE if the dragging of grid lines to resize rows and columns is enabled or FALSE otherwise.
+Return true if the dragging of grid lines to resize rows and columns is enabled or false otherwise.
\membersection{wxGrid::CanEnableCellControl}\label{wxgridcanenablecellcontrol}
\constfunc{bool}{CanEnableCellControl}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the in-place edit control for the current grid cell can be used and
-FALSE otherwise (e.g. if the current cell is read-only).
+Returns true if the in-place edit control for the current grid cell can be used and
+false otherwise (e.g. if the current cell is read-only).
\membersection{wxGrid::CellToRect}\label{wxgridcelltorect}
\membersection{wxGrid::DeleteCols}\label{wxgriddeletecols}
-\func{bool}{DeleteCols}{\param{int }{pos = 0}, \param{int }{numCols = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{DeleteCols}{\param{int }{pos = 0}, \param{int }{numCols = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = true}}
Deletes one or more columns from a grid starting at the specified position and returns
-TRUE if successful. The updateLabels argument is not used at present.
+true if successful. The updateLabels argument is not used at present.
If you are using a derived grid table class you will need to override
\helpref{wxGridTableBase::DeleteCols}{wxgridtablebasedeletecols}. See
\membersection{wxGrid::DeleteRows}\label{wxgriddeleterows}
-\func{bool}{DeleteRows}{\param{int }{pos = 0}, \param{int }{numRows = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{DeleteRows}{\param{int }{pos = 0}, \param{int }{numRows = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = true}}
Deletes one or more rows from a grid starting at the specified position and returns
-TRUE if successful. The updateLabels argument is not used at present.
+true if successful. The updateLabels argument is not used at present.
If you are using a derived grid table class you will need to override
\helpref{wxGridTableBase::DeleteRows}{wxgridtablebasedeleterows}. See
\func{void}{DisableCellEditControl}{\void}
Disables in-place editing of grid cells.
-Equivalent to calling EnableCellEditControl(FALSE).
+Equivalent to calling EnableCellEditControl(false).
\membersection{wxGrid::DisableDragColSize}\label{wxgriddisabledragcolsize}
\func{void}{DisableDragColSize}{\void}
-Disables column sizing by dragging with the mouse. Equivalent to passing FALSE to
+Disables column sizing by dragging with the mouse. Equivalent to passing false to
\helpref{wxGrid::EnableDragColSize}{wxgridenabledragcolsize}.
\membersection{wxGrid::DisableDragGridSize}\label{wxgriddisabledraggridsize}
\func{void}{DisableDragGridSize}{\void}
Disable mouse dragging of grid lines to resize rows and columns. Equivalent to passing
-FALSE to \helpref{wxGrid::EnableDragGridSize}{wxgridenabledraggridsize}
+false to \helpref{wxGrid::EnableDragGridSize}{wxgridenabledraggridsize}
\membersection{wxGrid::DisableDragRowSize}\label{wxgriddisabledragrowsize}
\func{void}{DisableDragRowSize}{\void}
-Disables row sizing by dragging with the mouse. Equivalent to passing FALSE to
+Disables row sizing by dragging with the mouse. Equivalent to passing false to
\helpref{wxGrid::EnableDragRowSize}{wxgridenabledragrowsize}.
\membersection{wxGrid::EnableCellEditControl}\label{wxgridenablecelleditcontrol}
-\func{void}{EnableCellEditControl}{\param{bool }{enable = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{EnableCellEditControl}{\param{bool }{enable = true}}
Enables or disables in-place editing of grid cell data. The grid will issue either a
wxEVT\_GRID\_EDITOR\_SHOWN or wxEVT\_GRID\_EDITOR\_HIDDEN event.
\membersection{wxGrid::EnableDragColSize}\label{wxgridenabledragcolsize}
-\func{void}{EnableDragColSize}{\param{bool }{enable = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{EnableDragColSize}{\param{bool }{enable = true}}
Enables or disables column sizing by dragging with the mouse.
\membersection{wxGrid::EnableDragGridSize}\label{wxgridenabledraggridsize}
-\func{void}{EnableDragGridSize}{\param{bool }{enable = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{EnableDragGridSize}{\param{bool }{enable = true}}
Enables or disables row and column resizing by dragging gridlines with the mouse.
\membersection{wxGrid::EnableDragRowSize}\label{wxgridenabledragrowsize}
-\func{void}{EnableDragRowSize}{\param{bool }{enable = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{EnableDragRowSize}{\param{bool }{enable = true}}
Enables or disables row sizing by dragging with the mouse.
\func{void}{EnableEditing}{\param{bool }{edit}}
-If the edit argument is FALSE this function sets the whole grid as read-only. If the
-argument is TRUE the grid is set to the default state where cells may be editable. In the
+If the edit argument is false this function sets the whole grid as read-only. If the
+argument is true the grid is set to the default state where cells may be editable. In the
default state you can set single grid cells and whole rows and columns to be editable or
read-only via
\helpref{wxGridCellAttribute::SetReadOnly}{wxgridcellattrsetreadonly}. For single
\membersection{wxGrid::EnableGridLines}\label{wxgridenablegridlines}
-\func{void}{EnableGridLines}{\param{bool }{enable = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{EnableGridLines}{\param{bool }{enable = true}}
Turns the drawing of grid lines on or off.
\func{bool}{GridLinesEnabled}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if drawing of grid lines is turned on, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if drawing of grid lines is turned on, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxGrid::GetLabelBackgroundColour}\label{wxgridgetlabelbackgroundcolour}
\membersection{wxGrid::InsertCols}\label{wxgridinsertcols}
-\func{bool}{InsertCols}{\param{int }{pos = 0}, \param{int }{numCols = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{InsertCols}{\param{int }{pos = 0}, \param{int }{numCols = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = true}}
Inserts one or more new columns into a grid with the first new column at the
-specified position and returns TRUE if successful. The updateLabels argument is not
+specified position and returns true if successful. The updateLabels argument is not
used at present.
The sequence of actions begins with the grid object requesting the underlying grid
\membersection{wxGrid::InsertRows}\label{wxgridinsertrows}
-\func{bool}{InsertRows}{\param{int }{pos = 0}, \param{int }{numRows = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{InsertRows}{\param{int }{pos = 0}, \param{int }{numRows = 1}, \param{bool }{updateLabels = true}}
Inserts one or more new rows into a grid with the first new row at the specified
-position and returns TRUE if successful. The updateLabels argument is not used at
+position and returns true if successful. The updateLabels argument is not used at
present.
The sequence of actions begins with the grid object requesting the underlying grid
\constfunc{bool}{IsCellEditControlEnabled}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the in-place edit control is currently enabled.
+Returns true if the in-place edit control is currently enabled.
\membersection{wxGrid::IsCurrentCellReadOnly}\label{wxgridiscurrentcellreadonly}
\constfunc{bool}{IsCurrentCellReadOnly}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the current cell has been set to read-only
+Returns true if the current cell has been set to read-only
(see \helpref{wxGrid::SetReadOnly}{wxgridsetreadonly}).
\membersection{wxGrid::IsEditable}\label{wxgridiseditable}
\func{bool}{IsEditable}{\void}
-Returns FALSE if the whole grid has been set as read-only or TRUE otherwise.
+Returns false if the whole grid has been set as read-only or true otherwise.
See \helpref{wxGrid::EnableEditing}{wxgridenableediting} for more information about
controlling the editing status of grid cells.
\constfunc{bool}{IsReadOnly}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}}
-Returns TRUE if the cell at the specified location can't be edited.
+Returns true if the cell at the specified location can't be edited.
See also \helpref{wxGrid::IsReadOnly}{wxgridisreadonly}.
\membersection{wxGrid::IsSelection}\label{wxgridisselection}
\func{bool}{IsSelection}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if there are currently rows, columns or blocks of cells selected.
+Returns true if there are currently rows, columns or blocks of cells selected.
\membersection{wxGrid::IsVisible}\label{wxgridisvisible}
-\func{bool}{IsVisible}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}, \param{bool }{wholeCellVisible = TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{IsVisible}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}, \param{bool }{wholeCellVisible = true}}
-\func{bool}{IsVisible}{\param{const wxGridCellCoords\& }{coords}, \param{bool }{wholeCellVisible = TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{IsVisible}{\param{const wxGridCellCoords\& }{coords}, \param{bool }{wholeCellVisible = true}}
-Returns TRUE if a cell is either wholly visible (the default) or at least partially
+Returns true if a cell is either wholly visible (the default) or at least partially
visible in the grid window.
\membersection{wxGrid::MakeCellVisible}\label{wxgridmakecellvisible}
\func{bool}{MoveCursorDown}{\param{bool }{expandSelection}}
Moves the grid cursor down by one row. If a block of cells was previously selected it
-will expand if the argument is TRUE or be cleared if the argument is FALSE.
+will expand if the argument is true or be cleared if the argument is false.
\wxheading{Keyboard}\\
This function is called for Down cursor key presses or Shift+Down to expand a selection.
\func{bool}{MoveCursorLeft}{\param{bool }{expandSelection}}
Moves the grid cursor left by one column. If a block of cells was previously selected it
-will expand if the argument is TRUE or be cleared if the argument is FALSE.
+will expand if the argument is true or be cleared if the argument is false.
\wxheading{Keyboard}\\
This function is called for Left cursor key presses or Shift+Left to expand a selection.
\func{bool}{MoveCursorRight}{\param{bool }{expandSelection}}
Moves the grid cursor right by one column. If a block of cells was previously selected it
-will expand if the argument is TRUE or be cleared if the argument is FALSE.
+will expand if the argument is true or be cleared if the argument is false.
\wxheading{Keyboard}\\
This function is called for Right cursor key presses or Shift+Right to expand a selection.
\func{bool}{MoveCursorUp}{\param{bool }{expandSelection}}
Moves the grid cursor up by one row. If a block of cells was previously selected it
-will expand if the argument is TRUE or be cleared if the argument is FALSE.
+will expand if the argument is true or be cleared if the argument is false.
\wxheading{Keyboard}\\
This function is called for Up cursor key presses or Shift+Up to expand a selection.
Moves the grid cursor down in the current column such that it skips to the beginning or
end of a block of non-empty cells. If a block of cells was previously selected it
-will expand if the argument is TRUE or be cleared if the argument is FALSE.
+will expand if the argument is true or be cleared if the argument is false.
\wxheading{Keyboard}\\
This function is called for the Ctrl+Down key combination. Shift+Ctrl+Down expands a selection.
Moves the grid cursor left in the current row such that it skips to the beginning or
end of a block of non-empty cells. If a block of cells was previously selected it
-will expand if the argument is TRUE or be cleared if the argument is FALSE.
+will expand if the argument is true or be cleared if the argument is false.
\wxheading{Keyboard}\\
This function is called for the Ctrl+Left key combination. Shift+Ctrl+left expands a selection.
Moves the grid cursor right in the current row such that it skips to the beginning or
end of a block of non-empty cells. If a block of cells was previously selected it
-will expand if the argument is TRUE or be cleared if the argument is FALSE.
+will expand if the argument is true or be cleared if the argument is false.
\wxheading{Keyboard}\\
This function is called for the Ctrl+Right key combination. Shift+Ctrl+Right expands a selection.
Moves the grid cursor up in the current column such that it skips to the beginning or
end of a block of non-empty cells. If a block of cells was previously selected it
-will expand if the argument is TRUE or be cleared if the argument is FALSE.
+will expand if the argument is true or be cleared if the argument is false.
\wxheading{Keyboard}\\
This function is called for the Ctrl+Up key combination. Shift+Ctrl+Up expands a selection.
\membersection{wxGrid::SelectBlock}\label{wxgridselectblock}
\func{void}{SelectBlock}{\param{int }{topRow}, \param{int }{leftCol},
-\param{int }{bottomRow}, \param{int }{rightCol}, \param{bool }{addToSelected = FALSE}}
+\param{int }{bottomRow}, \param{int }{rightCol}, \param{bool }{addToSelected = false}}
\func{void}{SelectBlock}{\param{const wxGridCellCoords\& }{topLeft},
-\param{const wxGridCellCoords\& }{bottomRight}, \param{bool }{addToSelected = FALSE}}
+\param{const wxGridCellCoords\& }{bottomRight}, \param{bool }{addToSelected = false}}
-Selects a rectangular block of cells. If addToSelected is FALSE then any existing selection will be
-deselected; if TRUE the column will be added to the existing selection.
+Selects a rectangular block of cells. If addToSelected is false then any existing selection will be
+deselected; if true the column will be added to the existing selection.
\membersection{wxGrid::SelectCol}\label{wxgridselectcol}
-\func{void}{SelectCol}{\param{int }{col}, \param{bool }{addToSelected = FALSE}}
+\func{void}{SelectCol}{\param{int }{col}, \param{bool }{addToSelected = false}}
-Selects the specified column. If addToSelected is FALSE then any existing selection will be
-deselected; if TRUE the column will be added to the existing selection.
+Selects the specified column. If addToSelected is false then any existing selection will be
+deselected; if true the column will be added to the existing selection.
\membersection{wxGrid::SelectRow}\label{wxgridselectrow}
-\func{void}{SelectRow}{\param{int }{row}, \param{bool }{addToSelected = FALSE}}
+\func{void}{SelectRow}{\param{int }{row}, \param{bool }{addToSelected = false}}
-Selects the specified row. If addToSelected is FALSE then any existing selection will be
-deselected; if TRUE the row will be added to the existing selection.
+Selects the specified row. If addToSelected is false then any existing selection will be
+deselected; if true the row will be added to the existing selection.
\membersection{wxGrid::SetCellAlignment}\label{wxgridsetcellalignment}
This function does not refresh the grid. If you are calling it outside of a BeginBatch / EndBatch
block you can use \helpref{wxGrid::ForceRefresh}{wxgridforcerefresh} to see the changes.
-Automatically sizes the column to fit its contents. If setAsMin is TRUE the calculated width will
+Automatically sizes the column to fit its contents. If setAsMin is true the calculated width will
also be set as the minimal width for the column.
\wxheading{Note}\\
\membersection{wxGrid::SetDefaultColSize}\label{wxgridsetdefaultcolsize}
-\func{void}{SetDefaultColSize}{\param{int }{width}, \param{bool }{resizeExistingCols = FALSE}}
+\func{void}{SetDefaultColSize}{\param{int }{width}, \param{bool }{resizeExistingCols = false}}
Sets the default width for columns in the grid. This will only affect columns subsequently added to
-the grid unless resizeExistingCols is TRUE.
+the grid unless resizeExistingCols is true.
\membersection{wxGrid::SetDefaultRowSize}\label{wxgridsetdefaultrowsize}
-\func{void}{SetDefaultRowSize}{\param{int }{height}, \param{bool }{resizeExistingRows = FALSE}}
+\func{void}{SetDefaultRowSize}{\param{int }{height}, \param{bool }{resizeExistingRows = false}}
Sets the default height for rows in the grid. This will only affect rows subsequently added
-to the grid unless resizeExistingRows is TRUE.
+to the grid unless resizeExistingRows is true.
\membersection{wxGrid::SetGridCursor}\label{wxgridsetgridcursor}
\membersection{wxGrid::SetReadOnly}\label{wxgridsetreadonly}
-\func{void}{SetReadOnly}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}, \param{bool }{isReadOnly = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetReadOnly}{\param{int }{row}, \param{int }{col}, \param{bool }{isReadOnly = true}}
Makes the cell at the specified location read-only or editable.
See also \helpref{wxGrid::IsReadOnly}{wxgridisreadonly}.
This function does not refresh the grid. If you are calling it outside of a BeginBatch / EndBatch
block you can use \helpref{wxGrid::ForceRefresh}{wxgridforcerefresh} to see the changes.
-Automatically sizes the column to fit its contents. If setAsMin is TRUE the calculated width will
+Automatically sizes the column to fit its contents. If setAsMin is true the calculated width will
also be set as the minimal width for the column.
\wxheading{Note}
\membersection{wxGrid::SetTable}\label{wxgridsettable}
-\func{bool}{SetTable}{\param{wxGridTableBase* }{table}, \param{bool }{takeOwnership = FALSE}, \param{wxGrid::wxGridSelectionModes }{selmode = wxGrid::wxGridSelectCells}}
+\func{bool}{SetTable}{\param{wxGridTableBase* }{table}, \param{bool }{takeOwnership = false}, \param{wxGrid::wxGridSelectionModes }{selmode = wxGrid::wxGridSelectCells}}
Passes a pointer to a custom grid table to be used by the grid. This should be called
after the grid constructor and before using the grid object. If takeOwnership is set to
-TRUE then the table will be deleted by the wxGrid destructor.
+true then the table will be deleted by the wxGrid destructor.
Use this function instead of \helpref{wxGrid::CreateGrid}{wxgridcreategrid} when your
application involves complex or non-string data or data sets that are too large to fit
\membersection{wxGrid::SetEditable}\label{wxgridseteditable}
-\func{void}{SetEditable}{\param{bool }{edit = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetEditable}{\param{bool }{edit = true}}
\membersection{wxGrid::GetEditInPlace}\label{wxgridgeteditinplace}
\membersection{wxGrid::SetEditInPlace}\label{wxgridseteditinplace}
-\func{void}{SetEditInPlace}{\param{bool }{edit = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetEditInPlace}{\param{bool }{edit = true}}
\membersection{wxGrid::SetCellBitmap}\label{wxgridsetcellbitmap}
\membersection{wxGrid::SetOrCalcColumnSizes}\label{wxgridsetorcalccolumnsizes}
-\func{int}{SetOrCalcColumnSizes}{\param{bool }{calcOnly}, \param{bool }{setAsMin = TRUE}}
+\func{int}{SetOrCalcColumnSizes}{\param{bool }{calcOnly}, \param{bool }{setAsMin = true}}
Common part of AutoSizeColumn/Row() and GetBestSize()
\membersection{wxGrid::SetOrCalcRowSizes}\label{wxgridsetorcalcrowsizes}
-\func{int}{SetOrCalcRowSizes}{\param{bool }{calcOnly}, \param{bool }{setAsMin = TRUE}}
+\func{int}{SetOrCalcRowSizes}{\param{bool }{calcOnly}, \param{bool }{setAsMin = true}}
\membersection{wxGrid::AutoSizeColOrRow}\label{wxgridautosizecolorrow}
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::SetReadOnly}\label{wxgridcellattrsetreadonly}
-\func{void}{SetReadOnly}{\param{bool }{isReadOnly = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetReadOnly}{\param{bool }{isReadOnly = true}}
\membersection{wxGridCellAttr::SetRenderer}\label{wxgridcellattrsetrenderer}
\membersection{wxGridCellChoiceEditor::wxGridCellChoiceEditor}\label{wxgridcellchoiceeditorconstr}
-\func{}{wxGridCellChoiceEditor}{\param{size\_t }{count = 0}, \param{const wxString }{choices[] = NULL}, \param{bool }{allowOthers = FALSE}}
+\func{}{wxGridCellChoiceEditor}{\param{size\_t }{count = 0}, \param{const wxString }{choices[] = NULL}, \param{bool }{allowOthers = false}}
\docparam{count}{Number of strings from which the user can choose.}
\docparam{choices}{An array of strings from which the user can choose.}
-\docparam{allowOthers}{If allowOthers if TRUE, the user can type a string not in choices array.}
+\docparam{allowOthers}{If allowOthers if true, the user can type a string not in choices array.}
\membersection{wxGridCellChoiceEditor::SetParameters}\label{wxgridcellchoiceeditorsetparameters}
\func{}{wxGridEvent}{\param{int }{id}, \param{wxEventType }{type}, \param{wxObject* }{obj},
\param{int }{row = -1}, \param{int }{col = -1}, \param{int }{x = -1}, \param{int }{y = -1},
- \param{bool }{sel = TRUE}, \param{bool }{control = FALSE}, \param{bool }{shift = FALSE},
- \param{bool }{alt = FALSE}, \param{bool }{meta = FALSE}}
+ \param{bool }{sel = true}, \param{bool }{control = false}, \param{bool }{shift = false},
+ \param{bool }{alt = false}, \param{bool }{meta = false}}
\wxheading{Parameters}
\func{bool}{AltDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the Alt key was down at the time of the event.
+Returns true if the Alt key was down at the time of the event.
\membersection{wxGridEvent::ControlDown}\label{wxgrideventcontroldown}
\func{bool}{ControlDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the Control key was down at the time of the event.
+Returns true if the Control key was down at the time of the event.
\membersection{wxGridEvent::GetCol}\label{wxgrideventgetcol}
\func{bool}{MetaDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the Meta key was down at the time of the event.
+Returns true if the Meta key was down at the time of the event.
\membersection{wxGridEvent::Selecting}\label{wxgrideventselecting}
\func{bool}{Selecting}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the user deselected a cell, FALSE if the user
+Returns true if the user deselected a cell, false if the user
deselected a cell.
\membersection{wxGridEvent::ShiftDown}\label{wxgrideventshiftdown}
\func{bool}{ShiftDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the Shift key was down at the time of the event.
+Returns true if the Shift key was down at the time of the event.
\section{\class{wxGridRangeSelectEvent}}\label{wxgridrangeselectevent}
\func{}{wxGridRangeSelectEvent}{\param{int }{id}, \param{wxEventType }{type},
\param{wxObject* }{obj}, \param{const wxGridCellCoords\& }{topLeft},
- \param{const wxGridCellCoords\& }{bottomRight}, \param{bool }{sel = TRUE},
- \param{bool }{control = FALSE}, \param{bool }{shift = FALSE}, \param{bool }{alt = FALSE},
- \param{bool }{meta = FALSE}}
+ \param{const wxGridCellCoords\& }{bottomRight}, \param{bool }{sel = true},
+ \param{bool }{control = false}, \param{bool }{shift = false}, \param{bool }{alt = false},
+ \param{bool }{meta = false}}
\membersection{wxGridRangeSelectEvent::AltDown}\label{wxgridrangeselecteventaltdown}
\func{bool}{AltDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the Alt key was down at the time of the event.
+Returns true if the Alt key was down at the time of the event.
\membersection{wxGridRangeSelectEvent::ControlDown}\label{wxgridrangeselecteventcontroldown}
\func{bool}{ControlDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the Control key was down at the time of the event.
+Returns true if the Control key was down at the time of the event.
\membersection{wxGridRangeSelectEvent::GetBottomRightCoords}\label{wxgridrangeselecteventgetbottomrightcoords}
\func{bool}{MetaDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the Meta key was down at the time of the event.
+Returns true if the Meta key was down at the time of the event.
\membersection{wxGridRangeSelectEvent::Selecting}\label{wxgridrangeselecteventselecting}
\func{bool}{Selecting}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the area was selected, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the area was selected, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxGridRangeSelectEvent::ShiftDown}\label{wxgridrangeselecteventshiftdown}
\func{bool}{ShiftDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the Shift key was down at the time of the event.
+Returns true if the Shift key was down at the time of the event.
\section{\class{wxGridSizeEvent}}\label{wxgridsizeevent}
\func{}{wxGridSizeEvent}{\param{int }{id}, \param{wxEventType }{type},
\param{wxObject* }{obj}, \param{int }{rowOrCol = -1}, \param{int }{x = -1},
- \param{int }{y = -1}, \param{bool }{control = FALSE}, \param{bool }{shift = FALSE},
- \param{bool }{alt = FALSE}, \param{bool }{meta = FALSE}}
+ \param{int }{y = -1}, \param{bool }{control = false}, \param{bool }{shift = false},
+ \param{bool }{alt = false}, \param{bool }{meta = false}}
\membersection{wxGridSizeEvent::AltDown}\label{wxgridsizeeventaltdown}
\func{bool}{AltDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the Alt key was down at the time of the event.
+Returns true if the Alt key was down at the time of the event.
\membersection{wxGridSizeEvent::ControlDown}\label{wxgridsizeeventcontroldown}
\func{bool}{ControlDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the Control key was down at the time of the event.
+Returns true if the Control key was down at the time of the event.
\membersection{wxGridSizeEvent::GetPosition}\label{wxgridsizeeventgetposition}
\func{bool}{MetaDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the Meta key was down at the time of the event.
+Returns true if the Meta key was down at the time of the event.
\membersection{wxGridSizeEvent::ShiftDown}\label{wxgridsizeeventshiftdown}
\func{bool}{ShiftDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the Shift key was down at the time of the event.
+Returns true if the Shift key was down at the time of the event.
\func{void}{DeleteContents}{\param{bool}{ flag}}
-If set to TRUE data stored in hash table will be deleted when hash table object
+If set to true data stored in hash table will be deleted when hash table object
is destroyed.
\constfunc{bool}{empty}{}
-Returns TRUE if the hash map does not contain any element, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the hash map does not contain any element, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxHashMap::end}
\membersection{wxHelpEvent::wxHelpEvent}
-\func{}{wxHelpEvent}{\param{WXTYPE }{eventType = 0}, \param{bool}{ active = TRUE}, \param{wxWindowID }{id = 0},
+\func{}{wxHelpEvent}{\param{WXTYPE }{eventType = 0}, \param{bool}{ active = true}, \param{wxWindowID }{id = 0},
\param{const wxPoint\& }{point}}
Constructor.
Displays the section as a popup window using a context id.
-Returns FALSE if unsuccessful or not implemented.
+Returns false if unsuccessful or not implemented.
\membersection{wxHelpController::DisplaySection}\label{wxhelpcontrollerdisplaysection}
Displays the text in a popup window, if possible.
-Returns FALSE if unsuccessful or not implemented.
+Returns false if unsuccessful or not implemented.
\membersection{wxHelpController::GetFrameParameters}\label{wxhelpcontrollergetframeparameters}
\func{virtual void}{SetFrameParameters}{\param{const wxString \& }{title},
\param{const wxSize \& }{size}, \param{const wxPoint \& }{pos = wxDefaultPosition},
- \param{bool }{newFrameEachTime = FALSE}}
+ \param{bool }{newFrameEachTime = false}}
For wxHtmlHelpController, the title is set (again with \%s indicating the
page title) and also the size and position of the frame if the frame is already
Shows help for the given window. Uses \helpref{GetHelp}{wxhelpprovidergethelp} internally if
applicable.
-Returns TRUE if it was done, or FALSE if no help was available
+Returns true if it was done, or false if no help was available
for this window.
\membersection{wxHelpProvider::AddHelp}\label{wxhelpprovideraddhelp}
into two pieces (each one on another page) then it moves the pagebreak
few pixels up.
-Returns TRUE if pagebreak was modified, FALSE otherwise
+Returns true if pagebreak was modified, false otherwise
Usage:
\begin{verbatim}
\docparam{x, y}{coordinates of mouse click (this is relative to cell's origin}
-\docparam{left, middle, right}{boolean flags for mouse buttons. TRUE if the left/middle/right
-button is pressed, FALSE otherwise}
+\docparam{left, middle, right}{boolean flags for mouse buttons. true if the left/middle/right
+button is pressed, false otherwise}
\membersection{wxHtmlCell::SetId}\label{wxhtmlcellsetid}
\membersection{wxHtmlDCRenderer::SetHtmlText}\label{wxhtmldcrenderersethtmltext}
-\func{void}{SetHtmlText}{\param{const wxString\& }{html}, \param{const wxString\& }{basepath = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{isdir = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetHtmlText}{\param{const wxString\& }{html}, \param{const wxString\& }{basepath = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{isdir = true}}
Assign text to the renderer. \helpref{Render}{wxhtmldcrendererrender} then draws
the text onto DC.
\docparam{basepath}{base directory (html string would be stored there if it was in
file). It is used to determine path for loading images, for example.}
-\docparam{isdir}{FALSE if basepath is filename, TRUE if it is directory name
+\docparam{isdir}{false if basepath is filename, true if it is directory name
(see \helpref{wxFileSystem}{wxfilesystem} for detailed explanation)}
\membersection{wxHtmlDCRenderer::Render}\label{wxhtmldcrendererrender}
-\func{int}{Render}{\param{int }{x}, \param{int }{y}, \param{int }{from = 0}, \param{int }{dont\_render = FALSE}}
+\func{int}{Render}{\param{int }{x}, \param{int }{y}, \param{int }{from = 0}, \param{int }{dont\_render = false}}
Renders HTML text to the DC.
\docparam{from}{y-coordinate of the very first visible cell}
-\docparam{dont\_render}{if TRUE then this method only returns y coordinate of the next page
+\docparam{dont\_render}{if true then this method only returns y coordinate of the next page
and does not output anything}
Returned value is y coordinate of first cell than didn't fit onto page.
Preview HTML file.
-Returns FALSE in case of error -- call
+Returns false in case of error -- call
\helpref{wxPrinter::GetLastError}{wxprintergetlasterror} to get detailed
information about the kind of the error.
Preview HTML text (not file!).
-Returns FALSE in case of error -- call
+Returns false in case of error -- call
\helpref{wxPrinter::GetLastError}{wxprintergetlasterror} to get detailed
information about the kind of the error.
Print HTML file.
-Returns FALSE in case of error -- call
+Returns false in case of error -- call
\helpref{wxPrinter::GetLastError}{wxprintergetlasterror} to get detailed
information about the kind of the error.
Print HTML text (not file!).
-Returns FALSE in case of error -- call
+Returns false in case of error -- call
\helpref{wxPrinter::GetLastError}{wxprintergetlasterror} to get detailed
information about the kind of the error.
\func{bool}{CanRead}{\param{const wxFSFile\& }{file}}
-Returns TRUE if this filter is capable of reading file {\it file}.
+Returns true if this filter is capable of reading file {\it file}.
Example:
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{show\_wait\_msg}{If TRUE then a decoration-less window with progress message is displayed.}
+\docparam{show\_wait\_msg}{If true then a decoration-less window with progress message is displayed.}
\docparam{book\_file}{Help book filename. It is recommended to use this prototype
instead of the one taking URL, because it is less error-prone.}
\docparam{book\_url}{Help book URL (note that syntax of filename and URL is
\func{bool}{KeywordSearch}{\param{const wxString\& }{keyword}}
Displays help window, focuses search panel and starts searching.
-Returns TRUE if the keyword was found.
+Returns true if the keyword was found.
{\bf Important:} KeywordSearch searches only pages listed in .hhc file(s).
You should list all pages in the contents file.
\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::CreateContents}\label{wxhtmlhelpframecreatecontents}
-\func{void}{CreateContents}{\param{bool }{show\_progress = FALSE}}
+\func{void}{CreateContents}{\param{bool }{show\_progress = false}}
Creates contents panel. (May take some time.)
\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::CreateIndex}\label{wxhtmlhelpframecreateindex}
-\func{void}{CreateIndex}{\param{bool }{show\_progress = FALSE}}
+\func{void}{CreateIndex}{\param{bool }{show\_progress = false}}
Creates index panel. (May take some time.)
\membersection{wxHtmlHelpFrame::RefreshLists}\label{wxhtmlhelpframerefreshlists}
-\func{void}{RefreshLists}{\param{bool }{show\_progress = FALSE}}
+\func{void}{RefreshLists}{\param{bool }{show\_progress = false}}
Refresh all panels. This is necessary if a new book was added.
\membersection{wxHtmlPrintout::SetHtmlText}\label{wxhtmlprintoutsethtmltext}
-\func{void}{SetHtmlText}{\param{const wxString\& }{html}, \param{const wxString\& }{basepath = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{isdir = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetHtmlText}{\param{const wxString\& }{html}, \param{const wxString\& }{basepath = wxEmptyString}, \param{bool }{isdir = true}}
Prepare the class for printing this HTML text.
\docparam{basepath}{base directory (html string would be stored there if it was in
file). It is used to determine path for loading images, for example.}
-\docparam{isdir}{FALSE if basepath is filename, TRUE if it is directory name
+\docparam{isdir}{false if basepath is filename, true if it is directory name
(see \helpref{wxFileSystem}{wxfilesystem} for detailed explanation)}
\membersection{wxHtmlTag::GetParam}\label{wxhtmltaggetparam}
-\constfunc{wxString}{GetParam}{\param{const wxString\& }{par}, \param{bool }{with\_commas = FALSE}}
+\constfunc{wxString}{GetParam}{\param{const wxString\& }{par}, \param{bool }{with\_commas = false}}
Returns the value of the parameter. You should check whether the
parameter exists or not (use \helpref{HasParam}{wxhtmltaghasparam}) first.
\docparam{par}{The parameter's name.}
-\docparam{with\_commas}{TRUE if you want to get commas as well. See example.}
+\docparam{with\_commas}{true if you want to get commas as well. See example.}
\wxheading{Example}
// dummy == "+2"
dummy = tag.GetParam("COLOR");
// dummy == "#0000FF"
-dummy = tag.GetParam("COLOR", TRUE);
+dummy = tag.GetParam("COLOR", true);
// dummy == "\"#0000FF\"" -- see the difference!!
\end{verbatim}
Interprets tag parameter {\it par} as colour specification and saves its value
into wxColour variable pointed by {\it clr}.
-Returns TRUE on success and FALSE if {\it par} is not colour specification or
+Returns true on success and false if {\it par} is not colour specification or
if the tag has no such parameter.
\membersection{wxHtmlTag::GetParamAsInt}\label{wxhtmltaggetparamasint}
Interprets tag parameter {\it par} as an integer and saves its value
into int variable pointed by {\it value}.
-Returns TRUE on success and FALSE if {\it par} is not an integer or
+Returns true on success and false if {\it par} is not an integer or
if the tag has no such parameter.
\membersection{wxHtmlTag::HasEnding}\label{wxhtmltaghasending}
\constfunc{bool}{HasEnding}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if this tag is paired with ending tag, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if this tag is paired with ending tag, false otherwise.
See the example of HTML document:
\constfunc{bool}{HasParam}{\param{const wxString\& }{par}}
-Returns TRUE if the tag has a parameter of the given name.
+Returns true if the tag has a parameter of the given name.
Example : {\tt <FONT SIZE=+2 COLOR="\#FF00FF">} has two parameters named
"SIZE" and "COLOR".
\constfunc{bool}{IsEnding}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if this tag is ending one.
+Returns true if this tag is ending one.
({\tt </FONT>} is ending tag, {\tt <FONT>} is not)
\membersection{wxHtmlTag::ScanParam}\label{wxhtmltagscanparam}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if \helpref{ParseInner}{wxhtmltaghandlerparseinner} was called,
-FALSE otherwise.
+true if \helpref{ParseInner}{wxhtmltaghandlerparseinner} was called,
+false otherwise.
\wxheading{Example}
\wxheading{Return value}
-FALSE if an error occurred, TRUE otherwise.
+false if an error occurred, true otherwise.
\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::GetInternalRepresentation}\label{wxhtmlwindowgetinternalrepresentation}
\wxheading{Return value}
-FALSE if an error occurred, TRUE otherwise
+false if an error occurred, true otherwise
\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::OnCellClicked}\label{wxhtmlwindowoncellclicked}
\wxheading{Return value}
-FALSE if an error occurred, TRUE otherwise.
+false if an error occurred, true otherwise.
\membersection{wxHtmlWindow::SetRelatedFrame}\label{wxhtmlwindowsetrelatedframe}
\constfunc{int}{GetFontBold}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if actual font is bold, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if actual font is bold, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetFontFace}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetfontface}
\constfunc{int}{GetFontFixed}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if actual font is fixed face, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if actual font is fixed face, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetFontItalic}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetfontitalic}
\constfunc{int}{GetFontItalic}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if actual font is italic, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if actual font is italic, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetFontSize}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetfontsize}
\constfunc{int}{GetFontUnderlined}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if actual font is underlined, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if actual font is underlined, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::GetInputEncoding}\label{wxhtmlwinparsergetinputencoding}
\func{void}{SetFontBold}{\param{int }{x}}
-Sets bold flag of actualfont. {\it x} is either TRUE of FALSE.
+Sets bold flag of actualfont. {\it x} is either true of false.
\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetFontFace}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetfontface}
\func{void}{SetFontFixed}{\param{int }{x}}
-Sets fixed face flag of actualfont. {\it x} is either TRUE of FALSE.
+Sets fixed face flag of actualfont. {\it x} is either true of false.
\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetFontItalic}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetfontitalic}
\func{void}{SetFontItalic}{\param{int }{x}}
-Sets italic flag of actualfont. {\it x} is either TRUE of FALSE.
+Sets italic flag of actualfont. {\it x} is either true of false.
\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetFontSize}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetfontsize}
\func{void}{SetFontUnderlined}{\param{int }{x}}
-Sets underlined flag of actualfont. {\it x} is either TRUE of FALSE.
+Sets underlined flag of actualfont. {\it x} is either true of false.
\membersection{wxHtmlWinParser::SetFonts}\label{wxhtmlwinparsersetfonts}
used to initialize the program, maybe showing a "splash screen" and creating
the main window (or several). The frame should get a title bar text ("Hello World")
and a position and start-up size. One frame can also be declared to be the
-top window. Returning TRUE indicates a successful initialization.
+top window. Returning true indicates a successful initialization.
\begin{verbatim}
bool MyApp::OnInit()
{
MyFrame *frame = new MyFrame( "Hello World", wxPoint(50,50), wxSize(450,340) );
- frame->Show( TRUE );
+ frame->Show( true );
SetTopWindow( frame );
- return TRUE;
+ return true;
}
\end{verbatim}
\end{verbatim}
Here are the actual event handlers. MyFrame::OnQuit() closes the main window
-by calling Close(). The parameter TRUE indicates that other windows have no veto
+by calling Close(). The parameter true indicates that other windows have no veto
power such as after asking "Do you really want to close?". If there is no other
main window left, the application will quit.
\begin{verbatim}
void MyFrame::OnQuit(wxCommandEvent& WXUNUSED(event))
{
- Close( TRUE );
+ Close( true );
}
\end{verbatim}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the operation succeeded, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if icon data is present.
+Returns true if icon data is present.
\begin{comment}
\membersection{wxIcon::SaveFile}\label{wxiconsavefile}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the operation succeeded, false otherwise.
\wxheading{Remarks}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE if the icons were effectively equal, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the icons were effectively equal, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxIcon::operator $!=$}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE if the icons were unequal, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the icons were unequal, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxIconizeEvent::wxIconizeEvent}\label{wxiconizeeventctor}
-\func{}{wxIconizeEvent}{\param{int }{id = 0}, \param{bool }{iconized = TRUE}}
+\func{}{wxIconizeEvent}{\param{int }{id = 0}, \param{bool }{iconized = true}}
Constructor.
\constfunc{bool}{Iconized}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the frame has been iconized, {\tt FALSE} if it has been
+Returns {\tt true} if the frame has been iconized, {\tt false} if it has been
restored.
\membersection{wxIdleEvent::RequestMore}\label{wxidleeventrequestmore}
-\func{void}{RequestMore}{\param{bool}{ needMore = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{RequestMore}{\param{bool}{ needMore = true}}
Tells wxWindows that more processing is required. This function can be called by an OnIdle
handler for a window or window event handler to indicate that wxApp::OnIdle should
\constfunc{bool}{MoreRequested}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the OnIdle function processing this event requested more processing time.
+Returns true if the OnIdle function processing this event requested more processing time.
\wxheading{See also}
Creates an image with the given width and height.
-\func{}{wxImage}{\param{int}{ width}, \param{int}{ height}, \param{unsigned char*}{ data}, \param{bool}{ static\_data=FALSE}}
+\func{}{wxImage}{\param{int}{ width}, \param{int}{ height}, \param{unsigned char*}{ data}, \param{bool}{ static\_data=false}}
Creates an image from given data with the given width and height. If
-{\it static\_data} is TRUE, then wxImage will not delete the actual
+{\it static\_data} is true, then wxImage will not delete the actual
image data in its destructor, otherwise it will free it by calling
{\it free()}.
\func{bool}{CanRead}{\param{const wxString\&}{ filename}}
-returns TRUE if the current image handlers can read this file
+returns true if the current image handlers can read this file
\pythonnote{In wxPython this static method is named {\tt wxImage\_AddHandler}.}
\membersection{wxImage::CleanUpHandlers}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the call succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the call succeeded, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxImage::Destroy}\label{wximagedestroy}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns FALSE if there is no unused colour left, TRUE on success.
+Returns false if there is no unused colour left, true on success.
\wxheading{Notes}
\constfunc{bool}{HasMask}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if there is a mask active, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if there is a mask active, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxImage::GetOption}\label{wximagegetoption}
\constfunc{bool}{HasOption}{\param{const wxString\&}{ name}}
-Returns TRUE if the given option is present. The function is case-insensitive to {\it name}.
+Returns true if the given option is present. The function is case-insensitive to {\it name}.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise. If the optional index parameter is out of range,
-FALSE is returned and a call to wxLogError() takes place.
+true if the operation succeeded, false otherwise. If the optional index parameter is out of range,
+false is returned and a call to wxLogError() takes place.
\wxheading{See also}
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if image data is present.
+Returns true if image data is present.
\membersection{wxImage::RemoveHandler}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the handler was found and removed, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the handler was found and removed, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the operation succeeded, false otherwise.
\wxheading{Remarks}
\membersection{wxImage::Mirror}\label{wximagemirror}
-\constfunc{wxImage}{Mirror}{\param{bool}{ horizontally = TRUE}}
+\constfunc{wxImage}{Mirror}{\param{bool}{ horizontally = true}}
Returns a mirrored copy of the image. The parameter {\it horizontally}
indicates the orientation.
\membersection{wxImage::Rotate}\label{wximagerotate}
\func{wxImage}{Rotate}{\param{double}{ angle}, \param{const wxPoint\& }{rotationCentre},
- \param{bool}{ interpolating = TRUE}, \param{wxPoint*}{ offsetAfterRotation = NULL}}
+ \param{bool}{ interpolating = true}, \param{wxPoint*}{ offsetAfterRotation = NULL}}
-Rotates the image about the given point, by {\it angle} radians. Passing TRUE
+Rotates the image about the given point, by {\it angle} radians. Passing true
to {\it interpolating} results in better image quality, but is slower. If the
image has a mask, then the mask colour is used for the uncovered pixels in the
rotated image background. Else, black (rgb 0, 0, 0) will be used.
\membersection{wxImage::Rotate90}\label{wximagerotate90}
-\constfunc{wxImage}{Rotate90}{\param{bool}{ clockwise = TRUE}}
+\constfunc{wxImage}{Rotate90}{\param{bool}{ clockwise = true}}
Returns a copy of the image rotated 90 degrees in the direction
indicated by {\it clockwise}.
\membersection{wxImage::SetMask}\label{wximagesetmask}
-\func{void}{SetMask}{\param{bool}{ hasMask = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetMask}{\param{bool}{ hasMask = true}}
Specifies whether there is a mask or not. The area of the mask is determined by the current mask colour.
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns FALSE if {\it mask} does not have same dimensions as the image or if
-there is no unused colour left. Returns TRUE if the mask was successfully
+Returns false if {\it mask} does not have same dimensions as the image or if
+there is no unused colour left. Returns true if the mask was successfully
applied.
\wxheading{Notes}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE if the images were effectively equal, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the images were effectively equal, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxImage::operator $!=$}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE if the images were unequal, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the images were unequal, false otherwise.
\section{\class{wxImageHandler}}\label{wximagehandler}
\membersection{wxImageHandler::LoadFile}\label{wximagehandlerloadfile}
-\func{bool}{LoadFile}{\param{wxImage* }{image}, \param{wxInputStream\&}{ stream}, \param{bool}{ verbose=TRUE}, \param{int}{ index=0}}
+\func{bool}{LoadFile}{\param{wxImage* }{image}, \param{wxInputStream\&}{ stream}, \param{bool}{ verbose=true}, \param{int}{ index=0}}
Loads a image from a stream, putting the resulting data into {\it image}. If the image file contains
more than one image and the image handler is capable of retrieving these individually, {\it index}
\docparam{stream}{Opened input stream for reading image data.}
-\docparam{verbose}{If set to TRUE, errors reported by the image handler will produce wxLogMessages.}
+\docparam{verbose}{If set to true, errors reported by the image handler will produce wxLogMessages.}
\docparam{index}{The index of the image in the file (starting from zero).}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the operation succeeded, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the operation succeeded, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the operation succeeded, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
Default constructor.
-\func{}{wxImageList}{\param{int }{width}, \param{int }{height}, \param{const bool }{mask = TRUE},\rtfsp
+\func{}{wxImageList}{\param{int }{width}, \param{int }{height}, \param{const bool }{mask = true},\rtfsp
\param{int }{initialCount = 1}}
Constructor specifying the image size, whether image masks should be created, and the initial size of the list.
\docparam{height}{Height of the images in the list.}
-\docparam{mask}{TRUE if masks should be created for all images.}
+\docparam{mask}{true if masks should be created for all images.}
\docparam{initialCount}{The initial size of the list.}
}
\membersection{wxImageList::Create}\label{wximagelistcreate}
-\func{bool}{Create}{\param{int }{width}, \param{int }{height}, \param{const bool }{mask = TRUE},\rtfsp
+\func{bool}{Create}{\param{int }{width}, \param{int }{height}, \param{const bool }{mask = true},\rtfsp
\param{int }{initialCount = 1}}
Initializes the list. See \helpref{wxImageList::wxImageList}{wximagelistconstr} for details.
\func{bool}{Draw}{\param{int}{ index}, \param{wxDC\&}{ dc}, \param{int }{x},\rtfsp
\param{int }{x}, \param{int }{flags = wxIMAGELIST\_DRAW\_NORMAL},\rtfsp
-\param{const bool }{solidBackground = FALSE}}
+\param{const bool }{solidBackground = false}}
Draws a specified image onto a device context.
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the function succeeded, FALSE if it failed (for example, if the image
+true if the function succeeded, false if it failed (for example, if the image
list was not yet initialized).
\membersection{wxImageList::Remove}\label{wximagelistremove}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the replacement was successful, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the replacement was successful, false otherwise.
\wxheading{Remarks}
\constfunc{wxInputStream}{Eof}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the end of stream has been reached.
+Returns true if the end of stream has been reached.
\membersection{wxInputStream::LastRead}\label{wxinputstreamlastread}
\func{bool}{ValidHost}{\param{const wxString\& }{host}}
-Returns TRUE if this is a valid host name, FALSE otherwise. This always
-returns TRUE under MS Windows.
+Returns true if this is a valid host name, false otherwise. This always
+returns true under MS Windows.
Called by the server application to advise the client of a change
in the data associated with the given item. Causes the client
connection's \helpref{wxConnection::OnAdvise}{wxddeconnectiononadvise} member
-to be called. Returns TRUE if successful.
+to be called. Returns true if successful.
\membersection{wxConnection::Execute}\label{wxddeconnectionexecute}
server. Can also be used to transfer arbitrary data to the server
(similar to \helpref{wxConnection::Poke}{wxddeconnectionpoke} in
that respect). Causes the server connection's \helpref{wxConnection::OnExecute}{wxddeconnectiononexecute}
-member to be called. Returns TRUE if successful.
+member to be called. Returns true if successful.
\membersection{wxConnection::Disconnect}
Called by the client or server application to disconnect from the
other program; it causes the \helpref{wxConnection::OnDisconnect}{wxddeconnectionondisconnect}
message to be sent to the corresponding connection object in the
-other program. Returns TRUE if successful or already disconnected.
+other program. Returns true if successful or already disconnected.
The application that calls {\bf Disconnect} must explicitly delete
its side of the connection.
Message sent to the server application by the client, when the client
wishes to start an `advise loop' for the given topic and item. The
-server can refuse to participate by returning FALSE.
+server can refuse to participate by returning false.
\membersection{wxConnection::OnStopAdvise}\label{wxddeconnectiononstopadvise}
Message sent to the server application by the client, when the client
wishes to stop an `advise loop' for the given topic and item. The
-server can refuse to stop the advise loop by returning FALSE, although
+server can refuse to stop the advise loop by returning false, although
this doesn't have much meaning in practice.
\membersection{wxConnection::Poke}\label{wxddeconnectionpoke}
be called. If size is -1 the size is computed from the string
length of data.
-Returns TRUE if successful.
+Returns true if successful.
\membersection{wxConnection::Request}\label{wxddeconnectionrequest}
Called by the client application to ask if an advise loop can be
started with the server. Causes the server connection's
\helpref{wxConnection::OnStartAdvise}{wxddeconnectiononstartadvise}\rtfsp
-member to be called. Returns TRUE if the server okays it, FALSE
+member to be called. Returns true if the server okays it, false
otherwise.
\membersection{wxConnection::StopAdvise}\label{wxddeconnectionstopadvise}
Called by the client application to ask if an advise loop can be
stopped. Causes the server connection's \helpref{wxConnection::OnStopAdvise}{wxddeconnectiononstopadvise}
-member to be called. Returns TRUE if the server okays it, FALSE
+member to be called. Returns true if the server okays it, false
otherwise.
which case an Internet domain socket will be used for the
communications, or a valid file name (which shouldn't exist and
will be deleted afterwards) in which case a Unix domain socket is
-created. FALSE is returned if the call failed (for example, the
+created. false is returned if the call failed (for example, the
port number is already in use).
\membersection{wxServer::OnAcceptConnection}\label{wxddeserveronacceptconnection}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE on success, FALSE if something goes wrong
+Returns true on success, false if something goes wrong
(invalid hostname or invalid IP address).
%
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE on success, FALSE if something goes wrong
+Returns true on success, false if something goes wrong
(invalid service).
%
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE on success, FALSE if something goes wrong
+Returns true on success, false if something goes wrong
(invalid service).
%
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE on success, FALSE if something went wrong.
+Returns true on success, false if something went wrong.
%
% LocalHost
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE on success, FALSE if something went wrong.
+Returns true on success, false if something went wrong.
\constfunc{bool}{ButtonDown}{\param{int}{ button = wxJOY\_BUTTON\_ANY}}
-Returns TRUE if the event was a down event from the specified button (or any button).
+Returns true if the event was a down event from the specified button (or any button).
\wxheading{Parameters}
\constfunc{bool}{ButtonIsDown}{\param{int}{ button = wxJOY\_BUTTON\_ANY}}
-Returns TRUE if the specified button (or any button) was in a down state.
+Returns true if the specified button (or any button) was in a down state.
\wxheading{Parameters}
\constfunc{bool}{ButtonUp}{\param{int}{ button = wxJOY\_BUTTON\_ANY}}
-Returns TRUE if the event was an up event from the specified button (or any button).
+Returns true if the event was an up event from the specified button (or any button).
\wxheading{Parameters}
\constfunc{bool}{IsButton}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if this was a button up or down event ({\it not} 'is any button down?').
+Returns true if this was a button up or down event ({\it not} 'is any button down?').
\membersection{wxJoystickEvent::IsMove}\label{wxjoystickeventismove}
\constfunc{bool}{IsMove}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if this was an x, y move event.
+Returns true if this was an x, y move event.
\membersection{wxJoystickEvent::IsZMove}\label{wxjoystickeventiszmove}
\constfunc{bool}{IsZMove}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if this was a z move event.
+Returns true if this was a z move event.
\constfunc{bool}{HasPOV}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the joystick has a point of view control.
+Returns true if the joystick has a point of view control.
\membersection{wxJoystick::HasPOV4Dir}\label{wxjoystickhaspovfdir}
\constfunc{bool}{HasPOV4Dir}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the joystick point-of-view supports discrete values (centered, forward, backward, left, and right).
+Returns true if the joystick point-of-view supports discrete values (centered, forward, backward, left, and right).
\membersection{wxJoystick::HasPOVCTS}\label{wxjoystickhaspovcts}
\constfunc{bool}{HasPOVCTS}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the joystick point-of-view supports continuous degree bearings.
+Returns true if the joystick point-of-view supports continuous degree bearings.
\membersection{wxJoystick::HasRudder}\label{wxjoystickhasrudder}
\constfunc{bool}{HasRudder}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if there is a rudder attached to the computer.
+Returns true if there is a rudder attached to the computer.
\membersection{wxJoystick::HasU}\label{wxjoystickhasu}
\constfunc{bool}{HasU}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the joystick has a U axis.
+Returns true if the joystick has a U axis.
\membersection{wxJoystick::HasV}\label{wxjoystickhasv}
\constfunc{bool}{HasV}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the joystick has a V axis.
+Returns true if the joystick has a V axis.
\membersection{wxJoystick::HasZ}\label{wxjoystickhasz}
\constfunc{bool}{HasZ}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the joystick has a Z axis.
+Returns true if the joystick has a Z axis.
\membersection{wxJoystick::IsOk}\label{wxjoystickisok}
\constfunc{bool}{IsOk}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the joystick is functioning.
+Returns true if the joystick is functioning.
\membersection{wxJoystick::ReleaseCapture}\label{wxjoystickreleasecapture}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the capture release succeeded.
+true if the capture release succeeded.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the capture succeeded.
+true if the capture succeeded.
\wxheading{See also}
\member{bool}{m\_altDown}
-TRUE if the Alt key is pressed down.
+true if the Alt key is pressed down.
\membersection{wxKeyEvent::m\_controlDown}
\member{bool}{m\_controlDown}
-TRUE if control is pressed down.
+true if control is pressed down.
\membersection{wxKeyEvent::m\_keyCode}
\member{bool}{m\_metaDown}
-TRUE if the Meta key is pressed down.
+true if the Meta key is pressed down.
\membersection{wxKeyEvent::m\_shiftDown}
\member{bool}{m\_shiftDown}
-TRUE if shift is pressed down.
+true if shift is pressed down.
\membersection{wxKeyEvent::m\_x}
\constfunc{bool}{AltDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the Alt key was down at the time of the key event.
+Returns true if the Alt key was down at the time of the key event.
\membersection{wxKeyEvent::ControlDown}
\constfunc{bool}{ControlDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the control key was down at the time of the key event.
+Returns true if the control key was down at the time of the key event.
\membersection{wxKeyEvent::GetKeyCode}
\constfunc{bool}{MetaDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the Meta key was down at the time of the key event.
+Returns true if the Meta key was down at the time of the key event.
\membersection{wxKeyEvent::GetPosition}
\constfunc{bool}{HasModifiers}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if either {\sc Ctrl} or {\sc Alt} keys was down
+Returns true if either {\sc Ctrl} or {\sc Alt} keys was down
at the time of the key event. Note that this function does not take into
account neither {\sc Shift} nor {\sc Meta} key states (the reason for ignoring
the latter is that it is common for {\sc NumLock} key to be configured as
\constfunc{bool}{ShiftDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the shift key was down at the time of the key event.
+Returns true if the shift key was down at the time of the key event.
\func{void}{Clear}{\void}
Clears the list (but does not delete the client data stored with each node
-unless you called DeleteContents({\tt TRUE}), in which case it deletes data).
+unless you called DeleteContents({\tt true}), in which case it deletes data).
\membersection{wxList::DeleteContents}\label{wxlistdeletecontents}
\func{void}{DeleteContents}{\param{bool}{ destroy}}
-If {\it destroy} is {\tt TRUE}, instructs the list to call {\it delete} on the client contents of
-a node whenever the node is destroyed. The default is {\tt FALSE}.
+If {\it destroy} is {\tt true}, instructs the list to call {\it delete} on the client contents of
+a node whenever the node is destroyed. The default is {\tt false}.
\membersection{wxList::DeleteNode}\label{wxlistdeletenode}
\func{bool}{DeleteNode}{\param{wxNode<T> *}{node}}
-Deletes the given node from the list, returning {\tt TRUE} if successful.
+Deletes the given node from the list, returning {\tt true} if successful.
\membersection{wxList::DeleteObject}\label{wxlistdeleteobject}
\func{bool}{DeleteObject}{\param{T *}{object}}
Finds the given client {\it object} and deletes the appropriate node from the list, returning
-{\tt TRUE} if successful. The application must delete the actual object separately.
+{\tt true} if successful. The application must delete the actual object separately.
\membersection{wxList::Find}\label{wxlistfind}
\constfunc{bool}{IsEmpty}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the list is empty, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+Returns {\tt true} if the list is empty, {\tt false} otherwise.
% Use different label name to avoid clashing with wxListItem label
\membersection{wxList::Item}\label{wxlistitemfunc}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the given item is selected, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the given item is selected, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxListBox::Set}\label{wxlistboxset}
\membersection{wxListCtrl::FindItem}\label{wxlistctrlfinditem}
-\func{long}{FindItem}{\param{long }{start}, \param{const wxString\& }{str}, \param{const bool }{partial = FALSE}}
+\func{long}{FindItem}{\param{long }{start}, \param{const wxString\& }{str}, \param{const bool }{partial = false}}
Find an item whose label matches this string, starting from the item after {\it start} or
the beginning if {\it start} is -1.
\pythonnote{In place of a single overloaded method name, wxPython
implements the following methods:\par
\indented{2cm}{\begin{twocollist}
-\twocolitem{{\bf FindItem(start, str, partial=FALSE)}}{}
+\twocolitem{{\bf FindItem(start, str, partial=false)}}{}
\twocolitem{{\bf FindItemData(start, data)}}{}
\twocolitem{{\bf FindItemAtPos(start, point, direction)}}{}
\end{twocollist}}
\perlnote{In wxPerl there are three methods instead of a single overloaded
method:\par
\indented{2cm}{\begin{twocollist}
-\twocolitem{{\bf FindItem( start, str, partial = FALSE ) }}{}
+\twocolitem{{\bf FindItem( start, str, partial = false ) }}{}
\twocolitem{{\bf FindItemData( start, data ) }}{}
\twocolitem{{\bf FindItemAtPos( start, point, direction )}}{}
\end{twocollist}
\constfunc{int}{GetItemSpacing}{\param{bool }{isSmall}}
Retrieves the spacing between icons in pixels.
-If {\it small} is TRUE, gets the spacing for the small icon
+If {\it small} is true, gets the spacing for the small icon
view, otherwise the large icon view.
\membersection{wxListCtrl::GetItemState}\label{wxlistctrlgetitemstate}
\membersection{wxListCtrl::SetSingleStyle}\label{wxlistctrlsetsinglestyle}
-\func{void}{SetSingleStyle}{\param{long }{style}, \param{const bool }{add = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetSingleStyle}{\param{long }{style}, \param{const bool }{add = true}}
Adds or removes a single window style.
\constfunc{bool}{Cancelled}{\void}
-TRUE if this event is an end edit event and the user cancelled the edit.
+true if this event is an end edit event and the user cancelled the edit.
\membersection{wxListEvent::GetPoint}\label{wxlisteventgetpoint}
\func{bool}{IsSelected}{\param{long }{index}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the item with the given {\it index} is selected,
-{\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+Returns {\tt true} if the item with the given {\it index} is selected,
+{\tt false} otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\membersection{wxListView::Select}\label{wxlistviewselect}
-\func{void}{Select}{long n, \param{bool }{on = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{Select}{long n, \param{bool }{on = true}}
Selects or unselects the given item.
\docparam{n}{the item to select or unselect}
-\docparam{on}{if {\tt TRUE} (default), selects the item, otherwise unselects it}
+\docparam{on}{if {\tt true} (default), selects the item, otherwise unselects it}
\wxheading{See also}
See \helpref{Init()}{wxlocaleinit} for parameters description.
-\func{}{wxLocale}{\param{const char }{*szName}, \param{const char }{*szShort = NULL}, \param{const char }{*szLocale = NULL}, \param{bool }{bLoadDefault = TRUE}, \param{bool }{bConvertEncoding = FALSE}}
+\func{}{wxLocale}{\param{const char }{*szName}, \param{const char }{*szShort = NULL}, \param{const char }{*szLocale = NULL}, \param{bool }{bLoadDefault = true}, \param{bool }{bConvertEncoding = false}}
See \helpref{Init()}{wxlocaleinit} for parameters description.
All loaded catalogs will be used for message lookup by GetString() for the
current locale.
-Returns TRUE if catalog was successfully loaded, FALSE otherwise (which might
+Returns true if catalog was successfully loaded, false otherwise (which might
mean that the catalog is not found or that it isn't in the correct format).
\membersection{wxLocale::AddCatalogLookupPathPrefix}\label{wxlocaleaddcataloglookuppathprefix}
\func{bool}{Init}{\param{int }{language = wxLANGUAGE\_DEFAULT}, \param{int }{flags =
wxLOCALE\_LOAD\_DEFAULT | wxLOCALE\_CONV\_ENCODING}}
-\func{bool}{Init}{\param{const char }{*szName}, \param{const char }{*szShort = NULL}, \param{const char }{*szLocale = NULL}, \param{bool }{bLoadDefault = TRUE}, \param{bool }{bConvertEncoding = FALSE}}
+\func{bool}{Init}{\param{const char }{*szName}, \param{const char }{*szShort = NULL}, \param{const char }{*szLocale = NULL}, \param{bool }{bLoadDefault = true}, \param{bool }{bConvertEncoding = false}}
The second form is deprecated, use the first one unless you know what you are
doing.
\docparam{szLocale}{The parameter for the call to setlocale(). Note that it is
platform-specific.}
-\docparam{bLoadDefault}{May be set to FALSE to prevent loading of the message catalog
+\docparam{bLoadDefault}{May be set to false to prevent loading of the message catalog
for the given locale containing the translations of standard wxWindows messages.
This parameter would be rarely used in normal circumstances.}
-\docparam{bConvertEncoding}{May be set to TRUE to do automatic conversion of message
+\docparam{bConvertEncoding}{May be set to true to do automatic conversion of message
catalogs to platform's native encoding. Note that it will do only basic
conversion between well-known pair like iso8859-1 and windows-1252 or
iso8859-2 and windows-1250.
application and so all subsequent calls to wxGetTranslation() will try to
translate the messages using the message catalogs for this locale.
-Returns TRUE on success or FALSE if the given locale couldn't be set.
+Returns true on success or false if the given locale couldn't be set.
\membersection{wxLocale::IsLoaded}\label{wxlocaleisloaded}
\constfunc{bool}{IsLoaded}{\param{const char* }{domain}}
-Check if the given catalog is loaded, and returns TRUE if it is.
+Check if the given catalog is loaded, and returns true if it is.
According to GNU gettext tradition, each catalog
normally corresponds to 'domain' which is more or less the application name.
\constfunc{bool}{IsOk}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the locale could be set successfully.
+Returns true if the locale could be set successfully.
\membersection{wxLog::SetVerbose}\label{wxlogsetverbose}
-\func{static void}{SetVerbose}{\param{bool }{ verbose = TRUE}}
+\func{static void}{SetVerbose}{\param{bool }{ verbose = true}}
Activates or deactivates verbose mode in which the verbose messages are
logged as the normal ones instead of being silently dropped.
\func{static bool}{IsAllowedTraceMask}{\param{const wxChar *}{mask}}
-Returns TRUE if the {\it mask} is one of allowed masks for
+Returns true if the {\it mask} is one of allowed masks for
\helpref{wxLogTrace}{wxlogtrace}.
See also: \helpref{AddTraceMask}{wxlogaddtracemask},
\constfunc{bool}{IsPassingMessages}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the messages are passed to the previously active log
-target (default) or {\tt FALSE} if \helpref{PassMessages}{wxlogchainpassmessages}
+Returns {\tt true} if the messages are passed to the previously active log
+target (default) or {\tt false} if \helpref{PassMessages}{wxlogchainpassmessages}
had been called.
\membersection{wxLogChain::PassMessages}\label{wxlogchainpassmessages}
\func{void}{PassMessages}{\param{bool }{passMessages}}
By default, the log messages are passed to the previously active log target.
-Calling this function with {\tt FALSE} parameter disables this behaviour
+Calling this function with {\tt false} parameter disables this behaviour
(presumably temporarily, as you shouldn't use wxLogChain at all otherwise) and
it can be reenabled by calling it again with {\it passMessages} set to {\tt
-TRUE}.
+true}.
\membersection{wxLogChain::SetLog}\label{wxlogchainsetlog}
\membersection{wxLogWindow::wxLogWindow}
-\func{}{wxLogWindow}{\param{wxFrame }{*parent}, \param{const wxChar }{*title}, \param{bool }{show = {\tt TRUE}}, \param{bool }{passToOld = {\tt TRUE}}}
+\func{}{wxLogWindow}{\param{wxFrame }{*parent}, \param{const wxChar }{*title}, \param{bool }{show = {\tt true}}, \param{bool }{passToOld = {\tt true}}}
Creates the log frame window and starts collecting the messages in it.
\docparam{title}{The title for the log frame}
-\docparam{show}{{\tt TRUE} to show the frame initially (default), otherwise
+\docparam{show}{{\tt true} to show the frame initially (default), otherwise
\helpref{wxLogWindow::Show}{wxlogwindowshow} must be called later.}
-\docparam{passToOld}{{\tt TRUE} to process the log messages normally in addition to
-logging them in the log frame (default), {\tt FALSE} to only log them in the
+\docparam{passToOld}{{\tt true} to process the log messages normally in addition to
+logging them in the log frame (default), {\tt false} to only log them in the
log frame.}
\membersection{wxLogWindow::Show}\label{wxlogwindowshow}
-\func{void}{Show}{\param{bool }{show = {\tt TRUE}}}
+\func{void}{Show}{\param{bool }{show = {\tt true}}}
Shows or hides the frame.
called if it is destroyed for another reason (such as when program
exits).
-Return {\tt TRUE} from here to allow the frame to close, {\tt FALSE} to
+Return {\tt true} from here to allow the frame to close, {\tt false} to
prevent this from happening.
\wxheading{See also}
\pythonnote{In place of a single overloaded method name, wxPython
implements the following methods:\par
\indented{2cm}{\begin{twocollist}
-\twocolitem{{\bf Append(id, string, helpStr="", checkable=FALSE)}}{}
+\twocolitem{{\bf Append(id, string, helpStr="", checkable=false)}}{}
\twocolitem{{\bf AppendMenu(id, string, aMenu, helpStr="")}}{}
\twocolitem{{\bf AppendItem(aMenuItem)}}{}
\end{twocollist}}
\docparam{id}{The menu item identifier.}
-\docparam{check}{If TRUE, the item will be checked, otherwise it will be unchecked.}
+\docparam{check}{If true, the item will be checked, otherwise it will be unchecked.}
\wxheading{See also}
\docparam{id}{The menu item identifier.}
-\docparam{enable}{TRUE to enable the menu item, FALSE to disable it.}
+\docparam{enable}{true to enable the menu item, false to disable it.}
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the menu item is checked, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the menu item is checked, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the menu item is enabled, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the menu item is enabled, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE on success, FALSE if an error occurred.
+true on success, false if an error occurred.
\wxheading{See also}
\docparam{id}{The menu item identifier.}
-\docparam{check}{If TRUE, checks the menu item, otherwise the item is unchecked.}
+\docparam{check}{If true, checks the menu item, otherwise the item is unchecked.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\docparam{id}{The menu item identifier.}
-\docparam{enable}{TRUE to enable the item, FALSE to disable it.}
+\docparam{enable}{true to enable the item, false to disable it.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\docparam{pos}{The position of the menu, starting from zero.}
-\docparam{enable}{TRUE to enable the menu, FALSE to disable it.}
+\docparam{enable}{true to enable the menu, false to disable it.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE on success, FALSE if an error occurred.
+true on success, false if an error occurred.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the item was found and is checked, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the item was found and is checked, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxMenuBar::IsEnabled}\label{wxmenubarisenabled}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the item was found and is enabled, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the item was found and is enabled, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxMenuBar::Refresh}\label{wxmenubarrefresh}
\constfunc{bool}{IsPopup}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the menu which is being opened or closed is a popup menu,
-{\tt FALSE} if it is a normal one.
+Returns {\tt true} if the menu which is being opened or closed is a popup menu,
+{\tt false} if it is a normal one.
This method should be only used with the {\tt OPEN} and {\tt CLOSE} events.
\membersection{wxMenuItem::GetBitmap}\label{wxmenuitemgetbitmap}
-\constfunc{wxBitmap\&}{GetBitmap}{\param{bool}{ checked = TRUE}}
+\constfunc{wxBitmap\&}{GetBitmap}{\param{bool}{ checked = true}}
Returns the checked or unchecked bitmap (Windows only).
\constfunc{bool}{IsCheckable}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the item is checkable.
+Returns true if the item is checkable.
\membersection{wxMenuItem::IsChecked}\label{wxmenuitemischecked}
\constfunc{bool}{IsChecked}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the item is checked.
+Returns true if the item is checked.
\membersection{wxMenuItem::IsEnabled}\label{wxmenuitemisenabled}
\constfunc{bool}{IsEnabled}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the item is enabled.
+Returns true if the item is enabled.
\membersection{wxMenuItem::IsSeparator}\label{wxmenuitemisseparator}
\constfunc{bool}{IsSeparator}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the item is a separator.
+Returns true if the item is a separator.
\membersection{wxMenuItem::SetBackgroundColour}\label{wxmenuitemsetbackgroundcolour}
\func{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the metafile is valid.
+Returns true if the metafile is valid.
\membersection{wxMetafile::Play}\label{wxmetafileplay}
\func{bool}{Play}{\param{wxDC *}{dc}}
Plays the metafile into the given device context, returning
-TRUE if successful.
+true if successful.
\membersection{wxMetafile::SetClipboard}
wxMetafileDC dc;
if (dc.Ok())
{
- Draw(dc, FALSE);
+ Draw(dc, false);
wxMetafile *mf = dc.Close();
if (mf)
{
\func{bool}{IsOfType}{\param{const wxString\&}{ mimeType}, \param{const wxString\&}{ wildcard}}
-This function returns TRUE if either the given {\it mimeType} is exactly the
+This function returns true if either the given {\it mimeType} is exactly the
same as {\it wildcard} or if it has the same category and the subtype of
{\it wildcard} is '*'. Note that the '*' wildcard is not allowed in
{\it mimeType} itself.
\membersection{wxMimeTypesManager::ReadMailcap}\label{wxmimetypesmanagerreadmailcap}
-\func{bool}{ReadMailcap}{\param{const wxString\&}{ filename}, \param{bool}{ fallback = FALSE}}
+\func{bool}{ReadMailcap}{\param{const wxString\&}{ filename}, \param{bool}{ fallback = false}}
Load additional file containing information about MIME types and associated
information in mailcap format. See metamail(1) and mailcap(5) for more
overriding the settings found in the standard files: normally, entries from
files loaded with ReadMailcap will override the entries from files loaded
previously (and the standard ones are loaded in the very beginning), but this
-will not happen if this parameter is set to TRUE (default is FALSE).
+will not happen if this parameter is set to true (default is false).
-The return value is TRUE if there were no errors in the file or FALSE
+The return value is true if there were no errors in the file or false
otherwise.
\membersection{wxMimeTypesManager::ReadMimeTypes}\label{wxmimetypesmanagerreadmimetypes}
information in mime.types file format. See metamail(1) and mailcap(5) for more
information.
-The return value is TRUE if there were no errors in the file or FALSE
+The return value is true if there were no errors in the file or false
otherwise.
DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxDDEModule)
public:
wxDDEModule() {}
- bool OnInit() { wxDDEInitialize(); return TRUE; };
+ bool OnInit() { wxDDEInitialize(); return true; };
void OnExit() { wxDDECleanUp(); };
};
\func{virtual bool}{OnInit}{\void}
Provide this function with appropriate initialization for your module. If the function
-returns FALSE, wxWindows will exit immediately.
+returns false, wxWindows will exit immediately.
\membersection{wxModule::RegisterModule}\label{wxmoduleregistermodule}
{\bf NB:} Note the difference between methods like
\helpref{LeftDown}{wxmouseeventleftdown} and
-\helpref{LeftIsDown}{wxmouseeventleftisdown}: the former returns {\tt TRUE}
+\helpref{LeftIsDown}{wxmouseeventleftisdown}: the former returns {\tt true}
when the event corresponds to the left mouse button click while the latter
-returns {\tt TRUE} if the left mouse button is currently being pressed. For
+returns {\tt true} if the left mouse button is currently being pressed. For
example, when the user is dragging the mouse you can use
\helpref{LeftIsDown}{wxmouseeventleftisdown} to test
whether the left mouse button is (still) depressed. Also, by convention, if
-\helpref{LeftDown}{wxmouseeventleftdown} returns {\tt TRUE},
-\helpref{LeftIsDown}{wxmouseeventleftisdown} will also return {\tt TRUE} in
+\helpref{LeftDown}{wxmouseeventleftdown} returns {\tt true},
+\helpref{LeftIsDown}{wxmouseeventleftisdown} will also return {\tt true} in
wxWindows whatever the underlying GUI behaviour is (which is
platform-dependent). The same applies, of course, to other mouse buttons as
well.
\member{bool}{m\_altDown}
-TRUE if the Alt key is pressed down.
+true if the Alt key is pressed down.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::m\_controlDown}
\member{bool}{m\_controlDown}
-TRUE if control key is pressed down.
+true if control key is pressed down.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::m\_leftDown}
\member{bool}{m\_leftDown}
-TRUE if the left mouse button is currently pressed down.
+true if the left mouse button is currently pressed down.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::m\_middleDown}
\member{bool}{m\_middleDown}
-TRUE if the middle mouse button is currently pressed down.
+true if the middle mouse button is currently pressed down.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::m\_rightDown}
\member{bool}{m\_rightDown}
-TRUE if the right mouse button is currently pressed down.
+true if the right mouse button is currently pressed down.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::m\_metaDown}
\member{bool}{m\_metaDown}
-TRUE if the Meta key is pressed down.
+true if the Meta key is pressed down.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::m\_shiftDown}
\member{bool}{m\_shiftDown}
-TRUE if shift is pressed down.
+true if shift is pressed down.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::m\_x}
\func{bool}{AltDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the Alt key was down at the time of the event.
+Returns true if the Alt key was down at the time of the event.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::Button}
\func{bool}{Button}{\param{int}{ button}}
-Returns TRUE if the identified mouse button is changing state. Valid
+Returns true if the identified mouse button is changing state. Valid
values of {\it button} are 1, 2 or 3 for left, middle and right
buttons respectively.
\func{bool}{ButtonDClick}{\param{int}{ but = -1}}
-If the argument is omitted, this returns TRUE if the event was a mouse
+If the argument is omitted, this returns true if the event was a mouse
double click event. Otherwise the argument specifies which double click event
was generated (1, 2 or 3 for left, middle and right buttons respectively).
\func{bool}{ButtonDown}{\param{int}{ but = -1}}
-If the argument is omitted, this returns TRUE if the event was a mouse
+If the argument is omitted, this returns true if the event was a mouse
button down event. Otherwise the argument specifies which button-down event
was generated (1, 2 or 3 for left, middle and right buttons respectively).
\func{bool}{ButtonUp}{\param{int}{ but = -1}}
-If the argument is omitted, this returns TRUE if the event was a mouse
+If the argument is omitted, this returns true if the event was a mouse
button up event. Otherwise the argument specifies which button-up event
was generated (1, 2 or 3 for left, middle and right buttons respectively).
\func{bool}{ControlDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the control key was down at the time of the event.
+Returns true if the control key was down at the time of the event.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::Dragging}
\func{bool}{Dragging}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if this was a dragging event (motion while a button is depressed).
+Returns true if this was a dragging event (motion while a button is depressed).
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::Entering}\label{wxmouseevententering}
\func{bool}{Entering}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the mouse was entering the window.
+Returns true if the mouse was entering the window.
See also \helpref{wxMouseEvent::Leaving}{wxmouseeventleaving}.
\constfunc{bool}{IsButton}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the event was a mouse button event (not necessarily a button down event -
+Returns true if the event was a mouse button event (not necessarily a button down event -
that may be tested using {\it ButtonDown}).
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::IsPageScroll}
\constfunc{bool}{IsPageScroll}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the system has been setup to do page scrolling with
+Returns true if the system has been setup to do page scrolling with
the mouse wheel instead of line scrolling.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::Leaving}\label{wxmouseeventleaving}
\constfunc{bool}{Leaving}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the mouse was leaving the window.
+Returns true if the mouse was leaving the window.
See also \helpref{wxMouseEvent::Entering}{wxmouseevententering}.
\constfunc{bool}{LeftDClick}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the event was a left double click.
+Returns true if the event was a left double click.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::LeftDown}\label{wxmouseeventleftdown}
\constfunc{bool}{LeftDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the left mouse button changed to down.
+Returns true if the left mouse button changed to down.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::LeftIsDown}\label{wxmouseeventleftisdown}
\constfunc{bool}{LeftIsDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the left mouse button is currently down, independent
+Returns true if the left mouse button is currently down, independent
of the current event type.
Please notice that it is {\bf not} the same as
-\helpref{LeftDown}{wxmouseeventleftdown} which returns TRUE if the left mouse
+\helpref{LeftDown}{wxmouseeventleftdown} which returns true if the left mouse
button was just pressed. Rather, it describes the state of the mouse button
before the event happened.
\constfunc{bool}{LeftUp}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the left mouse button changed to up.
+Returns true if the left mouse button changed to up.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::MetaDown}
\constfunc{bool}{MetaDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the Meta key was down at the time of the event.
+Returns true if the Meta key was down at the time of the event.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::MiddleDClick}
\constfunc{bool}{MiddleDClick}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the event was a middle double click.
+Returns true if the event was a middle double click.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::MiddleDown}
\constfunc{bool}{MiddleDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the middle mouse button changed to down.
+Returns true if the middle mouse button changed to down.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::MiddleIsDown}\label{wxmouseeventmiddleisdown}
\constfunc{bool}{MiddleIsDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the middle mouse button is currently down, independent
+Returns true if the middle mouse button is currently down, independent
of the current event type.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::MiddleUp}
\constfunc{bool}{MiddleUp}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the middle mouse button changed to up.
+Returns true if the middle mouse button changed to up.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::Moving}
\constfunc{bool}{Moving}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if this was a motion event (no buttons depressed).
+Returns true if this was a motion event (no buttons depressed).
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::RightDClick}
\constfunc{bool}{RightDClick}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the event was a right double click.
+Returns true if the event was a right double click.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::RightDown}
\constfunc{bool}{RightDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the right mouse button changed to down.
+Returns true if the right mouse button changed to down.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::RightIsDown}\label{wxmouseeventrightisdown}
\constfunc{bool}{RightIsDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the right mouse button is currently down, independent
+Returns true if the right mouse button is currently down, independent
of the current event type.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::RightUp}
\constfunc{bool}{RightUp}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the right mouse button changed to up.
+Returns true if the right mouse button changed to up.
\membersection{wxMouseEvent::ShiftDown}
\constfunc{bool}{ShiftDown}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the shift key was down at the time of the event.
+Returns true if the shift key was down at the time of the event.
s_mutexProtectingTheGlobalList->Unlock();
}
- // return TRUE the given number is greater than all array elements
+ // return true the given number is greater than all array elements
bool MyThread::IsGreater(int num)
{
// before using the list we must acquire the mutex
for ( size_t n = 0; n < count; n++ )
{
if ( s_data[n] > num )
- return FALSE;
+ return false;
}
- return TRUE;
+ return true;
}
\end{verbatim}
}
Notice how wxMutexLocker was used in the second function to ensure that the
-mutex is unlocked in any case: whether the function returns TRUE or FALSE
+mutex is unlocked in any case: whether the function returns true or false
(because the destructor of the local object {\it lock} is always called). Using
this class instead of directly using wxMutex is, in general safer and is even
more so if your program uses C++ exceptions.
\constfunc{bool}{IsOk}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if mutex was acquired in the constructor, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if mutex was acquired in the constructor, false otherwise.
\func{bool}{AddPage}{\param{wxNotebookPage*}{ page},
\param{const wxString\&}{ text},
- \param{bool}{ select = FALSE},
+ \param{bool}{ select = false},
\param{int}{ imageId = -1}}
Adds a new page.
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if successful, FALSE otherwise.
+true if successful, false otherwise.
\wxheading{Remarks}
\membersection{wxNotebook::AdvanceSelection}\label{wxnotebookadvanceselection}
-\func{void}{AdvanceSelection}{\param{bool}{ forward = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{AdvanceSelection}{\param{bool}{ forward = true}}
Cycles through the tabs.
\func{bool}{InsertPage}{\param{int}{ index}, \param{wxNotebookPage*}{ page},
\param{const wxString\&}{ text},
- \param{bool}{ select = FALSE},
+ \param{bool}{ select = false},
\param{int}{ imageId = -1}}
Inserts a new page at the specified position.
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if successful, FALSE otherwise.
+true if successful, false otherwise.
\wxheading{Remarks}
\constfunc{bool}{IsAllowed}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the change is allowed (\helpref{Veto()}{wxnotifyeventveto}
-hasn't been called) or FALSE otherwise (if it was).
+Returns true if the change is allowed (\helpref{Veto()}{wxnotifyeventveto}
+hasn't been called) or false otherwise (if it was).
\membersection{wxNotifyEvent::Veto}\label{wxnotifyeventveto}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the class represented by {\it info} is the same class as
+true if the class represented by {\it info} is the same class as
this one or is derived from it.
\wxheading{Example}
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the print data associated with the dialog data is valid.
-This can return FALSE on Windows if the current printer is not set, for example.
-On all other platforms, it returns TRUE.
+Returns true if the print data associated with the dialog data is valid.
+This can return false on Windows if the current printer is not set, for example.
+On all other platforms, it returns true.
\membersection{wxPageSetupDialog::ShowModal}\label{wxpagesetupdialogshowmodal}
\constfunc{bool}{GetDefaultMinMargins}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the page setup dialog will take its minimum margin values from the currently
+Returns true if the page setup dialog will take its minimum margin values from the currently
selected printer properties. Windows only.
\membersection{wxPageSetupDialogData::GetEnableMargins}\label{wxpagesetupdialogdatagetenablemargins}
\constfunc{bool}{GetEnableMargins}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the margin controls are enabled (Windows only).
+Returns true if the margin controls are enabled (Windows only).
\membersection{wxPageSetupDialogData::GetEnableOrientation}\label{wxpagesetupdialogdatagetenableorientation}
\constfunc{bool}{GetEnableOrientation}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the orientation control is enabled (Windows only).
+Returns true if the orientation control is enabled (Windows only).
\membersection{wxPageSetupDialogData::GetEnablePaper}\label{wxpagesetupdialogdatagetenablepaper}
\constfunc{bool}{GetEnablePaper}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the paper size control is enabled (Windows only).
+Returns true if the paper size control is enabled (Windows only).
\membersection{wxPageSetupDialogData::GetEnablePrinter}\label{wxpagesetupdialogdatagetenableprinter}
\constfunc{bool}{GetEnablePrinter}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the printer setup button is enabled.
+Returns true if the printer setup button is enabled.
\membersection{wxPageSetupDialogData::GetEnableHelp}\label{wxpagesetupdialogdatagetenablehelp}
\constfunc{bool}{GetEnableHelp}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the printer setup button is enabled.
+Returns true if the printer setup button is enabled.
\membersection{wxPageSetupDialogData::GetDefaultInfo}\label{wxpagesetupdialogdatagetdefaultinfo}
\constfunc{bool}{GetDefaultInfo}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the dialog will simply return default printer information (such as orientation)
+Returns true if the dialog will simply return default printer information (such as orientation)
instead of showing a dialog. Windows only.
\membersection{wxPageSetupDialogData::GetMarginTopLeft}\label{wxpagesetupdialogdatagetmargintopleft}
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the print data associated with the dialog data is valid.
-This can return FALSE on Windows if the current printer is not set, for example.
-On all other platforms, it returns TRUE.
+Returns true if the print data associated with the dialog data is valid.
+This can return false on Windows if the current printer is not set, for example.
+On all other platforms, it returns true.
\membersection{wxPageSetupDialogData::SetDefaultInfo}\label{wxpagesetupdialogdatasetdefaultinfo}
\func{void}{SetDefaultInfo}{\param{bool}{ flag}}
-Pass TRUE if the dialog will simply return default printer information (such as orientation)
+Pass true if the dialog will simply return default printer information (such as orientation)
instead of showing a dialog. Windows only.
\membersection{wxPageSetupDialogData::SetDefaultMinMargins}\label{wxpagesetupdialogdatasetdefaultminmargins}
\func{void}{SetDefaultMinMargins}{\param{bool}{ flag}}
-Pass TRUE if the page setup dialog will take its minimum margin values from the currently
+Pass true if the page setup dialog will take its minimum margin values from the currently
selected printer properties. Windows only. Units are in millimetres
\membersection{wxPageSetupDialogData::SetMarginTopLeft}\label{wxpagesetupdialogdatasetmargintopleft}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the creation was successful, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the creation was successful, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the operation was successful.
+true if the operation was successful.
\wxheading{See also}
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if palette data is present.
+Returns true if palette data is present.
\membersection{wxPalette::operator $=$}\label{wxpaletteassignment}
\func{void}{\destruct{wxPanelTabView}}{\void}
Destructor. This destructor deletes all the panels associated with the view.
-If you do not wish this to happen, call ClearWindows with argument FALSE before the
+If you do not wish this to happen, call ClearWindows with argument false before the
view is likely to be destroyed. This will clear the list of windows, without deleting them.
\membersection{wxPanelTabView::AddTabWindow}\label{wxpaneltabviewaddtabwindow}
\membersection{wxPanelTabView::ClearWindows}
-\func{void}{ClearWindows}{\param{bool}{ deleteWindows = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{ClearWindows}{\param{bool}{ deleteWindows = true}}
-Removes the child windows from the view. If {\it deleteWindows} is TRUE, the windows will be deleted.
+Removes the child windows from the view. If {\it deleteWindows} is true, the windows will be deleted.
\membersection{wxPanelTabView::GetCurrentWindow}
\func{bool}{Member}{\param{const wxString\& }{file}}
-TRUE if the path is in the path list (ignoring case).
+true if the path is in the path list (ignoring case).
\func{}{wxPen}{\void}
Default constructor. The pen will be uninitialised, and \helpref{wxPen::Ok}{wxpenok} will
-return FALSE.
+return false.
\func{}{wxPen}{\param{const wxColour\&}{ colour}, \param{int}{ width}, \param{int}{ style}}
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the pen is initialised.
+Returns true if the pen is initialised.
\membersection{wxPen::SetCap}\label{wxpensetcap}
\membersection{wxPlotWindow::SetScrollOnThumbRelease}\label{wxplotwindowsetscrollonthumbrelease}
-\func{void}{SetScrollOnThumbRelease}{\param{bool}{ onrelease = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetScrollOnThumbRelease}{\param{bool}{ onrelease = true}}
This function controls if the plot area will get scrolled only if the scrollbar thumb
has been release or also if the thumb is being dragged. When displaying large amounts
\membersection{wxPlotWindow::SetEnlargeAroundWindowCentre}\label{wxplotwindowsetenlargearoundwindowcentre}
-\func{void}{SetEnlargeAroundWindowCentre}{\param{bool}{ aroundwindow = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetEnlargeAroundWindowCentre}{\param{bool}{ aroundwindow = true}}
Depending on the kind of data you display, enlarging the individual curves might
have different desired effects. Sometimes, the data will be supposed to get enlarged
control may tell the dialog that it caused the dismissal of a dialog, by
calling {\bf wxDialog::EndModal} or {\bf wxWindow::SetReturnCode}. Using this
information, {\bf ShowModal} now returns the id of the control that caused dismissal,
-giving greater feedback to the application than just TRUE or FALSE.
+giving greater feedback to the application than just true or false.
If you overrode or called {\bf wxDialog::Show}, use {\bf ShowModal} and test for a returned identifier,
commonly wxID\_OK or wxID\_CANCEL.
Constructs a PostScript printer device context from a \helpref{wxPrintData}{wxprintdata} object.
-\func{}{wxPostScriptDC}{\param{const wxString\& }{output}, \param{bool }{interactive = TRUE},\\
+\func{}{wxPostScriptDC}{\param{const wxString\& }{output}, \param{bool }{interactive = true},\\
\param{wxWindow *}{parent}}
Constructor. {\it output} is an optional file for printing to, and if
-\rtfsp{\it interactive} is TRUE a dialog box will be displayed for adjusting
+\rtfsp{\it interactive} is true a dialog box will be displayed for adjusting
various parameters. {\it parent} is the parent of the printer dialog box.
Use the {\it Ok} member to test whether the constructor was successful
\func{void}{Initialize}{\void}
Creates the preview canvas and control bar, and calls
-wxWindow::MakeModal(TRUE) to disable other top-level windows
+wxWindow::MakeModal(true) to disable other top-level windows
in the application.
This function should be called by the application prior to
\constfunc{bool}{GetCollate}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if collation is on.
+Returns true if collation is on.
\membersection{wxPrintData::GetColour}\label{wxprintdatagetcolour}
\constfunc{bool}{GetColour}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if colour printing is on.
+Returns true if colour printing is on.
\membersection{wxPrintData::GetDuplex}\label{wxprintdatagetduplex}
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the print data is valid for using in print dialogs.
-This can return FALSE on Windows if the current printer is not set, for example.
-On all other platforms, it returns TRUE.
+Returns true if the print data is valid for using in print dialogs.
+This can return false on Windows if the current printer is not set, for example.
+On all other platforms, it returns true.
\membersection{wxPrintData::SetCollate}\label{wxprintdatasetcollate}
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the print data associated with the dialog is valid.
-This can return FALSE on Windows if the current printer is not set, for example.
-On all other platforms, it returns TRUE.
+Returns true if the print data associated with the dialog is valid.
+This can return false on Windows if the current printer is not set, for example.
+On all other platforms, it returns true.
\membersection{wxPrintDialog::ShowModal}\label{wxprintdialogshowmodal}
\constfunc{bool}{GetAllPages}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the user requested that all pages be printed.
+Returns true if the user requested that all pages be printed.
\membersection{wxPrintDialogData::GetCollate}\label{wxprintdialogdatagetcollate}
\constfunc{bool}{GetCollate}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the user requested that the document(s) be collated.
+Returns true if the user requested that the document(s) be collated.
\membersection{wxPrintDialogData::GetFromPage}\label{wxprintdialogdatagetfrompage}
\constfunc{bool}{GetPrintToFile}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the user has selected printing to a file.
+Returns true if the user has selected printing to a file.
\membersection{wxPrintDialogData::GetSelection}\label{wxprintdialogdatagetselection}
\constfunc{bool}{GetSelection}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the user requested that the selection be printed (where 'selection' is
+Returns true if the user requested that the selection be printed (where 'selection' is
a concept specific to the application).
\membersection{wxPrintDialogData::GetToPage}\label{wxprintdialogdatagettopage}
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the print data is valid for using in print dialogs.
-This can return FALSE on Windows if the current printer is not set, for example.
-On all other platforms, it returns TRUE.
+Returns true if the print data is valid for using in print dialogs.
+This can return false on Windows if the current printer is not set, for example.
+On all other platforms, it returns true.
\membersection{wxPrintDialogData::SetCollate}\label{wxprintdialogdatasetcollate}
\func{void}{SetCollate}{\param{bool }{flag}}
-Sets the 'Collate' checkbox to TRUE or FALSE.
+Sets the 'Collate' checkbox to true or false.
\membersection{wxPrintDialogData::SetFromPage}\label{wxprintdialogdatasetfrompage}
\func{void}{SetPrintToFile}{\param{bool }{flag}}
-Sets the 'Print to file' checkbox to TRUE or FALSE.
+Sets the 'Print to file' checkbox to true or false.
\membersection{wxPrintDialogData::SetSelection}\label{wxprintdialogdatasetselection}
\func{void}{SetSetupDialog}{\param{bool }{flag}}
Determines whether the dialog to be shown will be the Print dialog
-(pass FALSE) or Print Setup dialog (pass TRUE).
+(pass false) or Print Setup dialog (pass true).
Note that the setup dialog is (according to Microsoft) obsolete from
Windows 95, though retained for backward compatibility.
\func{bool}{Abort}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the user has aborted the print job.
+Returns true if the user has aborted the print job.
\membersection{wxPrinter::CreateAbortWindow}\label{wxprintercreateabortwindow}
\membersection{wxPrinter::Print}\label{wxprinterprint}
-\func{bool}{Print}{\param{wxWindow *}{parent}, \param{wxPrintout *}{printout}, \param{bool }{prompt=TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{Print}{\param{wxWindow *}{parent}, \param{wxPrintout *}{printout}, \param{bool }{prompt=true}}
Starts the printing process. Provide a parent window, a user-defined wxPrintout object which controls
the printing of a document, and whether the print dialog should be invoked first.
-Print could return FALSE if there was a problem initializing the printer device context
+Print could return false if there was a problem initializing the printer device context
(current printer not set, for example) or the user cancelled printing. Call
\helpref{wxPrinter::GetLastError}{wxprintergetlasterror} to get detailed
information about the kind of the error.
is the recommended way to construct a wxPrinterDC.
\func{}{wxPrinterDC}{\param{const wxString\& }{driver}, \param{const wxString\& }{device}, \param{const wxString\& }{output},
- \param{const bool }{interactive = TRUE}, \param{int }{orientation = wxPORTRAIT}}
+ \param{const bool }{interactive = true}, \param{int }{orientation = wxPORTRAIT}}
Constructor. With empty strings for the first three arguments, the default printer dialog is
displayed. {\it device} indicates the type of printer and {\it output}
\func{bool}{HasPage}{\param{int}{ pageNum}}
-Should be overridden to return TRUE if the document has this page, or FALSE
-if not. Returning FALSE signifies the end of the document. By default,
+Should be overridden to return true if the document has this page, or false
+if not. Returning false signifies the end of the document. By default,
HasPage behaves as if the document has only one page.
\membersection{wxPrintout::IsPreview}\label{wxprintoutispreview}
\func{bool}{IsPreview}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the printout is currently being used for previewing.
+Returns true if the printout is currently being used for previewing.
\membersection{wxPrintout::OnBeginDocument}\label{wxprintoutonbegindocument}
\func{bool}{OnBeginDocument}{\param{int}{ startPage}, \param{int}{ endPage}}
-Called by the framework at the start of document printing. Return FALSE from
+Called by the framework at the start of document printing. Return false from
this function cancels the print job. OnBeginDocument is called once for every
copy printed.
\func{bool}{OnPrintPage}{\param{int}{ pageNum}}
-Called by the framework when a page should be printed. Returning FALSE cancels
+Called by the framework when a page should be printed. Returning false cancels
the print job. The application can use wxPrintout::GetDC to obtain a device
context to draw on.
The same does not apply to the {\it data} argument.
Test the Ok member to check whether the wxPrintPreview object was created correctly.
-Ok could return FALSE if there was a problem initializing the printer device context
+Ok could return false if there was a problem initializing the printer device context
(current printer not set, for example).
\membersection{wxPrintPreview::\destruct{wxPrintPreview}}
\func{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the wxPrintPreview is valid, FALSE otherwise. It could return FALSE if there was a
+Returns true if the wxPrintPreview is valid, false otherwise. It could return false if there was a
problem initializing the printer device context (current printer not set, for example).
\membersection{wxPrintPreview::PaintPage}\label{wxprintpreviewpaintpage}
Will normally be called by the {\bf Print...} panel item on the
preview frame's control bar.
-Returns FALSE in case of error -- call
+Returns false in case of error -- call
\helpref{wxPrinter::GetLastError}{wxprintergetlasterror} to get detailed
information about the kind of the error.
\constfunc{bool}{IsErrorAvailable}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if there is data to be read on the child process standard
+Returns {\tt true} if there is data to be read on the child process standard
error stream.
\wxheading{See also}
\constfunc{bool}{IsInputAvailable}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if there is data to be read on the child process standard
+Returns {\tt true} if there is data to be read on the child process standard
output stream. This allows to write simple (and extremely inefficient)
polling-based code waiting for a better mechanism in future wxWindows versions.
\constfunc{bool}{IsInputOpened}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the child process standard output stream is opened.
+Returns {\tt true} if the child process standard output stream is opened.
\membersection{wxProcess::Kill}\label{wxprocesskill}
\func{static bool}{Exists}{\param{int}{ pid}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the given process exists in the system.
+Returns {\tt true} if the given process exists in the system.
\wxheading{See also}
reached.}
\twocolitem{{\bf wxPD\_CAN\_ABORT}}{This flag tells the dialog that it should have a
"Cancel" button which the user may press. If this happens, the next call to
- \helpref{Update()}{wxprogressdialogupdate} will return FALSE.}
+ \helpref{Update()}{wxprogressdialogupdate} will return false.}
\twocolitem{{\bf wxPD\_ELAPSED\_TIME}}{This flag tells the dialog that it should show elapsed time (since creating the dialog).}
\twocolitem{{\bf wxPD\_ESTIMATED\_TIME}}{This flag tells the dialog that it should show estimated time.}
\twocolitem{{\bf wxPD\_REMAINING\_TIME}}{This flag tells the dialog that it should show remaining time.}
\param{const char * }{newmsg = NULL}, }
Updates the dialog, setting the progress bar to the new value and, if
-given changes the message above it. Returns TRUE if the ABORT button
+given changes the message above it. Returns true if the ABORT button
has \emph{not} been pressed.
-If FALSE is returned, the application can either immediately destroy the dialog
+If false is returned, the application can either immediately destroy the dialog
or ask the user for the confirmation and if the abort is not confirmed the
dialog may be resumed with \helpref{Resume}{wxprogressdialogresume} function.
\membersection{wxPropertyFormDialog::wxPropertyFormDialog}
\func{void}{wxPropertyFormDialog}{\param{wxPropertyFormView *}{view}, \param{wxWindow *}{parent}, \param{char *}{title},
- \param{bool}{ modal=FALSE}, \param{int}{ x=-1}, \param{int}{ y=-1}, \param{int}{ width=-1}, \param{int}{height=-1},
+ \param{bool}{ modal=false}, \param{int}{ x=-1}, \param{int}{ y=-1}, \param{int}{ width=-1}, \param{int}{height=-1},
\param{long}{ style=wxDEFAULT\_DIALOG\_STYLE}, \param{char *}{name=``dialogBox"}}
Constructor.
\func{bool}{Check}{\void}
-Checks all properties by calling the appropriate validators; returns FALSE if a validation failed.
+Checks all properties by calling the appropriate validators; returns false if a validation failed.
\membersection{wxPropertyFormView::GetPanel}\label{wxpropertyformviewgetpanel}
\membersection{wxPropertyListDialog::wxPropertyListDialog}
\func{void}{wxPropertyListDialog}{\param{wxPropertyListView *}{view}, \param{wxWindow *}{parent}, \param{char *}{title},
- \param{bool}{ modal=FALSE}, \param{int}{ x=-1}, \param{int}{ y=-1}, \param{int}{ width=-1}, \param{int}{height=-1},
+ \param{bool}{ modal=false}, \param{int}{ x=-1}, \param{int}{ y=-1}, \param{int}{ width=-1}, \param{int}{height=-1},
\param{long}{ style=wxDEFAULT\_DIALOG\_STYLE}, \param{char *}{name=``dialogBox"}}
Constructor.
the following behaviour:
\begin{itemize}\itemsep=0pt
-\item Double-clicking on the item toggles between TRUE and FALSE.
-\item Showing the value list enables the user to select TRUE or FALSE.
-\item The user may be able to type in the word TRUE or FALSE, or the edit control
+\item Double-clicking on the item toggles between true and false.
+\item Showing the value list enables the user to select true or false.
+\item The user may be able to type in the word true or false, or the edit control
may be read-only to disallow this since it is error-prone.
\end{itemize}
wxPropertySheet *sheet = new wxPropertySheet;
sheet->AddProperty(new wxProperty("fred", 1.0, "real"));
- sheet->AddProperty(new wxProperty("tough choice", (Bool)TRUE, "bool"));
+ sheet->AddProperty(new wxProperty("tough choice", (Bool)true, "bool"));
sheet->AddProperty(new wxProperty("ian", (long)45, "integer", new wxIntegerListValidator(-50, 50)));
sheet->AddProperty(new wxProperty("bill", 25.0, "real", new wxRealListValidator(0.0, 100.0)));
sheet->AddProperty(new wxProperty("julian", "one", "string"));
wxPropertyListFrame *propFrame = NULL;
if (useDialog)
{
- propDialog = new wxPropertyListDialog(view, NULL, "Property Sheet Test", TRUE, -1, -1, 400, 500);
+ propDialog = new wxPropertyListDialog(view, NULL, "Property Sheet Test", true, -1, -1, 400, 500);
}
else
{
{
view->ShowView(sheet, propDialog);
propDialog->Centre(wxBOTH);
- propDialog->Show(TRUE);
+ propDialog->Show(true);
}
else
{
propFrame->Initialize();
view->ShowView(sheet, propFrame->GetPropertyPanel());
propFrame->Centre(wxBOTH);
- propFrame->Show(TRUE);
+ propFrame->Show(true);
}
}
\end{verbatim}
wxPropertySheet *sheet = new wxPropertySheet;
sheet->AddProperty(new wxProperty("fred", 25.0, "real", new wxRealFormValidator(0.0, 100.0)));
- sheet->AddProperty(new wxProperty("tough choice", (Bool)TRUE, "bool"));
+ sheet->AddProperty(new wxProperty("tough choice", (Bool)true, "bool"));
sheet->AddProperty(new wxProperty("ian", (long)45, "integer", new wxIntegerFormValidator(-50, 50)));
sheet->AddProperty(new wxProperty("julian", "one", "string"));
wxStringList *strings = new wxStringList("one", "two", "three", NULL);
wxPropertyFormFrame *propFrame = NULL;
if (useDialog)
{
- propDialog = new wxPropertyFormDialog(view, NULL, "Property Form Test", TRUE, -1, -1, 400, 300);
+ propDialog = new wxPropertyFormDialog(view, NULL, "Property Form Test", true, -1, -1, 400, 300);
}
else
{
view->AssociateNames();
view->TransferToDialog();
propDialog->Centre(wxBOTH);
- propDialog->Show(TRUE);
+ propDialog->Show(true);
}
else
{
view->AssociateNames();
view->TransferToDialog();
propFrame->Centre(wxBOTH);
- propFrame->Show(TRUE);
+ propFrame->Show(true);
}
}
\end{verbatim}
\func{bool}{OnCheckValue}{\param{wxProperty *}{property}, \param{wxPropertyListView *}{view},
\param{wxWindow *}{parentWindow}}
-Called when the Tick (Confirm) button is pressed or focus is list. Return FALSE if the value
-was invalid, which is a signal restores the old value. Return TRUE if the value was valid.
+Called when the Tick (Confirm) button is pressed or focus is list. Return false if the value
+was invalid, which is a signal restores the old value. Return true if the value was valid.
\membersection{wxPropertyListValidator::OnClearControls}
\membersection{wxPropertyListView::UpdatePropertyList}\label{wxpropertylistviewupdateproplist}
-\func{bool}{UpdatePropertyList}{\param{bool }{clearEditArea = TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{UpdatePropertyList}{\param{bool }{clearEditArea = true}}
Updates the whole property list display.
\func{bool}{GetModified}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the value was modified since being created
+Returns true if the value was modified since being created
(or since SetModified was called).
\membersection{wxPropertyValue::GetNext}
\func{bool}{OnClose}{\void}
-Virtual function that will be called when the physical window is closed. The default implementation returns FALSE.
+Virtual function that will be called when the physical window is closed. The default implementation returns false.
\membersection{wxPropertyView::OnHelp}\label{wxpropertyviewonhelp}
\func{bool}{OnUpdateView}{\void}
Called by the viewed object to update the view. The default implementation just returns
-FALSE.
+false.
\membersection{wxPropertyView::SetPropertySheet}\label{wxpropertyviewsetpropertysheet}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE, if the connection is established, else FALSE.
+true, if the connection is established, else false.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
\membersection{wxProtocol::GetInputStream}\label{wxprotogetinput}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE, if successful, else FALSE.
+Returns true, if successful, else false.
% ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
\membersection{wxProtocol::GetError}
\func{bool}{IsRowDirty}{\param{int}{ field}}
-Returns TRUE if the given field has been changed, but not saved.
+Returns true if the given field has been changed, but not saved.
\membersection{wxQueryCol::IsNullable}
\func{bool}{IsNullable}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if a column may contain no data.
+Returns true if a column may contain no data.
\membersection{wxQueryCol::AppendField}
\membersection{wxQueryCol::SetFieldDirty}
-\func{void}{SetFieldDirty}{\param{int}{ field}, \param{bool }{dirty = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetFieldDirty}{\param{int}{ field}, \param{bool }{dirty = true}}
Sets the dirty tag of a given field.
\func{bool}{IsDirty}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the data of a field has been changed, but not saved.
+Returns true if the data of a field has been changed, but not saved.
\membersection{wxQueryField::SetData}
\membersection{wxQueryField::SetDirty}
-\func{void}{SetDirty}{\param{bool}{ dirty = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetDirty}{\param{bool}{ dirty = true}}
Sets the dirty tag of a field.
\membersection{wxRadioBox::Enable}\label{wxradioboxenable}
-\func{void}{Enable}{\param{bool}{ enable = {\tt TRUE}}}
+\func{void}{Enable}{\param{bool}{ enable = {\tt true}}}
Enables or disables the entire radiobox.
-\func{void}{Enable}{\param{int}{ n}, \param{bool}{ enable = {\tt TRUE}}}
+\func{void}{Enable}{\param{int}{ n}, \param{bool}{ enable = {\tt true}}}
Enables or disables an individual button in the radiobox.
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{enable}{TRUE to enable, FALSE to disable.}
+\docparam{enable}{true to enable, false to disable.}
\docparam{n}{The zero-based button to enable or disable.}
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{show}{TRUE to show, FALSE to hide.}
+\docparam{show}{true to show, false to hide.}
\docparam{item}{The zero-based position of the button to show or hide.}
\constfunc{bool}{GetValue}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the radio button is depressed, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the radio button is depressed, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxRadioButton::SetValue}\label{wxradiobuttonsetvalue}
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{value}{TRUE to select, FALSE to deselect.}
+\docparam{value}{true to select, false to deselect.}
Copies the current data of the column at position {\it col} into the buffer
\rtfsp{\it dataPtr}. To be sure to get the right type of data, the user has to pass the
-correct data type. The function returns FALSE if {\it col} does not
+correct data type. The function returns false if {\it col} does not
exist or the wrong data type was given.
\func{bool}{GetFieldData}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{int}{ dataType}, \param{void *}{dataPtr}}
\func{bool}{IsBOF}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the user tried to move the cursor before the first record
+Returns true if the user tried to move the cursor before the first record
in the set.
\membersection{wxRecordSet::IsFieldDirty}
\func{bool}{IsFieldDirty}{\param{int}{ field}}
-Returns TRUE if the given field has been changed but not saved yet.
+Returns true if the given field has been changed but not saved yet.
\func{bool}{IsFieldDirty}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}}
\func{bool}{IsFieldNull}{\param{int}{ field}}
-Returns TRUE if the given field has no data.
+Returns true if the given field has no data.
\func{bool}{IsFieldNull}{\param{const wxString\& }{ name}}
\func{bool}{IsColNullable}{\param{int}{ col}}
-Returns TRUE if the given column may contain no data.
+Returns true if the given column may contain no data.
\func{bool}{IsColNullable}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}}
\func{bool}{IsEOF}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the user tried to move the cursor behind the last record
+Returns true if the user tried to move the cursor behind the last record
in the set.
\membersection{wxRecordSet::IsDeleted}
\func{bool}{IsOpen}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the parent database is open.
+Returns true if the parent database is open.
\membersection{wxRecordSet::Move}
\membersection{wxRecordSet::SetFieldDirty}
-\func{void}{SetFieldDirty}{\param{int}{ field}, \param{bool}{ dirty = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetFieldDirty}{\param{int}{ field}, \param{bool}{ dirty = true}}
Sets the dirty tag of the field field. Not implemented.
-\func{void}{SetFieldDirty}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{bool}{ dirty = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetFieldDirty}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{bool}{ dirty = true}}
Same as above, but uses the column name as the identifier.
\membersection{wxRecordSet::SetFieldNull}
-\func{void}{SetFieldNull}{\param{void *}{p}, \param{bool }{isNull = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetFieldNull}{\param{void *}{p}, \param{bool }{isNull = true}}
Not implemented.
\constfunc{bool}{Inside}{\param{const wxPoint\& }{pt}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the given point is inside the rectangle (or on its
-boundary) and {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+Returns {\tt true} if the given point is inside the rectangle (or on its
+boundary) and {\tt false} otherwise.
\membersection{wxRect:Intersects}\label{wxrectintersects}
\constfunc{bool}{Intersects}{\param{const wxRect\& }{rect}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if this rectangle has a non empty intersection with the
-rectangle {\it rect} and {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+Returns {\tt true} if this rectangle has a non empty intersection with the
+rectangle {\it rect} and {\tt false} otherwise.
\membersection{wxRect::Offset}\label{wxrectoffset}
\func{bool}{Compile}{\param{const wxString\& }{pattern}, \param{int }{flags = wxRE\_DEFAULT}}
-Compile the string into regular expression, return {\tt TRUE} if ok or {\tt FALSE}
+Compile the string into regular expression, return {\tt true} if ok or {\tt false}
if string has a syntax error.
\membersection{wxRegEx::IsValid}\label{wxregexisvalid}
\constfunc{bool}{IsValid}{\void}
-Return {\tt TRUE} if this is a valid compiled regular expression, {\tt FALSE}
+Return {\tt true} if this is a valid compiled regular expression, {\tt false}
otherwise.
\membersection{wxRegEx::GetMatch}\label{wxregexgetmatch}
and only if {\tt wxRE\_NOSUB} was {\bf not} used in
\helpref{Compile()}{wxregexcompile}.
-Returns {\tt FALSE} if no match or if an error occured.
+Returns {\tt false} if no match or if an error occured.
\constfunc{wxString}{GetMatch}{\param{const wxString\& }{text}, \param{size\_t }{index = 0}}
\constfunc{bool}{Matches}{\param{const wxChar* }{text}, \param{int }{flags = 0}}
Matches the precompiled regular expression against the string {\it text},
-returns {\tt TRUE} if matches and {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+returns {\tt true} if matches and {\tt false} otherwise.
Flags may be combination of {\tt wxRE\_NOTBOL} and {\tt wxRE\_NOTEOL}.
\wxheading{Return value}
-{\tt TRUE} if successful, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+{\tt true} if successful, {\tt false} otherwise.
\wxheading{Remarks}
\constfunc{bool}{IsEmpty}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the region is empty, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+Returns {\tt true} if the region is empty, {\tt false} otherwise.
\membersection{wxRegion::Subtract}\label{wxregionsubstract}
\wxheading{Return value}
-{\tt TRUE} if successful, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+{\tt true} if successful, {\tt false} otherwise.
\wxheading{Remarks}
\wxheading{Return value}
-{\tt TRUE} if successful, {\tt FALSE} otherwise (the region is unchanged then).
+{\tt true} if successful, {\tt false} otherwise (the region is unchanged then).
\membersection{wxRegion::Union}\label{wxregionunion}
\wxheading{Return value}
-{\tt TRUE} if successful, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+{\tt true} if successful, {\tt false} otherwise.
\wxheading{Remarks}
\wxheading{Return value}
-{\tt TRUE} if successful, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+{\tt true} if successful, {\tt false} otherwise.
\wxheading{Remarks}
\constfunc{bool}{HaveRects}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if there are still some rectangles; otherwise returns {\tt FALSE}.
+Returns {\tt true} if there are still some rectangles; otherwise returns {\tt false}.
\membersection{wxRegionIterator::Reset}
\constfunc{}{operator bool}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if there are still some rectangles; otherwise returns {\tt FALSE}.
+Returns {\tt true} if there are still some rectangles; otherwise returns {\tt false}.
You can use this to test the iterator object as if it were of type bool.
\constfunc{bool}{GetSashVisible}{\param{wxSashEdgePosition }{edge}}
-Returns TRUE if a sash is visible on the given edge, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if a sash is visible on the given edge, false otherwise.
\wxheading{Parameters}
\constfunc{bool}{HasBorder}{\param{wxSashEdgePosition }{edge}}
-Returns TRUE if the sash has a border, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the sash has a border, false otherwise.
\wxheading{Parameters}
\docparam{edge}{Edge to change. One of wxSASH\_TOP, wxSASH\_RIGHT, wxSASH\_BOTTOM, wxSASH\_LEFT.}
-\docparam{visible}{TRUE to make the sash visible, FALSE to make it invisible.}
+\docparam{visible}{true to make the sash visible, false to make it invisible.}
\wxheading{See also}
\docparam{edge}{Edge to change. One of wxSASH\_TOP, wxSASH\_RIGHT, wxSASH\_BOTTOM, wxSASH\_LEFT.}
-\docparam{hasBorder}{TRUE to give the sash a border visible, FALSE to remove it.}
+\docparam{hasBorder}{true to give the sash a border visible, false to remove it.}
\wxheading{See also}
\func{virtual void}{SetScrollbar}{\param{int }{position},\rtfsp
\param{int }{thumbSize}, \param{int }{range},\rtfsp
\param{int }{pageSize},\rtfsp
-\param{const bool }{refresh = TRUE}}
+\param{const bool }{refresh = true}}
Sets the scrollbar properties.
the scrollbar will scroll when it is paged up or down. Often it is the same as
the thumb size.}
-\docparam{refresh}{TRUE to redraw the scrollbar, FALSE otherwise.}
+\docparam{refresh}{true to redraw the scrollbar, false otherwise.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{xScrolling}{If TRUE, enables physical scrolling in the x direction.}
+\docparam{xScrolling}{If true, enables physical scrolling in the x direction.}
-\docparam{yScrolling}{If TRUE, enables physical scrolling in the y direction.}
+\docparam{yScrolling}{If true, enables physical scrolling in the y direction.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\constfunc{bool}{IsRetained}{\void}
-Motif only: TRUE if the window has a backing bitmap.
+Motif only: true if the window has a backing bitmap.
\membersection{wxScrolledWindow::PrepareDC}\label{wxscrolledwindowpreparedc}
\func{void}{SetScrollbars}{\param{int}{ pixelsPerUnitX}, \param{int}{ pixelsPerUnitY},\rtfsp
\param{int}{ noUnitsX}, \param{int}{ noUnitsY},\rtfsp
\param{int }{xPos = 0}, \param{int}{ yPos = 0},\rtfsp
-\param{bool }{noRefresh = FALSE}}
+\param{bool }{noRefresh = false}}
Sets up vertical and/or horizontal scrollbars.
\docparam{yPos}{Position to initialize the scrollbars in the vertical direction, in scroll units.}
-\docparam{noRefresh}{Will not refresh window if TRUE.}
+\docparam{noRefresh}{Will not refresh window if true.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
cause any layout or resizing to take place, call \helpref{wxSizer::Layout}{wxsizerlayout}
to update the layout "on screen" after detaching a child from the sizer.
-Returns TRUE if the child item was found and detached, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the child item was found and detached, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\helpref{wxSizer::Detach}{wxsizerdetach} in new code instead. There is currently no wxSizer
method that will both detach and destroy a wxWindow item.
-Returns TRUE if the child item was found and removed, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the child item was found and removed, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxSizer::SetDimension}\label{wxsizersetdimension}
\membersection{wxSizer::Show}\label{wxsizershow}
-\func{void}{Show}{\param{wxWindow* }{window}, \param{bool }{show = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{Show}{\param{wxWindow* }{window}, \param{bool }{show = true}}
-\func{void}{Show}{\param{wxSizer* }{sizer}, \param{bool }{show = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{Show}{\param{wxSizer* }{sizer}, \param{bool }{show = true}}
-\func{void}{Show}{\param{size\_t }{index}, \param{bool }{show = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{Show}{\param{size\_t }{index}, \param{bool }{show = true}}
Shows or hides the {\it window}, {\it sizer}, or item at {\it index}.
To make a sizer item disappear or reappear, use Show() followed by Layout().
program is running. To do it, you should create an object of this class. As
long as this object is alive, calls to
\helpref{IsAnotherRunning()}{wxsingleinstancecheckerisanotherrunning} from
-other processes will return {\tt TRUE}.
+other processes will return {\tt true}.
As the object should have the life span as big as possible, it makes sense to
create it either as a global or in \helpref{wxApp::OnInit}{wxapponinit}. For
{
wxLogError(_("Another program instance is already running, aborting."));
- return FALSE;
+ return false;
}
... more initializations ...
- return TRUE;
+ return true;
}
int MyApp::OnExit()
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns {\tt FALSE} if initialization failed, it doesn't mean that another
+Returns {\tt false} if initialization failed, it doesn't mean that another
instance is running - use
\helpref{IsAnotherRunning()}{wxsingleinstancecheckerisanotherrunning} to check
for it.
\constfunc{bool}{IsAnotherRunning}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if another copy of this program is already running, {\tt
-FALSE} otherwise.
+Returns {\tt true} if another copy of this program is already running, {\tt
+false} otherwise.
\membersection{wxSingleInstanceChecker::\destruct{wxSingleInstanceChecker}}\label{wxsingleinstancecheckerdtor}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Always TRUE.
+Always true.
%
% Discard
Use \helpref{LastCount}{wxsocketbaselastcount} to verify the number of bytes actually discarded.
-If you use \helpref{Error}{wxsocketbaseerror}, it will always return FALSE.
+If you use \helpref{Error}{wxsocketbaseerror}, it will always return false.
%
% Error
\constfunc{bool}{Error}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if an error occurred in the last IO operation.
+Returns true if an error occurred in the last IO operation.
Use this function to check for an error condition after one of the
following calls: Discard, Peek, Read, ReadMsg, Unread, Write, WriteMsg.
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if no error happened, FALSE otherwise.
+true if no error happened, false otherwise.
%
% GetFlags
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if no error happened, FALSE otherwise.
+true if no error happened, false otherwise.
%
% InterruptWait
\constfunc{bool}{IsConnected}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the socket is connected.
+Returns true if the socket is connected.
%
% IsData
%
\constfunc{bool}{IsDisconnected}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the socket is not connected.
+Returns true if the socket is not connected.
\membersection{wxSocketBase::LastCount}\label{wxsocketbaselastcount}
but it should not be used to determine if an error has occurred (this
is because successful operations do not change the LastError value).
Use \helpref{Error}{wxsocketbaseerror} first, in order to determine
-if the last IO call failed. If this returns TRUE, use LastError
+if the last IO call failed. If this returns true, use LastError
to discover the cause of the error.
%
\func{void}{Notify}{\param{bool}{ notify}}
According to the {\it notify} value, this function enables
-or disables socket events. If {\it notify} is TRUE, the events
+or disables socket events. If {\it notify} is true, the events
configured with \helpref{SetNotify}{wxsocketbasesetnotify} will
-be sent to the application. If {\it notify} is FALSE; no events
+be sent to the application. If {\it notify} is false; no events
will be sent.
%
\constfunc{bool}{Ok}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the socket is initialized and ready and FALSE in other
+Returns true if the socket is initialized and ready and false in other
cases.
\wxheading{Remark/Warning}
-For \helpref{wxSocketClient}{wxsocketclient}, Ok won't return TRUE unless
+For \helpref{wxSocketClient}{wxsocketclient}, Ok won't return true unless
the client is connected to a server.
-For \helpref{wxSocketServer}{wxsocketserver}, Ok will return TRUE if the
+For \helpref{wxSocketServer}{wxsocketserver}, Ok will return true if the
server could bind to the specified address and is already listening for
new connections.
\begin{verbatim}
sock.SetNotify(wxSOCKET_INPUT_FLAG | wxSOCKET_LOST_FLAG);
- sock.Notify(TRUE);
+ sock.Notify(true);
\end{verbatim}
In this example, the user will be notified about incoming socket data and
If you use \helpref{LastCount}{wxsocketbaselastcount}, it will always return {\it nbytes}.
-If you use \helpref{Error}{wxsocketbaseerror}, it will always return FALSE.
+If you use \helpref{Error}{wxsocketbaseerror}, it will always return false.
\wxheading{Parameters}
\func{bool}{Wait}{\param{long}{ seconds = -1}, \param{long}{ millisecond = 0}}
-This function waits until any of the following conditions is TRUE:
+This function waits until any of the following conditions is true:
\begin{itemize}
\item The socket becomes readable.
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE when any of the above conditions is satisfied,
-FALSE if the timeout was reached.
+Returns true when any of the above conditions is satisfied,
+false if the timeout was reached.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE if the connection was lost, FALSE if the timeout was reached.
+Returns true if the connection was lost, false if the timeout was reached.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE if the socket becomes readable, FALSE on timeout.
+Returns true if the socket becomes readable, false on timeout.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE if the socket becomes writable, FALSE on timeout.
+Returns true if the socket becomes writable, false on timeout.
\wxheading{See also}
%
\membersection{wxSocketClient::Connect}\label{wxsocketclientconnect}
-\func{bool}{Connect}{\param{wxSockAddress\&}{ address}, \param{bool}{ wait = TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{Connect}{\param{wxSockAddress\&}{ address}, \param{bool}{ wait = true}}
Connects to a server using the specified address.
-If {\it wait} is TRUE, Connect will wait until the connection
+If {\it wait} is true, Connect will wait until the connection
completes. {\bf Warning:} This will block the GUI.
-If {\it wait} is FALSE, Connect will try to establish the connection and
+If {\it wait} is false, Connect will try to establish the connection and
return immediately, without blocking the GUI. When used this way, even if
-Connect returns FALSE, the connection request can be completed later.
+Connect returns false, the connection request can be completed later.
To detect this, use \helpref{WaitOnConnect}{wxsocketclientwaitonconnect},
or catch {\bf wxSOCKET\_CONNECTION} events (for successful establishment)
and {\bf wxSOCKET\_LOST} events (for connection failure).
\docparam{address}{Address of the server.}
-\docparam{wait}{If TRUE, waits for the connection to complete.}
+\docparam{wait}{If true, waits for the connection to complete.}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE if the connection is established and no error occurs.
+Returns true if the connection is established and no error occurs.
-If {\it wait} was TRUE, and Connect returns FALSE, an error occurred
+If {\it wait} was true, and Connect returns false, an error occurred
and the connection failed.
-If {\it wait} was FALSE, and Connect returns FALSE, you should still
+If {\it wait} was false, and Connect returns false, you should still
be prepared to handle the completion of this connection request, either
with \helpref{WaitOnConnect}{wxsocketclientwaitonconnect} or by
watching {\bf wxSOCKET\_CONNECTION} and {\bf wxSOCKET\_LOST} events.
Wait until a connection request completes, or until the specified timeout
elapses. Use this function after issuing a call
-to \helpref{Connect}{wxsocketclientconnect} with {\it wait} set to FALSE.
+to \helpref{Connect}{wxsocketclientconnect} with {\it wait} set to false.
\wxheading{Parameters}
\wxheading{Return value}
-WaitOnConnect returns TRUE if the connection request completes. This
+WaitOnConnect returns true if the connection request completes. This
does not necessarily mean that the connection was successfully established;
it might also happen that the connection was refused by the peer. Use
\helpref{IsConnected}{wxsocketbaseisconnected} to distinguish between
these two situations.
-If the timeout elapses, WaitOnConnect returns FALSE.
+If the timeout elapses, WaitOnConnect returns false.
These semantics allow code like this:
\begin{verbatim}
// Issue the connection request
-client->Connect(addr, FALSE);
+client->Connect(addr, false);
// Wait until the request completes or until we decide to give up
-bool waitmore = TRUE;
+bool waitmore = true;
while ( !client->WaitOnConnect(seconds, millis) && waitmore )
{
// possibly give some feedback to the user,
%
\membersection{wxSocketServer::Accept}\label{wxsocketserveraccept}
-\func{wxSocketBase *}{Accept}{\param{bool}{ wait = TRUE}}
+\func{wxSocketBase *}{Accept}{\param{bool}{ wait = true}}
Accepts an incoming connection request, and creates a new
\helpref{wxSocketBase}{wxsocketbase} object which represents
the server-side of the connection.
-If {\it wait} is TRUE and there are no pending connections to be
+If {\it wait} is true and there are no pending connections to be
accepted, it will wait for the next incoming connection to
arrive. {\bf Warning:} This will block the GUI.
-If {\it wait} is FALSE, it will try to accept a pending connection
+If {\it wait} is false, it will try to accept a pending connection
if there is one, but it will always return immediately without blocking
the GUI. If you want to use Accept in this way, you can either check for
incoming connections with \helpref{WaitForAccept}{wxsocketserverwaitforaccept}
\wxheading{Return value}
Returns an opened socket connection, or NULL if an error occurred or
-if the {\it wait} parameter was FALSE and there were no pending
+if the {\it wait} parameter was false and there were no pending
connections.
\wxheading{See also}
%
\membersection{wxSocketServer::AcceptWith}\label{wxsocketserveracceptwith}
-\func{bool}{AcceptWith}{\param{wxSocketBase\&}{ socket}, \param{bool}{ wait = TRUE}}
+\func{bool}{AcceptWith}{\param{wxSocketBase\&}{ socket}, \param{bool}{ wait = true}}
Accept an incoming connection using the specified socket object.
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE on success, or FALSE if an error occurred or if the
-{\it wait} parameter was FALSE and there were no pending
+Returns true on success, or false if an error occurred or if the
+{\it wait} parameter was false and there were no pending
connections.
\helpref{wxSocketServer::WaitForAccept}{wxsocketserverwaitforaccept},
This function waits for an incoming connection. Use it if you want to call
\helpref{Accept}{wxsocketserveraccept} or \helpref{AcceptWith}{wxsocketserveracceptwith}
-with {\it wait} set to FALSE, to detect when an incoming connection is waiting
+with {\it wait} set to false, to detect when an incoming connection is waiting
to be accepted.
\wxheading{Parameters}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns TRUE if an incoming connection arrived, FALSE if the timeout elapsed.
+Returns true if an incoming connection arrived, false if the timeout elapsed.
\wxheading{See also}
\constfunc{bool}{IsSplit}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the window is split, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the window is split, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxSplitterWindow::OnDoubleClickSash}\label{wxsplitterwindowondoubleclicksash}
\func{virtual bool}{OnSashPositionChange}{\param{int }{newSashPosition}}
Application-overridable function called when the sash position is changed by
-user. It may return FALSE to prevent the change or TRUE to allow it.
+user. It may return false to prevent the change or true to allow it.
\wxheading{Parameters}
Both parameters should be non-NULL and {\it winOld} must specify one of the
windows managed by the splitter. If the parameters are incorrect or the window
-couldn't be replaced, FALSE is returned. Otherwise the function will return
-TRUE, but please notice that it will not delete the replaced window and you
+couldn't be replaced, false is returned. Otherwise the function will return
+true, but please notice that it will not delete the replaced window and you
may wish to do it yourself.
\wxheading{See also}
\membersection{wxSplitterWindow::SetSashPosition}\label{wxsplitterwindowsetsashposition}
-\func{void}{SetSashPosition}{\param{int }{position}, \param{const bool}{ redraw = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetSashPosition}{\param{int }{position}, \param{const bool}{ redraw = true}}
Sets the sash position.
\docparam{position}{The sash position in pixels.}
-\docparam{redraw}{If TRUE, resizes the panes and redraws the sash and border.}
+\docparam{redraw}{If true, resizes the panes and redraws the sash and border.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if successful, FALSE otherwise (the window was already split).
+true if successful, false otherwise (the window was already split).
\wxheading{Remarks}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if successful, FALSE otherwise (the window was already split).
+true if successful, false otherwise (the window was already split).
\wxheading{Remarks}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if successful, FALSE otherwise (the window was not split).
+true if successful, false otherwise (the window was not split).
\wxheading{Remarks}
\constfunc{bool}{IsVertical}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the line is vertical, FALSE if horizontal.
+Returns true if the line is vertical, false if horizontal.
\membersection{wxStaticLine::GetDefaultSize}\label{wxstaticlinegetdefaultsize}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the field index is valid, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the field index is valid, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\func{void}{Fixed}{\param{bool}{ fixed}}
Toggles the fixed flag. Usually this flag is toggled at the same time as
-{\it flushable}. This flag allows (when it has the FALSE value) or forbids
-(when it has the TRUE value) the stream buffer to resize dynamically the IO buffer.
+{\it flushable}. This flag allows (when it has the false value) or forbids
+(when it has the true value) the stream buffer to resize dynamically the IO buffer.
\wxheading{See also}
\membersection{wxStringList::ListToArray}
-\func{char*}{ListToArray}{\param{bool}{ new\_copies = FALSE}}
+\func{char*}{ListToArray}{\param{bool}{ new\_copies = false}}
Converts the list to an array of strings, only allocating new memory if
-\rtfsp{\bf new\_copies} is TRUE.
+\rtfsp{\bf new\_copies} is true.
\membersection{wxStringList::Member}
\func{bool}{Member}{\param{const wxString\& }{s}}
-Returns TRUE if {\bf s} is a member of the list (tested using {\bf strcmp}).
+Returns true if {\bf s} is a member of the list (tested using {\bf strcmp}).
\membersection{wxStringList::Sort}
\constfunc{wxStreamError}{IsOk}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if no error occurred on the stream.
+Returns true if no error occurred on the stream.
\wxheading{See also}
\constfunc{bool}{HasOption}{\param{const wxString\&}{ name}}
-Returns TRUE if the given option is present. The function is case-insensitive to {\it name}.
+Returns true if the given option is present. The function is case-insensitive to {\it name}.
\wxheading{See also}
\func{bool}{HitTest}{\param{int}{ x}, \param{int}{ y}}
-Returns TRUE if the point x, y is within the tab area.
+Returns true if the point x, y is within the tab area.
\membersection{wxTabControl::OnDraw}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if successful, FALSE otherwise.
+true if successful, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxTabCtrl::SetItemData}\label{wxtabctrlsetitemdata}
\membersection{wxTabView::CalculateTabWidth}\label{wxtabviewcalculatetabwidth}
-\func{int}{CalculateTabWidth}{\param{int}{ noTabs}, \param{bool}{ adjustView = FALSE}}
+\func{int}{CalculateTabWidth}{\param{int}{ noTabs}, \param{bool}{ adjustView = false}}
The application can specify the tab width using this function, in terms
of the number of tabs per layer (row) which will fit the view area, which
{\it noTabs} is the number of tabs which should take up the full width
of the view area.
-{\it adjustView} can be set to TRUE in order to readjust the view width
+{\it adjustView} can be set to true in order to readjust the view width
to exactly fit the given number of tabs.
The new tab width is returned.
\membersection{wxTabView::ClearTabs}
-\func{void}{ClearTabs}{\param{bool }{deleteTabs=TRUE}}
+\func{void}{ClearTabs}{\param{bool }{deleteTabs=true}}
-Clears the tabs, deleting them if {\it deleteTabs} is TRUE.
+Clears the tabs, deleting them if {\it deleteTabs} is true.
\membersection{wxTabView::Draw}
\func{bool}{OnEvent}{\param{wxMouseEvent\& }{event}}
-Processes mouse events sent from the panel or dialog. Returns TRUE if the event was processed,
-FALSE otherwise.
+Processes mouse events sent from the panel or dialog. Returns true if the event was processed,
+false otherwise.
\membersection{wxTabView::OnTabActivate}
Called just before a tab is activated, with the new active tab id, and the former active tab id.
-If the function returns FALSE, the tab is not activated.
+If the function returns false, the tab is not activated.
\membersection{wxTabView::SetBackgroundColour}
\membersection{wxTabView::SetTabSelection}
-\func{void}{SetTabSelection}{\param{int}{ sel}, \param{bool}{ activateTool=TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetTabSelection}{\param{int}{ sel}, \param{bool}{ activateTool=true}}
Sets the selected tab, calling the application's OnTabActivate function.
-If {\it activateTool} is FALSE, OnTabActivate will not be called.
+If {\it activateTool} is false, OnTabActivate will not be called.
\membersection{wxTabView::SetTextColour}
\rtfsp{\it OnInit} will usually create a top window as a bare minimum.
Unlike in earlier versions of wxWindows, OnInit does not return a frame. Instead it
-returns a boolean value which indicates whether processing should continue (TRUE) or not (FALSE).
+returns a boolean value which indicates whether processing should continue (true) or not (false).
You call \helpref{wxApp::SetTopWindow}{wxappsettopwindow} to let wxWindows know
about the top window.
{
wxFrame *the_frame = new wxFrame(NULL, ID_MYFRAME, argv[0]);
...
- the_frame->Show(TRUE);
+ the_frame->Show(true);
SetTopWindow(the_frame);
- return TRUE;
+ return true;
}
\end{verbatim}
\func{bool}{IsIconInstalled}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if \helpref{SetIcon}{wxtaskbariconseticon} was called with no subsequent \helpref{RemoveIcon}{wxtaskbariconremoveicon}.
+Returns true if \helpref{SetIcon}{wxtaskbariconseticon} was called with no subsequent \helpref{RemoveIcon}{wxtaskbariconremoveicon}.
\membersection{wxTaskBarIcon::IsOK}\label{wxtaskbariconisok}
\func{bool}{IsOK}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the object initialized successfully.
+Returns true if the object initialized successfully.
\membersection{wxTaskBarIcon::OnLButtonDown}\label{wxtaskbaricononlbuttondown}
To receive (paste in usual terminology) data from the clipboard, you should
create a \helpref{wxDataObject}{wxdataobject} derived class which supports the
data formats you need and pass it as argument to
-\helpref{wxClipboard::GetData}{wxclipboardgetdata}. If it returns {\tt FALSE},
+\helpref{wxClipboard::GetData}{wxclipboardgetdata}. If it returns {\tt false},
no data in (any of) the supported format(s) is available. If it returns {\tt
-TRUE}, the data has been successfully transferred to wxDataObject.
+true}, the data has been successfully transferred to wxDataObject.
For drag and drop case, the \helpref{wxDropTarget::OnData}{wxdroptargetondata}
virtual function will be called when a data object is dropped, from which the
\begin{verbatim}
wxColourData data;
- data.SetChooseFull(TRUE);
+ data.SetChooseFull(true);
for (int i = 0; i < 16; i++)
{
wxColour colour(i*16, i*16, i*16);
\func{bool}{ValidHost}{\param{const wxString\& }{host}}
-Returns TRUE if this is a valid host name, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if this is a valid host name, false otherwise.
Called by the server application to advise the client of a change in
the data associated with the given item. Causes the client
connection's \helpref{wxTCPConnection::OnAdvise}{wxtcpconnectiononadvise}
-member to be called. Returns TRUE if successful.
+member to be called. Returns true if successful.
\membersection{wxTCPConnection::Execute}
also be used to transfer arbitrary data to the server (similar
to \helpref{wxTCPConnection::Poke}{wxtcpconnectionpoke} in that respect). Causes the
server connection's \helpref{wxTCPConnection::OnExecute}{wxtcpconnectiononexecute} member to be
-called. Returns TRUE if successful.
+called. Returns true if successful.
\membersection{wxTCPConnection::Disconnect}
to be sent to the corresponding connection object in the other
program. The default behaviour of {\bf OnDisconnect} is to delete the
connection, but the calling application must explicitly delete its
-side of the connection having called {\bf Disconnect}. Returns TRUE if
+side of the connection having called {\bf Disconnect}. Returns true if
successful.
\membersection{wxTCPConnection::OnAdvise}\label{wxtcpconnectiononadvise}
Message sent to the server application by the client, when the client
wishes to start an `advise loop' for the given topic and item. The
-server can refuse to participate by returning FALSE.
+server can refuse to participate by returning false.
\membersection{wxTCPConnection::OnStopAdvise}\label{wxtcpconnectiononstopadvise}
Message sent to the server application by the client, when the client
wishes to stop an `advise loop' for the given topic and item. The
-server can refuse to stop the advise loop by returning FALSE, although
+server can refuse to stop the advise loop by returning false, although
this doesn't have much meaning in practice.
\membersection{wxTCPConnection::Poke}\label{wxtcpconnectionpoke}
Called by the client application to poke data into the server. Can be
used to transfer arbitrary data to the server. Causes the server
connection's \helpref{wxTCPConnection::OnPoke}{wxtcpconnectiononpoke} member
-to be called. Returns TRUE if successful.
+to be called. Returns true if successful.
\membersection{wxTCPConnection::Request}\label{wxtcpconnectionrequest}
Called by the client application to ask if an advise loop can be started
with the server. Causes the server connection's \helpref{wxTCPConnection::OnStartAdvise}{wxtcpconnectiononstartadvise}\rtfsp
-member to be called. Returns TRUE if the server okays it, FALSE
+member to be called. Returns true if the server okays it, false
otherwise.
\membersection{wxTCPConnection::StopAdvise}\label{wxtcpconnectionstopadvise}
Called by the client application to ask if an advise loop can be
stopped. Causes the server connection's \helpref{wxTCPConnection::OnStopAdvise}{wxtcpconnectiononstopadvise} member
-to be called. Returns TRUE if the server okays it, FALSE otherwise.
+to be called. Returns true if the server okays it, false otherwise.
Registers the server using the given service name. Under Unix, the
string must contain an integer id which is used as an Internet port
-number. FALSE is returned if the call failed (for example, the port
+number. false is returned if the call failed (for example, the port
number is already in use).
\membersection{wxTCPServer::OnAcceptConnection}\label{wxtcpserveronacceptconnection}
\end{verbatim}
When the wxDbConnectInf::AllocHenv() function is called successfully, a
-value of TRUE will be returned. A value of FALSE means allocation failed,
+value of true will be returned. A value of false means allocation failed,
and the handle will be undefined.
A shorter form of doing the above steps is encapsulated into the
\begin{verbatim}
table->SetColDefs(0, "FIRST_NAME", DB_DATA_TYPE_VARCHAR, FirstName,
- SQL_C_CHAR, sizeof(name), TRUE, TRUE);
+ SQL_C_CHAR, sizeof(name), true, true);
table->SetColDefs(1, "LAST_NAME", DB_DATA_TYPE_VARCHAR, LastName,
- SQL_C_CHAR, sizeof(LastName), TRUE, TRUE);
+ SQL_C_CHAR, sizeof(LastName), true, true);
\end{verbatim}
Notice that column definitions start at index 0 and go up to one less than
parsing the table's database connection's "errorList[]" array member for
the stored text of the error.
-When the \helpref{wxDbTable::Query}{wxdbtablequery} returns TRUE, the
+When the \helpref{wxDbTable::Query}{wxdbtablequery} returns true, the
database was able to successfully complete the requested query using the
provided criteria. This does not mean that there are any rows in the
result set, it just mean that the query was successful.
has completed successfully, the default/current cursor is placed so it
is pointing just before the first record in the result set. If the
result set is empty (no rows matched the criteria), then any calls to
-retrieve data from the result set will return FALSE.
+retrieve data from the result set will return false.
\begin{verbatim}
wxString msg;
When \helpref{wxDbTable::GetNext}{wxdbtablegetnext} is called and there are
no rows remaining in the result set after the current cursor position,
\helpref{wxDbTable::GetNext}{wxdbtablegetnext} (as well as all the other
-wxDbTable::GetXxxxx() functions) will return FALSE.
+wxDbTable::GetXxxxx() functions) will return false.
{\bf Close the table}
\begin{itemize}\itemsep=0pt
\item Does not support the SQL\_TIMESTAMP structure
\item Supports only one cursor and one connect (apparently? with Microsoft driver only?)
-\item Does not automatically create the primary index if the 'keyField' param of SetColDef is TRUE. The user must create ALL indexes from their program with calls to \helpref{wxDbTable::CreateIndex}{wxdbtablecreateindex}
+\item Does not automatically create the primary index if the 'keyField' param of SetColDef is true. The user must create ALL indexes from their program with calls to \helpref{wxDbTable::CreateIndex}{wxdbtablecreateindex}
\item Table names can only be 8 characters long
\item Column names can only be 10 characters long
\item Currently cannot CREATE a dBase table - bug or limitation of the drivers used??
{\it mySQL}
\begin{itemize}\itemsep=0pt
\item If a column is part of the Primary Key, the column cannot be NULL.
-\item Cannot support selecting for update [\helpref{wxDbTable::CanSelectForUpdate}{wxdbtablecanselectforupdate}]. Always returns FALSE.
+\item Cannot support selecting for update [\helpref{wxDbTable::CanSelectForUpdate}{wxdbtablecanselectforupdate}]. Always returns false.
\item Columns that are part of primary or secondary keys must be defined as being NOT NULL when they are created. Some code is added in \helpref{wxDbTable::CreateIndex}{wxdbtablecreateindex} to try to adjust the column definition if it is not defined correctly, but it is experimental (as of wxWindows v2.2.1)
\item Does not support sub-queries in SQL statements
\end{itemize}
wxChar FirstName[50+1]; // buffer for data from column "FIRST_NAME"
wxChar LastName[50+1]; // buffer for data from column "LAST_NAME"
-bool errorOccured = FALSE;
+bool errorOccured = false;
const wxChar tableName[] = "CONTACTS";
const UWORD numTableColumns = 2; // Number of bound columns
// returned back to the client.
//
table->SetColDefs(0, "FIRST_NAME", DB_DATA_TYPE_VARCHAR, FirstName,
- SQL_C_CHAR, sizeof(name), TRUE, TRUE);
+ SQL_C_CHAR, sizeof(name), true, true);
table->SetColDefs(1, "LAST_NAME", DB_DATA_TYPE_VARCHAR, LastName,
- SQL_C_CHAR, sizeof(LastName), TRUE, TRUE);
+ SQL_C_CHAR, sizeof(LastName), true, true);
// Open the table for access
table->Open();
{
wxMessageBox("Error on Query()","ERROR!",
wxOK | wxICON_EXCLAMATION);
- errorOccured = TRUE;
+ errorOccured = true;
}
wxString msg;
It is the duty of the application to define a suitable event handler, and
decide whether or not to destroy the window.
If the application is for some reason forcing the application to close
-(\helpref{wxCloseEvent::CanVeto}{wxcloseeventcanveto} returns FALSE), the window should always be destroyed, otherwise there is the option to
+(\helpref{wxCloseEvent::CanVeto}{wxcloseeventcanveto} returns false), the window should always be destroyed, otherwise there is the option to
ignore the request, or maybe wait until the user has answered a question
before deciding whether it is safe to close. The handler for EVT\_CLOSE should
signal to the calling code if it does not destroy the window, by calling
Your application can either use \helpref{wxWindow::Close}{wxwindowclose} event just as
the framework does, or it can call \helpref{wxWindow::Destroy}{wxwindowdestroy} directly.
-If using Close(), you can pass a TRUE argument to this function to tell the event handler
+If using Close(), you can pass a true argument to this function to tell the event handler
that we definitely want to delete the frame and it cannot be vetoed.
The advantage of using Close instead of Destroy is that it will call any clean-up code
defined by the EVT\_CLOSE handler; for example it may close a document contained in
a window after first asking the user whether the work should be saved. Close can be vetoed
-by this process (return FALSE), whereas Destroy definitely destroys the window.
+by this process (return false), whereas Destroy definitely destroys the window.
\wxheading{What is the default behaviour?}
\begin{verbatim}
wxDropSource dragSource( this );
dragSource.SetData( my_data );
- wxDragResult result = dragSource.DoDragDrop( TRUE );
+ wxDragResult result = dragSource.DoDragDrop( true );
\end{verbatim}
\item {\bf Dragging:} The call to DoDragDrop() blocks the program until the user release the
mouse button (unless you override \helpref{GiveFeedback}{wxdropsourcegivefeedback} function
\func{bool}{Open}{\param{const wxString\& }{strName}}
-Open the temporary file, returns {\tt TRUE} on success, {\tt FALSE} if an error
+Open the temporary file, returns {\tt true} on success, {\tt false} if an error
occurred.
{\it strName} is the name of file to be replaced. The temporary file is always
\constfunc{bool}{IsOpened}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the file was successfully opened.
+Returns {\tt true} if the file was successfully opened.
\membersection{wxTempFile::Write}\label{wxtempfilewrite}
\func{bool}{Write}{\param{const void }{*p}, \param{size\_t }{n}}
-Write to the file, return {\tt TRUE} on success, {\tt FALSE} on failure.
+Write to the file, return {\tt true} on success, {\tt false} on failure.
\membersection{wxTempFile::Write}\label{wxtempfilewrites}
\func{bool}{Write}{\param{const wxString\& }{str}, \param{wxMBConv\&}{ conv = wxConvLibc}}
-Write to the file, return {\tt TRUE} on success, {\tt FALSE} on failure.
+Write to the file, return {\tt true} on success, {\tt false} on failure.
The second argument is only meaningful in Unicode build of wxWindows when
{\it conv} is used to convert {\it str} to multibyte representation.
\func{bool}{Commit}{\void}
Validate changes: deletes the old file of name m\_strName and renames the new
-file to the old name. Returns {\tt TRUE} if both actions succeeded. If {\tt FALSE} is
+file to the old name. Returns {\tt true} if both actions succeeded. If {\tt false} is
returned it may unfortunately mean two quite different things: either that
either the old file couldn't be deleted or that the new file couldn't be renamed
to the old name.
\item If the object is disabled (via a call to \helpref{wxEvtHandler::SetEvtHandlerEnabled}{wxevthandlersetevthandlerenabled})
the function skips to step (6).
\item If the object is a wxWindow, {\bf ProcessEvent} is recursively called on the window's\rtfsp
-\helpref{wxValidator}{wxvalidator}. If this returns TRUE, the function exits.
+\helpref{wxValidator}{wxvalidator}. If this returns true, the function exits.
\item {\bf SearchEventTable} is called for this event handler. If this fails, the base
class table is tried, and so on until no more tables exist or an appropriate function was found,
in which case the function exits.
\item The search is applied down the entire chain of event handlers (usually the chain has a length
of one). If this succeeds, the function exits.
\item If the object is a wxWindow and the event is a wxCommandEvent, {\bf ProcessEvent} is
-recursively applied to the parent window's event handler. If this returns TRUE, the function exits.
+recursively applied to the parent window's event handler. If this returns true, the function exits.
\item Finally, {\bf ProcessEvent} is called on the wxApp object.
\end{enumerate}
\constfunc{bool}{HasBackgroundColour}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if this style specifies the background colour to use.
+Returns {\tt true} if this style specifies the background colour to use.
\membersection{wxTextAttr::HasFont}
\constfunc{bool}{HasFont}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if this style specifies the font to use.
+Returns {\tt true} if this style specifies the font to use.
\membersection{wxTextAttr::HasTextColour}
\constfunc{bool}{HasTextColour}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if this style specifies the foreground colour to use.
+Returns {\tt true} if this style specifies the foreground colour to use.
\membersection{wxTextAttr::IsDefault}
\constfunc{bool}{IsDefault}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if this style specifies any non-default attributes.
+Returns {\tt true} if this style specifies any non-default attributes.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% wxTextCtrl %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
\func{virtual bool}{CanCopy}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the selection can be copied to the clipboard.
+Returns {\tt true} if the selection can be copied to the clipboard.
\membersection{wxTextCtrl::CanCut}\label{wxtextctrlcancut}
\func{virtual bool}{CanCut}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the selection can be cut to the clipboard.
+Returns {\tt true} if the selection can be cut to the clipboard.
\membersection{wxTextCtrl::CanPaste}\label{wxtextctrlcanpaste}
\func{virtual bool}{CanPaste}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the contents of the clipboard can be pasted into the
+Returns {\tt true} if the contents of the clipboard can be pasted into the
text control. On some platforms (Motif, GTK) this is an approximation
-and returns {\tt TRUE} if the control is editable, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+and returns {\tt true} if the control is editable, {\tt false} otherwise.
\membersection{wxTextCtrl::CanRedo}\label{wxtextctrlcanredo}
\func{virtual bool}{CanRedo}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if there is a redo facility available and the last operation
+Returns {\tt true} if there is a redo facility available and the last operation
can be redone.
\membersection{wxTextCtrl::CanUndo}\label{wxtextctrlcanundo}
\func{virtual bool}{CanUndo}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if there is an undo facility available and the last operation
+Returns {\tt true} if there is an undo facility available and the last operation
can be undone.
\membersection{wxTextCtrl::Clear}\label{wxtextctrlclear}
\wxheading{Return value}
-{\tt TRUE} if the event resulted in a change to the control, {\tt FALSE}
+{\tt true} if the event resulted in a change to the control, {\tt false}
otherwise.
\membersection{wxTextCtrl::GetDefaultStyle}\label{wxtextctrlgetdefaultstyle}
\constfunc{bool}{IsEditable}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the controls contents may be edited by user (note that it
+Returns {\tt true} if the controls contents may be edited by user (note that it
always can be changed by the program), i.e. if the control hasn't been put in
read-only mode by a previous call to
\helpref{SetEditable}{wxtextctrlseteditable}.
\constfunc{bool}{IsModified}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the text has been modified by user. Note that calling
+Returns {\tt true} if the text has been modified by user. Note that calling
\helpref{SetValue}{wxtextctrlsetvalue} doesn't make the control modified.
\membersection{wxTextCtrl::IsMultiLine}\label{wxtextctrlismultiline}
\constfunc{bool}{IsMultiLine}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if this is a multi line edit control and {\tt FALSE}
+Returns {\tt true} if this is a multi line edit control and {\tt false}
otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\constfunc{bool}{IsSingleLine}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if this is a single line edit control and {\tt FALSE}
+Returns {\tt true} if this is a single line edit control and {\tt false}
otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-{\tt TRUE} if successful, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+{\tt true} if successful, {\tt false} otherwise.
% VZ: commenting this out as: (a) the docs are wrong (you can't replace
% anything), (b) wxTextCtrl doesn't have any OnChar() anyhow
\wxheading{Return value}
-{\tt TRUE} on success, {\tt FALSE} on failure (most likely due to a too large position
+{\tt true} on success, {\tt false} on failure (most likely due to a too large position
parameter).
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-{\tt TRUE} if the operation was successful, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+{\tt true} if the operation was successful, {\tt false} otherwise.
\membersection{wxTextCtrl::SetDefaultStyle}\label{wxtextctrlsetdefaultstyle}
\wxheading{Return value}
-{\tt TRUE} on success, {\tt FALSE} if an error occured - may also mean that
+{\tt true} on success, {\tt false} if an error occured - may also mean that
the styles are not supported under this platform.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{editable}{If {\tt TRUE}, the control is editable. If {\tt FALSE}, the control is read-only.}
+\docparam{editable}{If {\tt true}, the control is editable. If {\tt false}, the control is read-only.}
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-{\tt TRUE} on success, {\tt FALSE} if an error occured - may also mean that
+{\tt true} on success, {\tt false} if an error occured - may also mean that
the styles are not supported under this platform.
\membersection{wxTextCtrl::SetValue}\label{wxtextctrlsetvalue}
\func{virtual void}{SetValue}{\param{const wxString\& }{ value}}
Sets the text value and marks the control as not-modified (which means that
-\helpref{IsModified}{wxtextctrlismodified} would return {\tt FALSE} immediately
+\helpref{IsModified}{wxtextctrlismodified} would return {\tt false} immediately
after the call to SetValue).
Note that this function will generate a {\tt wxEVT\_COMMAND\_TEXT\_UPDATED}
\constfunc{bool}{Exists}{\void}
-Return TRUE if file exists - the name of the file should have been specified
+Return true if file exists - the name of the file should have been specified
in the constructor before calling Exists().
\membersection{wxTextFile::IsOpened}\label{wxtextfileisopened}
\constfunc{bool}{IsOpened}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the file is currently opened.
+Returns true if the file is currently opened.
\membersection{wxTextFile::GetLineCount}\label{wxtextfilegetlinecount}
\constfunc{bool}{Eof}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the current line is the last one.
+Returns true if the current line is the last one.
\membersection{wxTextFile::GetEOL}\label{wxtextfilegeteol}
it is used to convert all lines to multibyte representation before writing them
them to physical file.
-Returns TRUE if operation succeeded, FALSE if it failed.
+Returns true if operation succeeded, false if it failed.
{\bf wxMODERN} is a fixed pitch font; the others are either fixed or variable pitch.}
\twocolitem{Style}{The value can be {\bf wxNORMAL, wxSLANT} or {\bf wxITALIC}.}
\twocolitem{Weight}{The value can be {\bf wxNORMAL, wxLIGHT} or {\bf wxBOLD}.}
-\twocolitem{Underlining}{The value can be TRUE or FALSE.}
+\twocolitem{Underlining}{The value can be true or false.}
\twocolitem{Face name}{An optional string specifying the actual typeface to be used. If NULL,
a default typeface will chosen based on the family.}
\twocolitem{Encoding}{The font encoding (see {\bf wxFONTENCODING\_XXX}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if it is pressed, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+Returns {\tt true} if it is pressed, {\tt false} otherwise.
\membersection{wxToggleButton::SetValue}\label{wxtogglebuttonsetvalue}
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{state}{If {\tt TRUE}, the button is pressed.}
+\docparam{state}{If {\tt true}, the button is pressed.}
\constfunc{bool}{IsAlive}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the thread is alive (i.e. started and not terminating).
+Returns true if the thread is alive (i.e. started and not terminating).
\membersection{wxThread::IsDetached}\label{wxthreadisdetached}
\constfunc{bool}{IsDetached}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the thread is of the detached kind, FALSE if it is a joinable one.
+Returns true if the thread is of the detached kind, false if it is a joinable one.
\membersection{wxThread::IsMain}\label{wxthreadismain}
\func{static bool}{IsMain}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the calling thread is the main application thread.
+Returns true if the calling thread is the main application thread.
\membersection{wxThread::IsPaused}\label{wxthreadispaused}
\constfunc{bool}{IsPaused}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the thread is paused.
+Returns true if the thread is paused.
\membersection{wxThread::IsRunning}\label{wxthreadisrunning}
\constfunc{bool}{IsRunning}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the thread is running.
+Returns true if the thread is running.
\membersection{wxThread::Kill}\label{wxthreadkill}
number of threads that the system tries to schedule to run in parallel.
The value of $0$ for {\it level} may be used to set the default one.
-Returns TRUE on success or FALSE otherwise (for example, if this function is
+Returns true on success or false otherwise (for example, if this function is
not implemented for this platform - currently everything except Solaris).
\membersection{wxThread::TestDestroy}\label{wxthreadtestdestroy}
This function should be called periodically by the thread to ensure that calls
to \helpref{Pause}{wxthreadpause} and \helpref{Delete}{wxthreaddelete} will
-work. If it returns TRUE, the thread should exit as soon as possible.
+work. If it returns true, the thread should exit as soon as possible.
\membersection{wxThread::This}\label{wxthreadthis}
Copy constructor.
-\func{}{wxTime}{\param{hourTy }{h}, \param{minuteTy }{m}, \param{secondTy }{s = 0}, \param{bool }{dst = FALSE}}
+\func{}{wxTime}{\param{hourTy }{h}, \param{minuteTy }{m}, \param{secondTy }{s = 0}, \param{bool }{dst = false}}
Initialize using hours, minutes, seconds, and whether DST time.
-\func{}{wxTime}{\param{const wxDate\&}{ date}, \param{hourTy }{h = 0}, \param{minuteTy }{m = 0}, \param{secondTy }{s = 0}, \param{bool }{dst = FALSE}}
+\func{}{wxTime}{\param{const wxDate\&}{ date}, \param{hourTy }{h = 0}, \param{minuteTy }{m = 0}, \param{secondTy }{s = 0}, \param{bool }{dst = false}}
Initialize using a \helpref{wxDate}{wxdate} object, hours, minutes, seconds, and whether DST time.
\constfunc{bool}{IsBetween}{\param{const wxTime\& }{a}, \param{const wxTime\& }{b}}
-Returns TRUE if this time is between the two given times.
+Returns true if this time is between the two given times.
\membersection{wxTime::Max}\label{wxtimemax}
\constfunc{bool}{IsOneShot}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the timer is one shot, i.e.\ if it will stop after firing the
+Returns {\tt true} if the timer is one shot, i.e.\ if it will stop after firing the
first notification automatically.
\membersection{wxTimer::IsRunning}\label{wxtimerisrunning}
\constfunc{bool}{IsRunning}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the timer is running, {\tt FALSE} if it is stopped.
+Returns {\tt true} if the timer is running, {\tt false} if it is stopped.
\membersection{wxTimer::Notify}\label{wxtimernotify}
\membersection{wxTimer::Start}\label{wxtimerstart}
-\func{bool}{Start}{\param{int}{milliseconds = -1}, \param{bool }{oneShot = {\tt FALSE}}}
+\func{bool}{Start}{\param{int}{milliseconds = -1}, \param{bool }{oneShot = {\tt false}}}
(Re)starts the timer. If {\it milliseconds}\/ parameter is -1 (value by default),
-the previous value is used. Returns {\tt FALSE} if the timer could not be started,
-{\tt TRUE} otherwise (in MS Windows timers are a limited resource).
+the previous value is used. Returns {\tt false} if the timer could not be started,
+{\tt true} otherwise (in MS Windows timers are a limited resource).
-If {\it oneShot}\/ is {\tt FALSE} (the default), the \helpref{Notify}{wxtimernotify}
-function will be called repeatedly until the timer is stopped. If {\tt TRUE},
+If {\it oneShot}\/ is {\tt false} (the default), the \helpref{Notify}{wxtimernotify}
+function will be called repeatedly until the timer is stopped. If {\tt true},
it will be called only once and the timer will stop automatically. To make your
code more readable you may also use the following symbolic constants
\twocolwidtha{5cm}%
\constfunc{bool}{IsEqualTo}{\param{const wxTimeSpan\& }{ts}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if two timespans are equal.
+Returns {\tt true} if two timespans are equal.
\membersection{wxTimeSpan::IsLongerThan}\label{wxtimespanislongerthan}
\constfunc{bool}{IsLongerThan}{\param{const wxTimeSpan\& }{ts}}
Compares two timespans: works with the absolute values, i.e. -2
-hours is longer than 1 hour. Also, it will return {\tt FALSE} if
+hours is longer than 1 hour. Also, it will return {\tt false} if
the timespans are equal in absolute value.
\membersection{wxTimeSpan::IsNegative}\label{wxtimespanisnegative}
\constfunc{bool}{IsNegative}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the timespan is negative.
+Returns {\tt true} if the timespan is negative.
\membersection{wxTimeSpan::IsNull}\label{wxtimespanisnull}
\constfunc{bool}{IsNull}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the timespan is empty.
+Returns {\tt true} if the timespan is empty.
\membersection{wxTimeSpan::IsPositive}\label{wxtimespanispositive}
\constfunc{bool}{IsPositive}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the timespan is positive.
+Returns {\tt true} if the timespan is positive.
\membersection{wxTimeSpan::IsShorterThan}\label{wxtimespanisshorterthan}
\constfunc{bool}{IsShorterThan}{\param{const wxTimeSpan\& }{ts}}
Compares two timespans: works with the absolute values, i.e. 1
-hour is shorter than -2 hours. Also, it will return {\tt FALSE} if
+hour is shorter than -2 hours. Also, it will return {\tt false} if
the timespans are equal in absolute value.
\membersection{wxTimeSpan::Minutes}\label{wxtimespanminutes}
{
wxFontEncoding alternative;
if (wxTheFontMapper->GetAltForEncoding(enc, &alternative,
- facename, FALSE))
+ facename, false))
{
wxEncodingConverted encconv;
if (!encconv.Init(enc, alternative))
Then \helpref{GetNextToken}{wxstringtokenizergetnexttoken} may be called
repeatedly until it \helpref{HasMoreTokens}{wxstringtokenizerhasmoretokens}
-returns FALSE.
+returns false.
For example:
\constfunc{bool}{HasMoreTokens}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the tokenizer has further tokens, FALSE if none are left.
+Returns true if the tokenizer has further tokens, false if none are left.
\membersection{wxStringTokenizer::GetNextToken}\label{wxstringtokenizergetnexttoken}
Note that it is unnecessary to call \helpref{Realize}{wxtoolbarrealize} for the
change to take place, it will happen immediately.
-Returns TRUE if the tool was deleted, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the tool was deleted, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\docparam{toolId}{Tool to enable or disable.}
-\docparam{enable}{If TRUE, enables the tool, otherwise disables it.}
+\docparam{enable}{If true, enables the tool, otherwise disables it.}
{\bf NB:} This function should only be called after
\helpref{Realize}{wxtoolbarrealize}.
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the tool is enabled, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the tool is enabled, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the tool is toggled on, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the tool is toggled on, false otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\func{wxToolBarTool *}{InsertTool}{\param{size\_t }{pos},\rtfsp
\param{int}{ toolId}, \param{const wxBitmap\&}{ bitmap1},\rtfsp
-\param{const wxBitmap\&}{ bitmap2 = wxNullBitmap}, \param{bool}{ isToggle = FALSE},\rtfsp
+\param{const wxBitmap\&}{ bitmap2 = wxNullBitmap}, \param{bool}{ isToggle = false},\rtfsp
\param{wxObject* }{clientData = NULL}, \param{const wxString\& }{shortHelpString = ""}, \param{const wxString\& }{longHelpString = ""}}
Inserts the tool with the specified attributes into the toolbar at the given
\docparam{toolId}{The identifier passed to \helpref{wxToolBar::AddTool}{wxtoolbaraddtool}.}
-\docparam{toggleDown}{TRUE if the tool is a toggle and the toggle is down, otherwise is FALSE.}
+\docparam{toggleDown}{true if the tool is a toggle and the toggle is down, otherwise is false.}
\wxheading{Return value}
-If the tool is a toggle and this function returns FALSE, the toggle
+If the tool is a toggle and this function returns false, the toggle
toggle state (internal and visual) will not be changed. This provides a way of
specifying that toggle operations are not permitted in some circumstances.
\docparam{toolId}{Tool in question.}
-\docparam{toggle}{If TRUE, toggles the tool on, otherwise toggles it off.}
+\docparam{toggle}{If true, toggles the tool on, otherwise toggles it off.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
{
wxPrinter printer;
MyPrintout printout("My printout");
- printer.Print(this, &printout, TRUE);
+ printer.Print(this, &printout, true);
break;
}
case WXPRINT_PREVIEW:
wxPreviewFrame *frame = new wxPreviewFrame(preview, this, "Demo Print Preview", 100, 100, 600, 650);
frame->Centre(wxBOTH);
frame->Initialize();
- frame->Show(TRUE);
+ frame->Show(true);
break;
}
case WXPRINT_PRINT_SETUP:
{
wxPrintDialog printerDialog(this);
- printerDialog.GetPrintData().SetSetupDialog(TRUE);
- printerDialog.Show(TRUE);
+ printerDialog.GetPrintData().SetSetupDialog(true);
+ printerDialog.Show(true);
break;
}
\end{verbatim}
\func{void}{EndEditLabel}{\param{bool }{cancelEdit}}
-Ends label editing. If {\it cancelEdit} is {\tt TRUE}, the edit will be cancelled.
+Ends label editing. If {\it cancelEdit} is {\tt true}, the edit will be cancelled.
This function is currently supported under Windows only.
\membersection{wxTreeCtrl::GetBoundingRect}\label{wxtreectrlgetitemrect}
-\constfunc{bool}{GetBoundingRect}{\param{const wxTreeItemId\&}{ item}, \param{wxRect\& }{rect}, \param{bool }{textOnly = {\tt FALSE}}}
+\constfunc{bool}{GetBoundingRect}{\param{const wxTreeItemId\&}{ item}, \param{wxRect\& }{rect}, \param{bool }{textOnly = {\tt false}}}
-Retrieves the rectangle bounding the {\it item}. If {\it textOnly} is {\tt TRUE},
+Retrieves the rectangle bounding the {\it item}. If {\it textOnly} is {\tt true},
only the rectangle around the item's label will be returned, otherwise the
item's image is also taken into account.
-The return value is {\tt TRUE} if the rectangle was successfully retrieved or {\tt FALSE}
+The return value is {\tt true} if the rectangle was successfully retrieved or {\tt false}
if it was not (in this case {\it rect} is not changed) - for example, if the
item is currently invisible.
\membersection{wxTreeCtrl::GetChildrenCount}\label{wxtreectrlgetchildrencount}
-\constfunc{size\_t}{GetChildrenCount}{\param{const wxTreeItemId\&}{ item}, \param{bool}{ recursively = {\tt TRUE}}}
+\constfunc{size\_t}{GetChildrenCount}{\param{const wxTreeItemId\&}{ item}, \param{bool}{ recursively = {\tt true}}}
-Returns the number of items in the branch. If {\it recursively} is {\tt TRUE}, returns the total number
+Returns the number of items in the branch. If {\it recursively} is {\tt true}, returns the total number
of descendants, otherwise only one level of children is counted.
\membersection{wxTreeCtrl::GetCount}\label{wxtreectrlgetcount}
\constfunc{bool}{IsBold}{\param{const wxTreeItemId\& }{item}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the given item is in bold state.
+Returns {\tt true} if the given item is in bold state.
See also: \helpref{SetItemBold}{wxtreectrlsetitembold}
\constfunc{bool}{IsExpanded}{\param{const wxTreeItemId\&}{ item}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the item is expanded (only makes sense if it has children).
+Returns {\tt true} if the item is expanded (only makes sense if it has children).
\membersection{wxTreeCtrl::IsSelected}\label{wxtreectrlisselected}
\constfunc{bool}{IsSelected}{\param{const wxTreeItemId\&}{ item}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the item is selected.
+Returns {\tt true} if the item is selected.
\membersection{wxTreeCtrl::IsVisible}\label{wxtreectrlisvisible}
\constfunc{bool}{IsVisible}{\param{const wxTreeItemId\&}{ item}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the item is visible (it might be outside the view, or not expanded).
+Returns {\tt true} if the item is visible (it might be outside the view, or not expanded).
\membersection{wxTreeCtrl::ItemHasChildren}\label{wxtreectrlitemhaschildren}
\constfunc{bool}{ItemHasChildren}{\param{const wxTreeItemId\&}{ item}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the item has children.
+Returns {\tt true} if the item has children.
\membersection{wxTreeCtrl::OnCompareItems}\label{wxtreectrloncompareitems}
\membersection{wxTreeCtrl::SetItemBold}\label{wxtreectrlsetitembold}
-\func{void}{SetItemBold}{\param{const wxTreeItemId\& }{item}, \param{bool}{ bold = {\tt TRUE}}}
+\func{void}{SetItemBold}{\param{const wxTreeItemId\& }{item}, \param{bool}{ bold = {\tt true}}}
-Makes item appear in bold font if {\it bold} parameter is {\tt TRUE} or resets it to
+Makes item appear in bold font if {\it bold} parameter is {\tt true} or resets it to
the normal state.
See also: \helpref{IsBold}{wxtreectrlisbold}
\membersection{wxTreeCtrl::SetItemHasChildren}\label{wxtreectrlsetitemhaschildren}
-\func{void}{SetItemHasChildren}{\param{const wxTreeItemId\&}{ item}, \param{bool }{hasChildren = {\tt TRUE}}}
+\func{void}{SetItemHasChildren}{\param{const wxTreeItemId\&}{ item}, \param{bool }{hasChildren = {\tt true}}}
Force appearance of the button next to the item. This is useful to
allow the user to expand the items which don't have any children now,
\constfunc{bool}{IsEditCancelled}{}
-Returns TRUE if the label edit was cancelled. This should be
+Returns true if the label edit was cancelled. This should be
called from within an EVT\_TREE\_END\_LABEL\_EDIT handler.
\constfunc{bool}{GetOrientation}{\void}
-Gets the orientation: TRUE means top-to-bottom, FALSE means left-to-right (the default).
+Gets the orientation: true means top-to-bottom, false means left-to-right (the default).
\membersection{wxTreeLayout::GetTopMargin}
\func{void}{SetOrientation}{\param{bool}{ orientation}}
-Sets the tree orientation: TRUE means top-to-bottom, FALSE means left-to-right (the default).
+Sets the tree orientation: true means top-to-bottom, false means left-to-right (the default).
\membersection{wxTreeLayout::SetTopNode}\label{wxtreelayoutsettopnode}
wxResourceParseData(panel3);
...
- return TRUE;
+ return true;
}
\end{verbatim}
In order to query the size of notebook page, this page needs to have its
own sizer, otherwise the wxNotebookSizer will ignore it. Notebook pages
get their sizer by assigning one to them using \helpref{wxWindow::SetSizer}{wxwindowsetsizer}
-and setting the auto-layout option to TRUE using
+and setting the auto-layout option to true using
\helpref{wxWindow::SetAutoLayout}{wxwindowsetautolayout}. Here is one
example showing how to add a notebook page that the notebook sizer is
aware of:
// Add controls to panel and panelsizer here...
- panel->SetAutoLayout( TRUE );
+ panel->SetAutoLayout( true );
panel->SetSizer( panelsizer );
\end{verbatim}
rightWindow = new MyWindow(splitter);
rightWindow->SetScrollbars(20, 20, 50, 50);
- rightWindow->Show(FALSE);
+ rightWindow->Show(false);
splitter->Initialize(leftWindow);
{
if ( splitter->IsSplit() )
splitter->Unsplit();
- leftWindow->Show(TRUE);
- rightWindow->Show(TRUE);
+ leftWindow->Show(true);
+ rightWindow->Show(true);
splitter->SplitVertically( leftWindow, rightWindow );
}
{
if ( splitter->IsSplit() )
splitter->Unsplit();
- leftWindow->Show(TRUE);
- rightWindow->Show(TRUE);
+ leftWindow->Show(true);
+ rightWindow->Show(true);
splitter->SplitHorizontally( leftWindow, rightWindow );
}
functions are not standard at all. This is why in addition to all wxString
functions, there are also a few global string functions which try to correct
these problems: \helpref{wxIsEmpty()}{wxisempty} verifies whether the string
-is empty (returning {\tt TRUE} for {\tt NULL} pointers),
+is empty (returning {\tt true} for {\tt NULL} pointers),
\helpref{wxStrlen()}{wxstrlen} also handles NULLs correctly and returns 0 for
them and \helpref{wxStricmp()}{wxstricmp} is just a platform-independent
version of case-insensitive string comparison function known either as
// Calculate the tab width for 4 tabs, based on a view width of 326 and
// the current horizontal spacing. Adjust the view width to exactly fit
// the tabs.
- view->CalculateTabWidth(4, TRUE);
+ view->CalculateTabWidth(4, true);
if (!view->AddTab(TEST_TAB_CAT, wxString("Cat")))
return;
// function that lays out default decorations and the remaining content window.
wxSizeEvent event(wxSize(-1, -1), frame->GetId());
frame->OnSize(event);
- frame->Show(TRUE);
+ frame->Show(true);
frame->SetStatusText("Hello, wxWindows");
SetTopWindow(frame);
- return TRUE;
+ return true;
}
bool MyApp::InitToolbar(wxToolBar* toolBar)
#endif
int currentX = 5;
- toolBar->AddTool(wxID_NEW, *(toolBarBitmaps[0]), wxNullBitmap, FALSE, currentX, -1, (wxObject *) NULL, "New file");
+ toolBar->AddTool(wxID_NEW, *(toolBarBitmaps[0]), wxNullBitmap, false, currentX, -1, (wxObject *) NULL, "New file");
currentX += width + 5;
- toolBar->AddTool(wxID_OPEN, *(toolBarBitmaps[1]), wxNullBitmap, FALSE, currentX, -1, (wxObject *) NULL, "Open file");
+ toolBar->AddTool(wxID_OPEN, *(toolBarBitmaps[1]), wxNullBitmap, false, currentX, -1, (wxObject *) NULL, "Open file");
currentX += width + 5;
- toolBar->AddTool(wxID_SAVE, *(toolBarBitmaps[2]), wxNullBitmap, FALSE, currentX, -1, (wxObject *) NULL, "Save file");
+ toolBar->AddTool(wxID_SAVE, *(toolBarBitmaps[2]), wxNullBitmap, false, currentX, -1, (wxObject *) NULL, "Save file");
currentX += width + 5;
toolBar->AddSeparator();
- toolBar->AddTool(wxID_COPY, *(toolBarBitmaps[3]), wxNullBitmap, FALSE, currentX, -1, (wxObject *) NULL, "Copy");
+ toolBar->AddTool(wxID_COPY, *(toolBarBitmaps[3]), wxNullBitmap, false, currentX, -1, (wxObject *) NULL, "Copy");
currentX += width + 5;
- toolBar->AddTool(wxID_CUT, *(toolBarBitmaps[4]), wxNullBitmap, FALSE, currentX, -1, (wxObject *) NULL, "Cut");
+ toolBar->AddTool(wxID_CUT, *(toolBarBitmaps[4]), wxNullBitmap, false, currentX, -1, (wxObject *) NULL, "Cut");
currentX += width + 5;
- toolBar->AddTool(wxID_PASTE, *(toolBarBitmaps[5]), wxNullBitmap, FALSE, currentX, -1, (wxObject *) NULL, "Paste");
+ toolBar->AddTool(wxID_PASTE, *(toolBarBitmaps[5]), wxNullBitmap, false, currentX, -1, (wxObject *) NULL, "Paste");
currentX += width + 5;
toolBar->AddSeparator();
- toolBar->AddTool(wxID_PRINT, *(toolBarBitmaps[6]), wxNullBitmap, FALSE, currentX, -1, (wxObject *) NULL, "Print");
+ toolBar->AddTool(wxID_PRINT, *(toolBarBitmaps[6]), wxNullBitmap, false, currentX, -1, (wxObject *) NULL, "Print");
currentX += width + 5;
toolBar->AddSeparator();
- toolBar->AddTool(wxID_HELP, *(toolBarBitmaps[7]), wxNullBitmap, FALSE, currentX, -1, (wxObject *) NULL, "Help");
+ toolBar->AddTool(wxID_HELP, *(toolBarBitmaps[7]), wxNullBitmap, false, currentX, -1, (wxObject *) NULL, "Help");
toolBar->Realize();
for (i = 0; i < 8; i++)
delete toolBarBitmaps[i];
- return TRUE;
+ return true;
}
// wxID_HELP will be processed for the 'About' menu and the toolbar help button.
void MyFrame::OnQuit(wxCommandEvent& WXUNUSED(event))
{
- Close(TRUE);
+ Close(true);
}
void MyFrame::OnAbout(wxCommandEvent& WXUNUSED(event))
the validator should store the data internally.
The \helpref{wxValidator::Validate}{wxvalidatorvalidate} member function should return
-TRUE if the data in the control (not the C++ variable) is valid. It should also show
+true if the data in the control (not the C++ variable) is valid. It should also show
an appropriate message if data was not valid.
The \helpref{wxValidator::TransferToWindow}{wxvalidatortransfertowindow} member function should
window.}
When the user clicks on a button, for example the OK button, the application should
-first call \helpref{wxWindow::Validate}{wxwindowvalidate}, which returns FALSE if
+first call \helpref{wxWindow::Validate}{wxwindowvalidate}, which returns false if
any of the child window validators failed to validate the window data. The button handler
should return immediately if validation failed. Secondly, the application should
call \helpref{wxWindow::TransferDataFromWindow}{wxwindowtransferdatafromwindow} and
else
{
SetReturnCode(wxID_OK);
- this->Show(FALSE);
+ this->Show(false);
}
}
}
MyFrame *frame = new MyFrame("XML resources demo",
wxPoint(50, 50), wxSize(450, 340));
- frame->Show(TRUE);
- return TRUE;
+ frame->Show(true);
+ return true;
}
// ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
// event handlers
void MyFrame::OnQuit(wxCommandEvent& WXUNUSED(event))
{
- // TRUE is to force the frame to close
- Close(TRUE);
+ // true is to force the frame to close
+ Close(true);
}
void MyFrame::OnAbout(wxCommandEvent& WXUNUSED(event))
\wxheading{Return value}
-Return TRUE to accept the data, FALSE to veto the operation.
+Return true to accept the data, false to veto the operation.
\member{bool}{m\_checked}
-TRUE if the element should be checked, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the element should be checked, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxUpdateUIEvent::m\_enabled}
\member{bool}{m\_checked}
-TRUE if the element should be enabled, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the element should be enabled, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxUpdateUIEvent::m\_setChecked}
\member{bool}{m\_setChecked}
-TRUE if the application has set the {\bf m\_checked} member.
+true if the application has set the {\bf m\_checked} member.
\membersection{wxUpdateUIEvent::m\_setEnabled}
\member{bool}{m\_setEnabled}
-TRUE if the application has set the {\bf m\_enabled} member.
+true if the application has set the {\bf m\_enabled} member.
\membersection{wxUpdateUIEvent::m\_setText}
\member{bool}{m\_setText}
-TRUE if the application has set the {\bf m\_text} member.
+true if the application has set the {\bf m\_text} member.
\membersection{wxUpdateUIEvent::m\_text}
\constfunc{bool}{GetChecked}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the UI element should be checked.
+Returns true if the UI element should be checked.
\membersection{wxUpdateUIEvent::GetEnabled}\label{wxupdateuieventgetenabled}
\constfunc{bool}{GetEnabled}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the UI element should be enabled.
+Returns true if the UI element should be enabled.
\membersection{wxUpdateUIEvent::GetSetChecked}\label{wxupdateuieventgetsetchecked}
\constfunc{bool}{GetSetChecked}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the application has called {\bf SetChecked}. For wxWindows internal use only.
+Returns true if the application has called {\bf SetChecked}. For wxWindows internal use only.
\membersection{wxUpdateUIEvent::GetSetEnabled}\label{wxupdateuieventgetsetenabled}
\constfunc{bool}{GetSetEnabled}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the application has called {\bf SetEnabled}. For wxWindows internal use only.
+Returns true if the application has called {\bf SetEnabled}. For wxWindows internal use only.
\membersection{wxUpdateUIEvent::GetSetText}\label{wxupdateuieventgetsettext}
\constfunc{bool}{GetSetText}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the application has called {\bf SetText}. For wxWindows internal use only.
+Returns true if the application has called {\bf SetText}. For wxWindows internal use only.
\membersection{wxUpdateUIEvent::GetText}\label{wxupdateuieventgettext}
\membersection{wxValidator::SetBellOnError}{wxvalidatorsetbellonerror}
-\func{void}{SetBellOnError}{\param{bool}{ doIt = TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetBellOnError}{\param{bool}{ doIt = true}}
This functions switches on or turns off the error sound produced by the
validators if an invalid key is pressed.
\func{virtual bool}{TransferToWindow}{}
This overridable function is called when the value in the window must be
-transferred to the validator. Return FALSE if there is a problem.
+transferred to the validator. Return false if there is a problem.
\membersection{wxValidator::TransferToWindow}\label{wxvalidatortransfertowindow}
\func{virtual bool}{TransferToWindow}{}
This overridable function is called when the value associated with the validator must be
-transferred to the window. Return FALSE if there is a problem.
+transferred to the window. Return false if there is a problem.
\membersection{wxValidator::Validate}\label{wxvalidatorvalidate}
\func{virtual bool}{Validate}{\param{wxWindow*}{ parent}}
This overridable function is called when the value in the associated window must be validated.
-Return FALSE if the value in the window is not valid; you may pop up an error dialog.
+Return false if the value in the window is not valid; you may pop up an error dialog.
\docparam{valPtr}{A pointer to a wxString variable that contains the value. This variable
should have a lifetime equal to or longer than the validator lifetime (which is usually
-determined by the lifetime of the window). % If NULL, the validator uses its own internal storage for the value. NOT TRUE
+determined by the lifetime of the window). % If NULL, the validator uses its own internal storage for the value. NOT true
}
\membersection{wxTextValidator::\destruct{wxTextValidator}}
\constfunc{bool}{IsNull}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if there is no data associated with this variant, FALSE if there is data.
+Returns true if there is no data associated with this variant, false if there is data.
\membersection{wxVariant::IsType}\label{wxvariantistype}
\constfunc{bool}{IsType}{\param{const wxString\&}{ type}}
-Returns TRUE if {\it type} matches the type of the variant, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if {\it type} matches the type of the variant, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxVariant::MakeNull}\label{wxvariantmakenull}
\constfunc{bool}{Member}{\param{const wxVariant\&}{ value}}
-Returns TRUE if {\it value} matches an element in the list.
+Returns true if {\it value} matches an element in the list.
\membersection{wxVariant::NullList}\label{wxvariantnulllist}
\constfunc{bool}{Eq}{\param{wxVariantData\&}{ data}}
-Returns TRUE if this object is equal to {\it data}.
+Returns true if this object is equal to {\it data}.
\membersection{wxVariantData::GetType}\label{wxvariantdatagettype}
\membersection{wxView::Close}
-\func{virtual bool}{Close}{\param{bool}{ deleteWindow = TRUE}}
+\func{virtual bool}{Close}{\param{bool}{ deleteWindow = true}}
-Closes the view by calling OnClose. If {\it deleteWindow} is TRUE, this function should
+Closes the view by calling OnClose. If {\it deleteWindow} is true, this function should
delete the window associated with the view.
\membersection{wxView::GetDocument}
may wish to do some cleaning up operations in this function, {\it if} a
call to wxDocument::Close succeeded. For example, if your application's
all share the same window, you need to disassociate the window from the view
-and perhaps clear the window. If {\it deleteWindow} is TRUE, delete the
+and perhaps clear the window. If {\it deleteWindow} is true, delete the
frame associated with the view.
\membersection{wxView::OnClosingDocument}\label{wxviewonclosingdocument}
or a derived class. This wxDocChildFrame provides user interface
elements to view and/or edit the contents of the wxDocument.
-By default, simply returns TRUE. If the function returns FALSE, the
+By default, simply returns true. If the function returns false, the
view will be deleted.
\membersection{wxView::OnCreatePrintout}
Default constructor.
-\func{}{wxWave}{\param{const wxString\&}{ fileName}, \param{bool}{ isResource = FALSE}}
+\func{}{wxWave}{\param{const wxString\&}{ fileName}, \param{bool}{ isResource = false}}
Constructs a wave object from a file or resource. Call \helpref{wxWave::IsOk}{wxwaveisok} to
determine whether this succeeded.
\docparam{fileName}{The filename or Windows resource.}
-\docparam{isResource}{TRUE if {\it fileName} is a resource, FALSE if it is a filename.}
+\docparam{isResource}{true if {\it fileName} is a resource, false if it is a filename.}
\membersection{wxWave::\destruct{wxWave}}
\membersection{wxWave::Create}\label{wxwavecreate}
-\func{bool}{Create}{\param{const wxString\&}{ fileName}, \param{bool}{ isResource = FALSE}}
+\func{bool}{Create}{\param{const wxString\&}{ fileName}, \param{bool}{ isResource = false}}
Constructs a wave object from a file or resource.
\docparam{fileName}{The filename or Windows resource.}
-\docparam{isResource}{TRUE if {\it fileName} is a resource, FALSE if it is a filename.}
+\docparam{isResource}{true if {\it fileName} is a resource, false if it is a filename.}
\wxheading{Return value}
-TRUE if the call was successful, FALSE otherwise.
+true if the call was successful, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxWave::IsOk}\label{wxwaveisok}
\constfunc{bool}{IsOk}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the object contains a successfully loaded file or resource, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the object contains a successfully loaded file or resource, false otherwise.
\membersection{wxWave::Play}\label{wxwaveplay}
-\constfunc{bool}{Play}{\param{bool}{ async = TRUE}, \param{bool}{ looped = FALSE}}
+\constfunc{bool}{Play}{\param{bool}{ async = true}, \param{bool}{ looped = false}}
Plays the wave file synchronously or asynchronously, looped or single-shot.
\membersection{wxWindow::Close}\label{wxwindowclose}
-\func{bool}{Close}{\param{bool}{ force = {\tt FALSE}}}
+\func{bool}{Close}{\param{bool}{ force = {\tt false}}}
This function simply generates a \helpref{wxCloseEvent}{wxcloseevent} whose
handler usually tries to close the window. It doesn't close the window itself,
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{force}{{\tt FALSE} if the window's close handler should be able to veto the destruction
-of this window, {\tt TRUE} if it cannot.}
+\docparam{force}{{\tt false} if the window's close handler should be able to veto the destruction
+of this window, {\tt true} if it cannot.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\wxheading{Return value}
-{\tt TRUE} if the window has either been successfully deleted, or it has been added
+{\tt true} if the window has either been successfully deleted, or it has been added
to the list of windows pending real deletion.
\membersection{wxWindow::DestroyChildren}
\func{void}{Disable}{\void}
-Disables the window, same as \helpref{Enable({\tt FALSE})}{wxwindowenable}.
+Disables the window, same as \helpref{Enable({\tt false})}{wxwindowenable}.
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the window has been disabled, {\tt FALSE} if it had been
+Returns {\tt true} if the window has been disabled, {\tt false} if it had been
already disabled before the call to this function.
\membersection{wxWindow::DragAcceptFiles}\label{wxwindowdragacceptfiles}
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{accept}{If {\tt TRUE}, the window is eligible for drop file events. If {\tt FALSE}, the window
+\docparam{accept}{If {\tt true}, the window is eligible for drop file events. If {\tt false}, the window
will not accept drop file events.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\membersection{wxWindow::Enable}\label{wxwindowenable}
-\func{virtual bool}{Enable}{\param{bool}{ enable = {\tt TRUE}}}
+\func{virtual bool}{Enable}{\param{bool}{ enable = {\tt true}}}
Enable or disable the window for user input. Note that when a parent window is
disabled, all of its children are disabled as well and they are reenabled again
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{enable}{If {\tt TRUE}, enables the window for input. If {\tt FALSE}, disables the window.}
+\docparam{enable}{If {\tt true}, enables the window for input. If {\tt false}, disables the window.}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the window has been enabled or disabled, {\tt FALSE} if
+Returns {\tt true} if the window has been enabled or disabled, {\tt false} if
nothing was done, i.e. if the window had already been in the specified state.
\wxheading{See also}
\constfunc{virtual void}{GetTextExtent}{\param{const wxString\& }{string}, \param{int* }{x}, \param{int* }{y},
\param{int* }{descent = NULL}, \param{int* }{externalLeading = NULL},
- \param{const wxFont* }{font = NULL}, \param{bool}{ use16 = {\tt FALSE}}}
+ \param{const wxFont* }{font = NULL}, \param{bool}{ use16 = {\tt false}}}
Gets the dimensions of the string as it would be drawn on the
window with the currently selected font.
\docparam{font}{Font to use instead of the current window font (optional).}
-\docparam{use16}{If {\tt TRUE}, {\it string} contains 16-bit characters. The default is {\tt FALSE}.}
+\docparam{use16}{If {\tt true}, {\it string} contains 16-bit characters. The default is {\tt false}.}
\pythonnote{In place of a single overloaded method name, wxPython
\constfunc{virtual bool}{HasCapture}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if this window has the current mouse capture.
+Returns true if this window has the current mouse capture.
\wxheading{See also}
\func{bool}{Hide}{\void}
-Equivalent to calling \helpref{Show}{wxwindowshow}({\tt FALSE}).
+Equivalent to calling \helpref{Show}{wxwindowshow}({\tt false}).
\membersection{wxWindow::InitDialog}\label{wxwindowinitdialog}
\constfunc{virtual bool}{IsEnabled}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the window is enabled for input, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+Returns {\tt true} if the window is enabled for input, {\tt false} otherwise.
\wxheading{See also}
\constfunc{bool}{IsExposed}{\param{wxRect }{\&rect}}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the given point or rectangle area has been exposed since the
+Returns {\tt true} if the given point or rectangle area has been exposed since the
last repaint. Call this in an paint event handler to optimize redrawing by
only redrawing those areas, which have been exposed.
\constfunc{virtual bool}{IsRetained}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the window is retained, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+Returns {\tt true} if the window is retained, {\tt false} otherwise.
\wxheading{Remarks}
\constfunc{virtual bool}{IsShown}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the window is shown, {\tt FALSE} if it has been hidden.
+Returns {\tt true} if the window is shown, {\tt false} if it has been hidden.
\membersection{wxWindow::IsTopLevel}\label{wxwindowistoplevel}
\constfunc{bool}{IsTopLevel}{\void}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the given window is a top-level one. Currently all frames and
+Returns {\tt true} if the given window is a top-level one. Currently all frames and
dialogs are considered to be top-level windows (even if they have a parent
window).
\wxheading{Return value}
-{\tt TRUE} if the operation succeeded, otherwise {\tt FALSE}.
+{\tt true} if the operation succeeded, otherwise {\tt false}.
\membersection{wxWindow::Lower}\label{wxwindowlower}
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{flag}{If {\tt TRUE}, this call disables all other windows in the application so that
-the user can only interact with this window. If {\tt FALSE}, the effect is reversed.}
+\docparam{flag}{If {\tt true}, this call disables all other windows in the application so that
+the user can only interact with this window. If {\tt false}, the effect is reversed.}
\membersection{wxWindow::Move}\label{wxwindowmove}
%%
%% \wxheading{Remarks}
%%
-%% If the window is being activated, \helpref{wxActivateEvent::GetActive}{wxactivateeventgetactive} returns {\tt TRUE},
-%% otherwise it returns {\tt FALSE} (it is being deactivated).
+%% If the window is being activated, \helpref{wxActivateEvent::GetActive}{wxactivateeventgetactive} returns {\tt true},
+%% otherwise it returns {\tt false} (it is being deactivated).
%%
%% \wxheading{See also}
%%
%%
%% \wxheading{Return value}
%%
-%% If {\tt TRUE} is returned by OnClose, the window will be deleted by the system, otherwise the
+%% If {\tt true} is returned by OnClose, the window will be deleted by the system, otherwise the
%% attempt will be ignored. Do not delete the window from within this handler, although
%% you may delete other windows.
%%
\membersection{wxWindow::PopEventHandler}\label{wxwindowpopeventhandler}
-\constfunc{wxEvtHandler*}{PopEventHandler}{\param{bool }{deleteHandler = {\tt FALSE}}}
+\constfunc{wxEvtHandler*}{PopEventHandler}{\param{bool }{deleteHandler = {\tt false}}}
Removes and returns the top-most event handler on the event handler stack.
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{deleteHandler}{If this is {\tt TRUE}, the handler will be deleted after it is removed. The
-default value is {\tt FALSE}.}
+\docparam{deleteHandler}{If this is {\tt true}, the handler will be deleted after it is removed. The
+default value is {\tt false}.}
\wxheading{See also}
\membersection{wxWindow::Refresh}\label{wxwindowrefresh}
-\func{virtual void}{Refresh}{\param{bool}{ eraseBackground = {\tt TRUE}}, \param{const wxRect* }{rect
+\func{virtual void}{Refresh}{\param{bool}{ eraseBackground = {\tt true}}, \param{const wxRect* }{rect
= NULL}}
Causes a message or event to be generated to repaint the
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{eraseBackground}{If {\tt TRUE}, the background will be
+\docparam{eraseBackground}{If {\tt true}, the background will be
erased.}
\docparam{rect}{If non-NULL, only the given rectangle will
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if it was found and {\tt FALSE} otherwise (this also results
+Returns {\tt true} if it was found and {\tt false} otherwise (this also results
in an assert failure so this function should only be called when the
handler is supposed to be there).
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the window was scrolled, {\tt FALSE} if it was already
+Returns {\tt true} if the window was scrolled, {\tt false} if it was already
on top/bottom and nothing was done.
\wxheading{Remarks}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns {\tt TRUE} if the window was scrolled, {\tt FALSE} if it was already
+Returns {\tt true} if the window was scrolled, {\tt false} if it was already
on top/bottom and nothing was done.
\wxheading{Remarks}
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{autoLayout}{Set this to {\tt TRUE} if you wish the Layout function to be called
+\docparam{autoLayout}{Set this to {\tt true} if you wish the Layout function to be called
from within wxWindow::OnSize functions.}
\wxheading{See also}
\func{virtual void}{SetScrollbar}{\param{int }{orientation}, \param{int }{position},\rtfsp
\param{int }{thumbSize}, \param{int }{range},\rtfsp
-\param{bool }{refresh = {\tt TRUE}}}
+\param{bool }{refresh = {\tt true}}}
Sets the scrollbar properties of a built-in scrollbar.
\docparam{range}{The maximum position of the scrollbar.}
-\docparam{refresh}{{\tt TRUE} to redraw the scrollbar, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.}
+\docparam{refresh}{{\tt true} to redraw the scrollbar, {\tt false} otherwise.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\begin{comment}
\membersection{wxWindow::SetScrollPage}\label{wxwindowsetscrollpage}
-\func{virtual void}{SetScrollPage}{\param{int }{orientation}, \param{int }{pageSize}, \param{bool }{refresh = {\tt TRUE}}}
+\func{virtual void}{SetScrollPage}{\param{int }{orientation}, \param{int }{pageSize}, \param{bool }{refresh = {\tt true}}}
Sets the page size of one of the built-in scrollbars.
\docparam{pageSize}{Page size in scroll units.}
-\docparam{refresh}{{\tt TRUE} to redraw the scrollbar, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.}
+\docparam{refresh}{{\tt true} to redraw the scrollbar, {\tt false} otherwise.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\membersection{wxWindow::SetScrollPos}\label{wxwindowsetscrollpos}
-\func{virtual void}{SetScrollPos}{\param{int }{orientation}, \param{int }{pos}, \param{bool }{refresh = {\tt TRUE}}}
+\func{virtual void}{SetScrollPos}{\param{int }{orientation}, \param{int }{pos}, \param{bool }{refresh = {\tt true}}}
Sets the position of one of the built-in scrollbars.
\docparam{pos}{Position in scroll units.}
-\docparam{refresh}{{\tt TRUE} to redraw the scrollbar, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.}
+\docparam{refresh}{{\tt true} to redraw the scrollbar, {\tt false} otherwise.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\begin{comment}
\membersection{wxWindow::SetScrollRange}\label{wxwindowsetscrollrange}
-\func{virtual void}{SetScrollRange}{\param{int }{orientation}, \param{int }{range}, \param{bool }{refresh = {\tt TRUE}}}
+\func{virtual void}{SetScrollRange}{\param{int }{orientation}, \param{int }{range}, \param{bool }{refresh = {\tt true}}}
Sets the range of one of the built-in scrollbars.
\docparam{range}{Scroll range.}
-\docparam{refresh}{{\tt TRUE} to redraw the scrollbar, {\tt FALSE} otherwise.}
+\docparam{refresh}{{\tt true} to redraw the scrollbar, {\tt false} otherwise.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\membersection{wxWindow::SetSizer}\label{wxwindowsetsizer}
-\func{void}{SetSizer}{\param{wxSizer* }{sizer}, \param{bool }{deleteOld=TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetSizer}{\param{wxSizer* }{sizer}, \param{bool }{deleteOld=true}}
Sets the window to have the given layout sizer. The window
will then own the object, and will take care of its deletion.
If an existing layout constraints object is already owned by the
-window, it will be deleted if the deleteOld parameter is TRUE.
+window, it will be deleted if the deleteOld parameter is true.
Note that this function will also call
-\helpref{SetAutoLayout}{wxwindowsetautolayout} implicitly with {\tt TRUE}
-parameter if the {\it sizer}\/ is non-NULL and {\tt FALSE} otherwise.
+\helpref{SetAutoLayout}{wxwindowsetautolayout} implicitly with {\tt true}
+parameter if the {\it sizer}\/ is non-NULL and {\tt false} otherwise.
\wxheading{Parameters}
\docparam{sizer}{The sizer to set. Pass NULL to disassociate and conditionally delete
the window's sizer. See below.}
-\docparam{deleteOld}{If TRUE (the default), this will delete any prexisting sizer.
-Pass FALSE if you wish to handle deleting the old sizer yourself.}
+\docparam{deleteOld}{If true (the default), this will delete any prexisting sizer.
+Pass false if you wish to handle deleting the old sizer yourself.}
\wxheading{Remarks}
\membersection{wxWindow::SetSizerAndFit}\label{wxwindowsetsizerandfit}
-\func{void}{SetSizerAndFit}{\param{wxSizer* }{sizer}, \param{bool }{deleteOld=TRUE}}
+\func{void}{SetSizerAndFit}{\param{wxSizer* }{sizer}, \param{bool }{deleteOld=true}}
The same as \helpref{SetSizer}{wxwindowsetsizer}, except it also sets the size hints
for the window based on the sizer's minimum size.
One such platform is GTK+ where windows can have (very colourful) backgrounds
defined by a user's selected theme.
-Dialogs, notebook pages and the status bar have this flag set to TRUE
+Dialogs, notebook pages and the status bar have this flag set to true
by default so that the default look and feel is simulated best.
\membersection{wxWindow::SetValidator}\label{wxwindowsetvalidator}
\membersection{wxWindow::Show}\label{wxwindowshow}
-\func{virtual bool}{Show}{\param{bool}{ show = {\tt TRUE}}}
+\func{virtual bool}{Show}{\param{bool}{ show = {\tt true}}}
Shows or hides the window. You may need to call \helpref{Raise}{wxwindowraise}
for a top level window if you want to bring it to top, although this is not
\wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{show}{If {\tt TRUE} displays the window. Otherwise, hides it.}
+\docparam{show}{If {\tt true} displays the window. Otherwise, hides it.}
\wxheading{Return value}
-{\tt TRUE} if the window has been shown or hidden or {\tt FALSE} if nothing was
+{\tt true} if the window has been shown or hidden or {\tt false} if nothing was
done because it already was in the requested state.
\wxheading{See also}
\func{virtual bool}{TransferDataFromWindow}{\void}
Transfers values from child controls to data areas specified by their validators. Returns
-{\tt FALSE} if a transfer failed.
+{\tt false} if a transfer failed.
If the window has {\tt wxWS\_EX\_VALIDATE\_RECURSIVELY} extra style flag set,
the method will also call TransferDataFromWindow() of all child windows.
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns {\tt FALSE} if a transfer failed.
+Returns {\tt false} if a transfer failed.
\wxheading{See also}
\wxheading{Return value}
-Returns {\tt FALSE} if any of the validations failed.
+Returns {\tt false} if any of the validations failed.
\wxheading{See also}
\func{virtual bool}{HasNextPage}{\param{wxWizardPage *}{page}}
-Return {\tt TRUE} if this page is not the last one in the wizard. The base
+Return {\tt true} if this page is not the last one in the wizard. The base
class version implements this by calling
\helpref{page->GetNext}{wxwizardpagegetnext} but this could be undesirable if,
for example, the pages are created on demand only.
\func{virtual bool}{HasPrevPage}{\param{wxWizardPage *}{page}}
-Return {\tt TRUE} if this page is not the last one in the wizard. The base
+Return {\tt true} if this page is not the last one in the wizard. The base
class version implements this by calling
\helpref{page->GetPrev}{wxwizardpagegetprev} but this could be undesirable if,
for example, the pages are created on demand only.
\func{bool}{RunWizard}{\param{wxWizardPage* }{firstPage}}
-Executes the wizard starting from the given page, returns {\tt TRUE} if it was
-successfully finished or {\tt FALSE} if user cancelled it. The {\it firstPage}
+Executes the wizard starting from the given page, returns {\tt true} if it was
+successfully finished or {\tt false} if user cancelled it. The {\it firstPage}
can not be {\tt NULL}.
\membersection{wxWizard::SetPageSize}\label{wxwizardsetpagesize}
\membersection{wxWizardEvent::wxWizardEvent}\label{wxwizardeventwxwizardevent}
-\func{}{wxWizardEvent}{\param{wxEventType }{type = wxEVT\_NULL}, \param{int }{id = -1}, \param{bool }{direction = TRUE}}
+\func{}{wxWizardEvent}{\param{wxEventType }{type = wxEVT\_NULL}, \param{int }{id = -1}, \param{bool }{direction = true}}
Constructor. It is not normally used by the user code as the objects of this
type are constructed by wxWizard.
\constfunc{bool}{GetDirection}{\void}
Return the direction in which the page is changing: for {\tt
-EVT\_WIZARD\_PAGE\_CHANGING}, return {\tt TRUE} if we're going forward or
-FALSE otherwise and for {\tt EVT\_WIZARD\_PAGE\_CHANGED} return {\tt TRUE} if
-we came from the previous page and {\tt FALSE} if we returned from the next
+EVT\_WIZARD\_PAGE\_CHANGING}, return {\tt true} if we're going forward or
+false otherwise and for {\tt EVT\_WIZARD\_PAGE\_CHANGED} return {\tt true} if
+we came from the previous page and {\tt false} if we returned from the next
one.
\membersection{wxWizardEvent::GetPage}\label{wxwizardeventgetpage}
insensitive comparisons you should use \helpref{CmpNoCase}{wxstringcmpnocase} or
give a second parameter to IsSameAs. This last function is may be more
convenient if only equality of the strings matters because it returns a boolean
-true value if the strings are the same and not 0 (which is usually FALSE in C)
+true value if the strings are the same and not 0 (which is usually false in C)
as {\tt Cmp()} does.
\helpref{Matches}{wxstringmatches} is a poor man's regular expression matcher:
The string provides functions for conversion to signed and unsigned integer and
floating point numbers. All three functions take a pointer to the variable to
-put the numeric value in and return TRUE if the {\bf entire} string could be
+put the numeric value in and return true if the {\bf entire} string could be
converted to a number.
\helpref{ToLong}{wxstringtolong}\\
\membersection{wxString::Find}\label{wxstringfind}
-\constfunc{int}{Find}{\param{char}{ ch}, \param{bool}{ fromEnd = FALSE}}
+\constfunc{int}{Find}{\param{char}{ ch}, \param{bool}{ fromEnd = false}}
Searches for the given character. Returns the starting index, or -1 if not found.
Same as \helpref{wxString::Find}{wxstringfind}.
-\constfunc{size\_t}{Index}{\param{const char*}{ sz}, \param{bool}{ caseSensitive = TRUE}, \param{bool}{ fromEnd = FALSE}}
+\constfunc{size\_t}{Index}{\param{const char*}{ sz}, \param{bool}{ caseSensitive = true}, \param{bool}{ fromEnd = false}}
Search the element in the array, starting from either side.
-If {\it fromEnd} is TRUE, reverse search direction.
+If {\it fromEnd} is true, reverse search direction.
If {\bf caseSensitive}, comparison is case sensitive (the default).
\constfunc{bool}{IsAscii}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the string contains only ASCII characters.
+Returns true if the string contains only ASCII characters.
\membersection{wxString::IsEmpty}\label{wxstringisempty}
\constfunc{bool}{IsEmpty}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the string is empty.
+Returns true if the string is empty.
\membersection{wxString::IsNull}\label{wxstringisnull}
\constfunc{bool}{IsNull}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the string is empty (same as \helpref{IsEmpty}{wxstringisempty}).
+Returns true if the string is empty (same as \helpref{IsEmpty}{wxstringisempty}).
\membersection{wxString::IsNumber}\label{wxstringisnumber}
\constfunc{bool}{IsNumber}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the string is an integer (with possible sign).
+Returns true if the string is an integer (with possible sign).
\membersection{wxString::IsSameAs}\label{wxstringissameas}
-\constfunc{bool}{IsSameAs}{\param{const char*}{ psz}, \param{bool}{ caseSensitive = TRUE}}
+\constfunc{bool}{IsSameAs}{\param{const char*}{ psz}, \param{bool}{ caseSensitive = true}}
Test for string equality, case-sensitive (default) or not.
-caseSensitive is TRUE by default (case matters).
+caseSensitive is true by default (case matters).
-Returns TRUE if strings are equal, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if strings are equal, false otherwise.
See also \helpref{Cmp}{wxstringcmp}, \helpref{CmpNoCase}{wxstringcmpnocase}, \helpref{IsSameAs}{wxstringissameas2}
\membersection{wxString::IsSameAs}\label{wxstringissameas2}
-\constfunc{bool}{IsSameAs}{\param{char}{ c}, \param{bool}{ caseSensitive = TRUE}}
+\constfunc{bool}{IsSameAs}{\param{char}{ c}, \param{bool}{ caseSensitive = true}}
Test whether the string is equal to the single character {\it c}. The test is
-case-sensitive if {\it caseSensitive} is TRUE (default) or not if it is FALSE.
+case-sensitive if {\it caseSensitive} is true (default) or not if it is false.
-Returns TRUE if the string is equal to the character, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if the string is equal to the character, false otherwise.
See also \helpref{Cmp}{wxstringcmp}, \helpref{CmpNoCase}{wxstringcmpnocase}, \helpref{IsSameAs}{wxstringissameas}
\constfunc{bool}{IsWord}{\void}
-Returns TRUE if the string is a word. TODO: what's the definition of a word?
+Returns true if the string is a word. TODO: what's the definition of a word?
\membersection{wxString::Last}\label{wxstringlast}
\constfunc{bool}{Matches}{\param{const char*}{ szMask}}
-Returns TRUE if the string contents matches a mask containing '*' and '?'.
+Returns true if the string contents matches a mask containing '*' and '?'.
\membersection{wxString::Mid}\label{wxstringmid}
\membersection{wxString::Pad}\label{wxstringpad}
-\func{wxString\&}{Pad}{\param{size\_t}{ count}, \param{char}{ pad = ' '}, \param{bool}{ fromRight = TRUE}}
+\func{wxString\&}{Pad}{\param{size\_t}{ count}, \param{char}{ pad = ' '}, \param{bool}{ fromRight = true}}
Adds {\it count} copies of {\it pad} to the beginning, or to the end of the string (the default).
\membersection{wxString::Replace}\label{wxstringreplace}
-\func{size\_t}{Replace}{\param{const char*}{ szOld}, \param{const char*}{ szNew}, \param{bool}{ replaceAll = TRUE}}
+\func{size\_t}{Replace}{\param{const char*}{ szOld}, \param{const char*}{ szNew}, \param{bool}{ replaceAll = true}}
Replace first (or all) occurrences of substring with another one.
\constfunc{bool}{StartsWith}{\param{const wxChar }{*prefix}, \param{wxString }{*rest = NULL}}
This function can be used to test if the string starts with the specified
-{\it prefix}. If it does, the function will return {\tt TRUE} and put the rest
+{\it prefix}. If it does, the function will return {\tt true} and put the rest
of the string (i.e. after the prefix) into {\it rest} string if it is not
-{\tt NULL}. Otherwise, the function returns {\tt FALSE} and doesn't modify the
+{\tt NULL}. Otherwise, the function returns {\tt false} and doesn't modify the
{\it rest}.
\membersection{wxString::Strip}\label{wxstringstrip}
\constfunc{bool}{ToDouble}{\param{double}{ *val}}
-Attempts to convert the string to a floating point number. Returns TRUE on
-success (the number is stored in the location pointed to by {\it val}) or FALSE
+Attempts to convert the string to a floating point number. Returns true on
+success (the number is stored in the location pointed to by {\it val}) or false
if the string does not represent such number.
\wxheading{See also}
\constfunc{bool}{ToLong}{\param{long}{ *val}, \param{int }{base = $10$}}
Attempts to convert the string to a signed integer in base {\it base}. Returns
-{\tt TRUE} on success in which case the number is stored in the location
-pointed to by {\it val} or {\tt FALSE} if the string does not represent a
+{\tt true} on success in which case the number is stored in the location
+pointed to by {\it val} or {\tt false} if the string does not represent a
valid number in the given base.
The value of {\it base} must be comprised between $2$ and $36$, inclusive, or
\constfunc{bool}{ToULong}{\param{unsigned long}{ *val}, \param{int }{base = $10$}}
Attempts to convert the string to a ansigned integer in base {\it base}.
-Returns {\tt TRUE} on success in which case the number is stored in the
-location pointed to by {\it val} or {\tt FALSE} if the string does not
+Returns {\tt true} on success in which case the number is stored in the
+location pointed to by {\it val} or {\tt false} if the string does not
represent a valid number in the given base.
See \helpref{wxString::ToLong}{wxstringtolong} for the more detailed
\membersection{wxString::Trim}\label{wxstringtrim}
-\func{wxString\&}{Trim}{\param{bool}{ fromRight = TRUE}}
+\func{wxString\&}{Trim}{\param{bool}{ fromRight = true}}
Removes spaces from the left or from the right (default).
\constfunc{bool}{operator!}{\void}
-Empty string is FALSE, so !string will only return TRUE if the string is empty.
+Empty string is false, so !string will only return true if the string is empty.
This allows the tests for NULLness of a {\it const char *} pointer and emptyness
of the string to look the same in the code and makes it easier to port old code
to wxString.
\membersection{wxXmlResource::FindResource}\label{wxxmlresourcefindresource}
-\func{wxXmlNode*}{FindResource}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{const wxString\& }{classname}, \param{bool }{recursive = FALSE}}
+\func{wxXmlNode*}{FindResource}{\param{const wxString\& }{name}, \param{const wxString\& }{classname}, \param{bool }{recursive = false}}
Finds a resource (calls UpdateResources) and returns a node containing it.
\func{bool}{CanHandle}{\param{wxXmlNode* }{node}}
-Returns TRUE if it understands this node and can create
-a resource from it, FALSE otherwise.
+Returns true if it understands this node and can create
+a resource from it, false otherwise.
\wxheading{Note}
\membersection{wxXmlResourceHandler::CreateChildren}\label{wxxmlresourcehandlercreatechildren}
-\func{void}{CreateChildren}{\param{wxObject* }{parent}, \param{bool }{this\_hnd\_only = FALSE}}
+\func{void}{CreateChildren}{\param{wxObject* }{parent}, \param{bool }{this\_hnd\_only = false}}
Creates children.
\membersection{wxXmlResourceHandler::GetBool}\label{wxxmlresourcehandlergetbool}
-\func{bool}{GetBool}{\param{const wxString\& }{param}, \param{bool }{defaultv = FALSE}}
+\func{bool}{GetBool}{\param{const wxString\& }{param}, \param{bool }{defaultv = false}}
-Gets a bool flag (1, t, yes, on, true are TRUE, everything else is FALSE).
+Gets a bool flag (1, t, yes, on, true are true, everything else is false).
\membersection{wxXmlResourceHandler::GetColour}\label{wxxmlresourcehandlergetcolour}
projects / wxWidgets.git / commitdiff
